IIT Foundation Class 7 Physics

IIT FOUNDATION
Class VII
PHYSICS
© USN Edutech Private Limited
The moral rights of the author’s have been asserted.
This Workbook is for personal and non-commercial use only and must not be sold, lent, hired or given
to anyone else.
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or
transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise
without the prior written permission of USN Edutech Private Limited. Any breach will entail legal
action and prosecution without further notice.
Utmost care and attention to the details is taken while editing and printing this book. However, USN
Edutech Private Limited and the Publisher do not take any legal responsibility for any errors or
misrepresentations that might have crept in.
Published by : USN Eductech Private Limited

Hyderabad, India.
PREFACE
Our sincere endeavour in preparing this Book is to enable students effectively grasp & understand the Concepts of
Physics and help them build a strong foundation in this Subject.
From among hundreds of questions being made available in this Book, the Student would be able to extensively practice
in each concept exclusively, throughout that Chapter. At the end of each Chapter, two or three Worksheets are provided
with questions which shall cover the entire Chapter, helping each Student consolidate his / her learning.
This Book help students prepare for their respective Examinations including but not limited to i.e. CBSE, ICSE, various
State Boards and Competitive Examinations like IIT, NEET, NTSE, Science Olympiads etc. It is compiled by our in-
house team of experts who have a collective experience of more than 40 years in their respective subject matter /
academic backgrounds.
This books help students understand concepts and their retention through constant practice. It enables them solve
question which are ‘fundamental / foundational’ as well questions which needs ‘higher order thinking’. Students gain the
ability to concentrate, to be self-reliant, and hopefully become confident in the subject matter as they traverse through
this Book.
The important features of this books are:
1. Lucidly presented Concepts: For ease of understanding, the ‘Concepts’ are briefly presented in simple, easy
and comprehensible language.
2. Learning Outcomes: Each chapter starts with ‘Learning Outcomes’ grid conveying what the student is going to
learn / gain from this chapter.
3. Bold-faced Key Terms: The key words, concepts, definitions, formulae, statements, etc., are presented in ‘bold
face’, indicating their importance.
4. Tables and Charts: Numerous strategically placed tables & charts, list out etc. summarizes the important
information, making it readily accessible for effective study.
5. Box Items: Are ‘highlighted special topics’ that helps students explore / investigate the subject matter thoroughly.
6. Photographs, Illustrations: A wide array of visually appealing and informative photographs are used to help the
students understand various phenomena and inculcate interest, enhance learning in the subject matter.
7. Flow Diagrams: To help students understand the steps in problem-solving, flow diagrams have been included as
needed for various important concepts. These diagrams allow the students visualize the workflow to solve such
problems.
8. Summary Charts: At the end of few important concepts or the chapter, a summary / blueprint is presented which
includes a complete overview of that concept / chapter. It shall help students review the learning in a snapshot.
9. Formative Worksheets: After every concept / few concepts, a ‘Formative Worksheet’ / ‘Classroom Worksheet’
with appropriate questions are provided from such concept/s. The solutions for these problems shall ideally be
discussed by the Teacher in the classroom.
10. Conceptive Worksheets: These questions are in addition the above questions and are from that respective
concept/s. They are advised to be solved beyond classroom as a ‘Homework’. This rigor, shall help students
consolidate their learning as they are exposed to new type of questions related to those concept/s.
11. Summative Worksheets: At the end of each chapter, this worksheet is presented and shall contain questions
based on all the concepts of that chapter. Unlike Formative Worksheet and Conceptive Worksheet questions, the
questions in this worksheet encourage the students to apply their learnings acquired from that entire chapter and
solve the problems analytically.
12. HOTS Worksheets: Most of the times, Summative Worksheet is followed by an HOTS (Higher Order Thinking
Skills) worksheet containing advanced type of questions. The concepts can be from the same chapter or as many
chapters from the Book. By solving these problems, the students are prepared to face challenging questions that
appear in actual competitive entrance examinations. However, strengthening the foundation of students in
academics is the main objective of this worksheet.
13. IIT JEE / NEET Worksheets: Finally, every chapters end with a IIT JEE / NEET worksheet. This worksheet
contains the questions which have appeared in various competitive examinations like IIT, NEET, AIEEE, EAMCET,
KCET, TCET, JIMPER, BHU, AIIMS, CBSE, ICSE, State Boards, CET etc. related to this chapter. This gives real-
time experience to students and helps them face various competitive examinations.
14. Different Types of Questions: These type of questions do appear in various competitive examinations. They
include:
• Objective Type with Single Answer Correct • Non-Objective Type

• Objective Type with > one Answer Correct • True or False Type
• Statement Type - I (Two Statements) • Statement Type - II (Two Statements)
• MatchingType - I (Two Columns) • MatchingType - II (Three Columns)
• Assertion and Reasoning Type • Statement and Explanation Type
• Roadmap Type • FigurativeType
• Comprehension Type • And many more...
We would like to thank all members of different departments at BeTOPPERS who played a key role in bringing out
this student-friendly Book.
We sincerely hope that this Book will prove useful to the students who wish to build a strong Foundation in Physics
and aim to achieve success in various boards / competitive examinations.
Further, we believe that as there is always scope for improvement, we value constructive criticism of the subject
matter, as well as suggestions for improving this Book. All suggestions hopefully, shall be duly incorporated in
the next edition.
Wish you all the best!!!
Team BeTOPPERS
CONTENTS
1. Measurement .......... 01 - 20
2. Motion .......... 21 - 38
3. Light .......... 39 - 56
4. Electric Current & Its Effects .......... 57 - 80
5. Wind, Storm and Cyclones .......... 81 - 94
6. Sound .......... 95 - 108
7. Heat .......... 109 - 122
8. Key and Answers .......... 123 - 184

Learning Outcomes Measurement
Chapter -1
By the end of this chapter, you will understand
• Physical Quantity • Measurement of Time

• Units • Measurement of Area
• Types of Physical Quantities • Measurement of Volume
• System of Units • Measurement of Density
• Multiples of Ten • Relative density
• Measurement of length
• Measurement of mass
Characteristics of Standard Unit
1. Introduction
1. It should be definite, without any doubt or
In our daily life, we tend to guess the distance of ambiguity.
our school from our home, the time taken by us to 2. It should not change with respect to space and
take our lunch and our body weight. Such guess time.
may not be accurate, but in science measurement 3. It should be reproduced easily .
needs to be accurate. Therefore, proper 4. It should be of convenient size to measure
measurement techniques need to be learnt. small and bulk quantities.
Measurement is the comparision of an unknown
quantity with a known standard quantity of same 4. Types of Physical Quantities
kind. Another important thing is to identify a quantity Fundamental Quantities
that can be measured (known as physical quantity). These quantities does not depend on other physical
Generally most of the measurements are based on quantities.
physical quantities like length, mass, time, Example:
temperature etc., Length, mass and time are independent
In measuring a physical quantity one needs to have fundamental quantities.
an idea of its various units, their inter-relationships Derived Quantities
and also the various devices used for its These quantities are defined in terms of fundamental
measurement. quantities.
Eg: Area, density, volume are derived quantities.
2. Physical Quantity
i) A physical quantity is a quanity that can be 5. System of Units
measured.
The fundamental units of length, mass and time
ii) Physical quantity is expressed by stating
taken together form a system of units. For
• Magnitude of the physical quantity.
measuring various physical quantities following
• The unit employed.
systems are commonly adopted.
Therefore, physical quantity = magnitude × unit
Name of the Unit
3. Units
System Length Mass Time
Standard Unit
The unit plays an important role in the description F.P.S Foot Pound Second
of a physical quantity. In olden days, the unit used C.G.S Centimeter Gram Second
for a particular physical quantity was person
dependant like measuring length of cloth through M.K.S Metre Kilogram Second
arm-length and its length varied from person to In S.I system the units for length, mass and time
person. To overcome this, a beaurau in paris are same as that of M.K.S system.
specified standards units to measure physical
quantities more accurately.
2 7th Class Physics
Rules for writing symbols of Units Positive Prefix or Symbol

Rule 1: A unit named after a scientist must not multiples of 10 Name
start with a capital letter when the 10 18 Exa E
complete name is written. 10 15 Peta P
The work done by a body is 10 joule but not 10 12 Terra T
10 Joule. 109 Giga G
If only the first letter is used as a symbol, it 106 Mega M
must be a capital letter. 103 Kilo K
Thus, the work done can be represented a s 102 Hecto H
10 J. 101 Deca D
Rule 2: The units other than those named after Positive Prefix or Symbol
scientists i.e., all other units are multiples of 10 Name
symbolically represented by small 101 deci d
letters.
102 centi c
If the length of a rod is 2 metres, it is written
103 milli m
as 2 m.
If the time taken by a ball to hit the ground 106 micro 
is 5 seconds, it is written as 5 s. 109 nano n
Rule 3: Symbols for units do not take plural 1012 pico p
15
form 10 femto f
The mass of a body is 10 Kg but not 10 Kgs 1018 atto a
The force acting on a body is 10 newton
and not 10 newtons. Formative Worksheet
Rule 4: No full stop or punctuation mark 1. Amount of work done is 10 Joule, here 10 stands
should be used within or at the end of for
symbols for units. (A) Unit (B) Numerical value
The mass of a body is 10 Kg but not 10Kg. (C) Both (1) and (2) (D) None of these
(full stop () should be omitted) 2. Which physical quantity unit is same in all systems
The force acting on a body is 10 N and not
10 N: (A) Length (B) Mass
(colon ( : ) should be omitted) (C) Time (D) Temperature
2
6. Multiples of Ten 3. 1 cm = ______________
(A) 104 m2 (B) 103m2
The study of nature involves objects of small size 2 2
(C) 10 m (D) 102 mm2
like atom, nucleus etc.
4. 10 kg m–3 = _____________ g cm–3
They belong to the small world (microcosm).
(A) 1000 (B) 1
If we measure the diameter of hydrogen atom (in
(C) 10–2 (D) 100
microcosm) it will be described by a very small
5. Which of the following are the examples for physical
number 0.000,000,000,106m.
quantity?
It also involves celestial objects of the universe like
(A) Length (B) Area
the sun, planets, moon, stars, etc.
(C) Force (D) Energy
They belong to the cosmic world (macrocosm).
6. Convert 100 quintal into nano grams (ng).
The diameter of the sun will be described by a very
(A) 105 ng (B) 1016ng
large number 1,390,000,000m. 17
(C) 10 ng (D) 1018 ng
The above numbers are exceptionally big and
7. Convert 1 second into day.
difficult to write or remember.
How then can this task be simplified? 1
It can be simplified by expressing in terms of (A) Day (B) 24 day
86, 400
multiples of 10.
The following chart shows some multiples of 10 1 1
and their corresponding names or prefixes : (C) day (D) day
24 3600
www.betoppers.com
Measurement 3
8. 1 hectare = _______________. 16. Match the following

(A) 102 cm2 (B) 104 cm2 Column-I Column-II
(C) 106 cm2 (D) 108 cm2 (A) Unit of length in F.P.S p) m
9. 16 kg/m = ___________ g/cm3
3 (B) Unit of mass in C.G.S q) foot
(A) 16 × 10–3 (B) 26 × 10–6 (C) Unit of time r) metre
(C) 36 × 10 –3
(D) 46 × 10–6 s) pound
10. If 1 nano gram = 10x milligram, then x = t) second
17. Match the following
(A) 6 (B) –6 (C) 9 (D) –9
Column-I Column-II
(A) Derived unit p) Height
Column-I Column-II (B) Fundamental unit q) Thickness
(A) Giga p) 106 (C) Derived quantity r) Area
(B) micro q) 1/102 (D) Fundamental quantity s) Newton
(C) Mega r) 109 t) Kilogram
(D) Pico s) 10–6
t) 10–12 Conceptive Worksheet
12. Choose the correct statement. 1. Physical quantity = Numerical value × ________
(A) Number of fundamental quantities are limited. (A) Standard number (B) Standard Unit
(B) In M.K.S System, there are 7 fundamental (C) Standard value (D) None of these
quantities 2. To measure any physical quantity __________
should be required.
(C) Number of fundamental quantities are
(A) Time (B) Mass (C) Unit (D) Length
unlimited.
3. The S.I. system has how many basic units?
(D) Units of fundamental quantities in M.K.S is
(A) 15 (B) 7 (C) 10 (D) 8
same as in SI.
4. 60 kilogram in short form is written as
13. Choose the correct options (A) 60 kg (B) 60 kg
(A) nm is not same as mN (C) Both (A) and (B) (D) None
(B) 1nm = 10–9m and 1 mN = 10–3N. 5. Which among the following is the international
(C) When we change the unit of measurement of a system of units ?
quantity, its numerical value changes. (A) S.I. (B) F.P.S (C) C.G.S (D) M.K.S
(D) Smaller the unit of measurement, smaller is its 6. A physical quantities which are independent of other
numerical value. physical quantities are
14. Statement - I : Meter is the standard by which we (A) Fundamental quantities
can measure length. (B) Derived quantities
Statement - II : Second is the standard by which (C) Both (A) and (B)
we can measure time. (D) Neither fundamental nor derivered
(A) Both Statements are true, Statement - II is the 7. Unit of area is a
correct explanation of Statement - I. (A) Derived unit (B) Fundamental unit
(B) Both Statements are true, Statement - II is not (C) Both (A) and (B) (D) None of these
correct explanation of Statement - I. 8. The unit of speed is a
(C) Statement - I is true, Statement - II is false. (A) Fundamental unit (B) Derived unit
(C) Neither of above (D) Cannot say
(D) Statement - I is false, Statement - II is true.
9. Which of the following are derived quantities
15. Statement I : Fundamental units are the units for
(A) Speed (B) Velocity
measuring fundamental quantities.
(C) Perimeter (D) Both (A) and (B)
Statement II : Metre is the unit of length. 10. Which of the following quantities are used to derive
(A) Both Statements are true, Statement - II is the the quantity density
correct explanation of Statement - I. (A) Mass (B) Area
(B) Both Statements are true, Statement - II is not (C) Volume (D) Both (A) and (C)
correct explanation of Statement - I. 11. Which of the following are fundamental quantities
(C) Statement - I is true, Statement - II is false. (A) Length (B) Height
(D) Statement - I is false, Statement - II is true. (C) Radius (D) All of these
www.betoppers.com
4 7th Class Physics
12. The symbol for unit of force in M.K.S. I. Least Count

(A) n (B) N
(C) nN (D) none of these The smallest quantity that can be measured
13. One metric tonne = _________ quintal. accurately using any instrument is known as least
(A) 10,000 (B) 1000 count of that instrument.
(C) 100 (D) 10 Least count of regular scale (LC) = 1mm
14. 1 fermi is equal to how many centimetre
(A) 10–15 cm (B) 10–13 cm 1
= cm
(C) 10–12 cm (D) 10–10 cm. 10
15. How many centimetre make 1 nano metre
(A) 10–7 cm (B) 10–5 cm Mesurement of curved lines can be done by using
(C) 10–15 cm (D) 10–10 cm a piece of thread.
2
16. 1 k m = _______. Thickness of coin by a centimetre scale or
(A) 1 hectare (B) 10 hectares millimetre scale is
(C) 100 hectares (D) 1000 hectares
17. 1 litre = _______. Thickness of one coin
(A) 1000 ml (B) 1000 cc
(C) both (A) and (B) (D) None of these Thickness  cm or mm  of 'n ' of coins
18. 1 cm2 = _______. =
Number of coins  n 
(A) 10–10 km2 (B) 10–8 hectares
–4 2
(C) 10 m (D) all of these Diametre of a wire
19. The acceleration of a car is 51840 km/h2. The same
in m/s2 is _______.
Length of the coins
(A) 4 (B) 8 Diameter =
(C) 12 (D) None Number of turns in the coil
20. 0.4 sq.cm is ___________ sq. km
(A) 4×10–10 (B) 4×10–11 The diameter of spherical object can be measured
(C) 0.4×10 –11
(D) 4×10–9 by placing the object between two wooden blocks
as shown in the figure.
21. 1 g (micro gram) = _______________ g
(A) 10–10 (B) 10–8
(C) 10–6 (D) 10–4
7. Measurement of Length
Length is the distance between two fixed points.
The diameter of spherical object = x2 – x1

SI unit - metre(m) II. Measurement of very large Distances
C.G.S unit - centimetre(cm)
Distance between earth and moon, or earth and
The various units used to measure length are m, sun can’t be done by using conventional units. Such
mm, c, m, km etc. large distances are expressed using following units.
The inter-relationship among these units with a III. Astronomical unit(A.U)
standard unit:
It is the average distance of the earth from the sun.
1 micro metre = 1 m = 10–6 m
1 A.U = 1.496 × 1011m
-3
1 millimetre = 1mm = 10 m
1 centimetre 1cm = 10-2m
1kilometre = 103m
www.betoppers.com
Measurement 5
27. Arrange the following lengths in their increasing

Formative Worksheet magnitude:
18. In decreasing magnitude which of the following is 1 metre, 1 centimetre, 1 kilometre, 1 millimetre.
correct ? (A) 1 centimetre < 1 millimetre < 1 kilometre
(A) km, cm, m, mm (B) km, m, cm, mm < 1 metre
(C) m, km, cm, mm (D) km, cm, mm, m (B) 1 millimetre < 1 centimetre < 1 metre <
19. The number of rounds of a wire around a pencil 1 kilometre
are 24 and the length of the coil is 4.8cm then what (C) 1 kilometre < 1 metre < 1 centimetre < 1
is the diameter of wire ? millimetre
(A) 24 cm (B) 2.4 cm (D) none
(C) 20 cm (D) 0.2 cm 28. 1 Angstrom = ____.
20. The distance between Radha’s home and her school (A) 10-10m (B) 10-8m
is 3250 m. Express this distance into km. (C) 10-6mm (D) 10-10cm
(A) 32.5 km (B) 3.25 km 29. 1AU = _______.
(C) 0.325 km (D) 0.0325 km (A) 1.496 × 1011m (B) 1.496 × 109cm
21. The height of a person is 1.65 m. Express this value (C) 1.496 × 108m (D) 1.444 × 106m
in mm. 30. The size of bacteria is generally measured in
(A) 16.5 mm (B) 165 mm microns. The micrometre  μ m  , is often called the
(C) 1650 mm (D) 16500 mm
micron. How many microns make up 1 kilometre ?
22. While measuring the diameter of the ball, the inner
(A) 103 (B) 106
edges of the wooden block stood at 3.4cm and 9
(C) 10 (D) 1012
4.7cm on a scale. Calculate the diameter of the
31. Least count of a metre scale is _______.
ball ?
(A) 1cm (B) 0.1mm
(A) 1.3 cm (B) 7.7 cm
(C) 0.1cm (D) 0.01mm
(C) 0.13 cm (D) 0.77 cm
23. Fill in the blanks
(i) 1 cm = mm. 8. Measurement of Mass
(ii) 1 dm = metre. Mass is the amount of matter contained in a body.
(iii) 1 kilometre = metre. Mass is measured using devices like common
(iv) 1 metre = centimetre. balance, physical balance etc.,
24. Fill in the blanks with < or > sign. SI unit of mass is kg.
(i) 1 decametre 1 decimetre. The other units of mass are milligram(mg), gram(g),
(ii) 1 millimetre 1 centimetre. tonne, quintal.
(iii) 1 hectometre 1 kilometre. 1mg = 10-3g
(iv) 1 decimetre 1 centimetre. 1quintal = 100kg
1tonne = 1000kg
Conceptive Worksheet 9. Measurement of Time
22. What is the SI unit of length? The dictionary defines time as the period
(A) Metre (B) Centimetre between two events.
(C) Kilometre (D) All of these
23. 4 kilometre are equal to
(A) 4, 00, 000 metre (B) 40, 000 metre Need to Measure Time
(C) 4, 000 metre (D) 400 metre The need to measure time was felt by human beings
24. 15 cm is equal to a long, long time ago. In every civilization, and every
(A) 150 mm (B) 15mm culture, however ancient, there has been evidence
(C) 1.5 mm (D) 0.15 mm of people keeping track of the passage of time. In
25. Which is a correct relationship? very ancient times, people used to keep track of
(A) 1m= 100 cm (B) 1 cm = 10 mm the passage of days. As the complexity of their
(C) 1 km = 1000 m (D) all the correct lives increased, people felt the need to split the day
26. 1 cm = _________ kilometre. into smaller periods.
(A) 100 (B) 105 (C) 10–5 (D) 10–2
www.betoppers.com
6 7th Class Physics
Today, we measure time for a variety of streamed down from the top bulb into the bottom
applications: bulb, giving the time.
• We go to school on time and do everything
there on time.
• The doctor checks how many times our heart
beats in one minute.
• We need to know when a train or plane will
arrive or what is the duration of the journey.
• How long a TV programme or a movie will
take.
• The amount of time a computer will take to Modern Instruments
perform an operation, and so on. These instruments were not very accurate. There
The list is endless . . . was a need to have instruments that were more
Measurement of Time accurate and gave a better precision of time.
In the beginning, people used calendars to keep i) Pendulum Clock
track of years, which were divided into months The major breakthrough came in 1656, when
and days (not exactly what we use today, but Christian Huygens made the first pendulum clock.
something similar). Later, people started keeping It consisted of weights and a swinging pendulum.
track of the time of the day. They started building These clocks were much more reliable than the
various instruments to divide the day into smaller earlier ones.
parts.
Measurement of Time
An instrument used to measure time is called clock
.
Ancient Instruments
i) Water Clock
Water clock was used in different parts of the world.
It worked on the principle of regulated flow of
water.
ii) Atomic Clock
Another major advancement in timekeeping was
the invention of the atomic clock, which is very
accurate.
ii) Sundial
Sundials use the movement of the shadow of a rod
struck upright in the ground, whose shadow
changed direction with the movement of the sun iii) Stop Watches
across the sky. Today, clocks are used not only to tell the time of
the day, but are also used as timers in ovens, in
stopwatches used in various athletic events, etc.
iii) Hour Glass

It consist of two rounded glass bulbs connected by
a narrow neck of glass. The top bulb was filled
with sand and a measured amount of sand particles
www.betoppers.com
Measurement 7
iv) Timer The time taken to complete one oscillation is called
A timer is a special type of clock. It is used to control the time period of the pendulum.
the sequence of an event. These are used in For example, if the bob starts from point A goes to
appliances such as traffic signals, washing machines, points B and C, and C comes back to point A, it
and the highly explosive time bombs. completes one oscillation.
1. The time taken for a pendulum to complete one
oscillation does not depend on the extent to which
the bob of the pendulum is displaced.
2. The time period does not depend on the mass of
the bob used (within reasonable limits).
3. The time period depends on the length of the string
or wire used.
Units of Time Greater the length of the string greater is the time
The SI unit of time is the second. Some other units period .
of time are shown below. This means that if the length of the pendulum is
fixed, its time period is constant.
60 seconds 1 minute Scientists began to build new clocks based on this
60 minutes 1 hour property of the pendulum.
24 hours 1 day
365 days 1 year Formative Worksheet
10 years 1 decade 25. One quintal = ______________ton.
10 decades 1 century (A) 10 (B) 100 (C) 0.1 (D) 0.01
10 centuries 1 millennium 26. 1 metric tonne = __________ milligram.
Measurement of Time by a Periodic Motion (A) 103 (B) 106 (C) 109 (D) 1012
Any object that is moving is said to be in motion. 27. 1 microsecond = 10x milliseconds. Find x.
A motion that repeats itself in equal intervals is called (A) +1 (B) + 3 (C) –1 (D) –3
Periodic Motion. 28. 1 kg = –––––––––– tonne.
Examples: (A) 100 (B) 1000 (C) 10–3 (D) 10–2
Motion of Earth round the Sun, Motion of Moon 29. A truck of weigh 4.4tonnes. Its value in kg?
round the Earth, Oscillation of Pendulum (A) 4400 kg (B) 440 kg
(C) 44 kg (D) 4.4 kg
Simple Pendulum
30. How many seconds are equal to 6hours 8min?
(A) 86400 sec (B) 43200 sec
(C) 1296480 sec (D) 648240 sec
31. Match the following:
Column-1 Column-2
(A) 1 minute p) 100 years
(B) 1 day q) 365 days
(C) 1 year r) 24 hours
(D) 1 Century s) 60 s
32. Match the following:
Column-1 Column-2
A small mass that is suspended from a fixed point (A) 1 hour p) 1400 min
and allowed to swing freely under the influence of (B) 1 day q) 60 min
gravity is called a pendulum. An ideal, simple (C) 1 year r) 36500 days
pendulum consists of a small mass (like a stone or (D) 1 Century s) 8760 hours
a metal ball) called a bob suspended by a string. 33. x is the number of years in a decade. y is the number
When the bob moves from one position and comes of decades in a century and z is the number of
back to the same position, it is said to complete one centuries in a millenium. Find x : y : z.
Oscillation. (A) 1 : 1 : 1 (B) 1 : 2 : 1
(C) 1 : 2 : 3 (D) 2 : 3 : 4
www.betoppers.com
8 7th Class Physics
1 minute 60minutes 39. In the figure, if the time taken by the bob to move
34. + = x and
60s 1hour from A to B is 0.5 second, the time period of the
pendulum is _________.
1 decade 10decades
+ = y . Find x + y..
10 years 1 century
(A) 2 (B) 4
(C) 8 (D) 16
35. Imagine this hypothetical situation. The wealth
possessed by the richest person of this world is
Avogadro number (6.023×10 23 ) of dollars. He
thought of donating his entire wealth to the needy (A) 0.5sec (B) 1 sec
and make their living healthy. His life span is (C) 1.5sec (D) 2 sec
assumed to be 90 years and he is now 45. The rate 40. The time period of a simple pendulum is 2 seconds.
of donation is 5000 dollars per second and from
now, every second of his existence is only used for 1
The time taken by it to complete oscillation,is
donation. Can he empty all his wealth in this life? 2
Justify your answer. __________.
36. An unusual running race was organised between a (A) 1sec (B) 2sec
rabbit and an ant. By the time rabbit moves (C) 4sec (D) 8sec
1 m in one second, ant moves 1mm (millimetre) in 41. The time period of a simple pendulum is 5 seconds.
the same time. How much time will ant takes to If mass of the bob is increased to 4 times the
cover the distance covered by the rabbit in 1 second? original, the new time period of it is _______.
(A) 20sec (B) 15sec
37. The average lifespan of a lion in the wild is up to 16 (C) 10sec (D) 5sec
years. If average number of days in a year is 365 42. There is a pendulum clock showing right time at a
days. Express this age in hours. given place. The length and mass of it is increased
(A) 1600 (B) 5840 to two times the original. Will there be any change
in showing time. If so explain.
(C) 140160 (D) 8409600
38. In physics, the Planck time, (tP), is the unit of time
Conceptive Worksheet
in the system of natural units known as Planck units. 32. 1quintal = __________kg.
It is the time required for light to travel, in a vacuum, (A) 100kg (B) 1000kg
a distance of 1 Planck length (C) 10kg (D) 500kg
( 1.6 ×10–35 m) .The unit is named after Max Planck, 33. 1mean solar day = _________.
who was the first to propose it. The value of Planck (A) 365days (B) 10years
time is approximately equal to (C) 24hours (D) 60minutes
5.32 ×10–44 s. And Century is one of the larger 34. Match the following:
units of time and is equal to 100 years. Find Column-1 Column-2
approximately how many Planck time’s make one (A) Water Clock p) Sand
century. (Take one year = 365 days) (B) Sun dial q) Flow of Water
(C) Hour glass r) Shadow
(A) 1 Century = 5.89 × 1052 tP 35. Which of these is not a unit of time?
(B) 1 Century = 5.89 × 10 62 tP (A) Second (B) Light year
(C) Hour (D) Century
(C) 1 Century = 5.89 × 1072 tP 36. Which of these is a type of clock?
(D) None of these (A) Hourglass (B) Sundial
(C) Pendulum clock (D) All
www.betoppers.com
Measurement 9
37. Which of these clocks would you expect to be the 10. Measurement of Area
most accurate?
The amount of surface occupied by an object or a
(A) Pendulum clock (B) Atomic clock
place is called its area.
(C) Sundial (D) Water clock
In Standard International (S.I.) system the unit of
38. The time period of the seconds pendulum is 2
area is square metre. In short form square metre is
seconds. Now, match the following with respect to
written as metre square.
seconds pendulum.
The area of a square surface having each side equal
Column-1 Column-2
to one metre is called square metre (m2).
A) 1 oscillation p) 8 seconds
figure shows a square surface ABCD, such that
1 AB = BC = CD = AD = 1 m. The area of the
B) oscillation q) 2 seconds surface enclosed by ABCD (not drawn to scale) is
2
1m2
1 Relation between cm2 and m2 :
C) oscillation r) 1 second
4 1m2 = 1 m × 1m
D) 4 oscillations r) 0.5 second  1m2 = 100 cm × 100 cm
39. If the Charminar superfast express staying 00 hours or 1 m2 = 10000 cm2 or
in Warangal, then the time in 12 hour clock is
1
_________ 1cm 2  m 2  104 m2
10000
(A) 12 O’ clock at night
Multiples of Standard Unit of Area
(B) 12 O’ clock at noon
(C) 18 O’ clock at night For measuring bigger areas, such as area of field or
towns, metre square is a very small unit. Thus, a
(D) 18 O’ clock at noon
bigger unit is used, which is called hectare.
40. A passenger goes to Secunderabad railway station.
One hectare is the surface area of a square whose
He asked the enquiry counter, “When did Tirumala
each side is equal to 100 m.
express come?” The enquiry counter person replied
“18 hour 15 minutes.” Then the time in his 12-hour Note:100m is called hectometer and 1 square
clock was ________. hectometer is called hectare.
(A) 5 hour – 45 minutes AM 1 square hectometer = 1 hectometer × 1 hectometer
= 100m × 100m = 10000m2
(B) 5 hour – 45 minutes PM
100m2 is called are
(C) 6 hour – 15 minutes AM
(D) 6 hour – 15 minutes PM  1 hectare = 100 acres = 100 × 100m2
= 104 m2 .
41. Fill in the following blanks:
1 hectare = 100 m × 100 m, 1 hectare = 10000 m2
i) _____________(Century/minute) is a very
large unit of time. 2 1
or 1m  hectare 104 hectare
ii) One _____________ is equal to 10 centuries. 10000
iii) _____________ made the first pendulum For measuring further bigger areas, such as the area
clock. of district or a province or a country, even hectare
iv) _____________ is the time taken to is a very small and inconvenient unit. Thus, a bigger
complete one oscillation. unit is used which is called square kilometre
v) _____________ is the SI unit of time. (km2 ).
42. The time period of a simple pendulum depends on One square kilometre (km2 ) is the surface area
(A) The length of the string used of a square whose each side is equal to 1 km
(B) The mass of the bob 1 km2=1000 m × 1000 m, 1 km2 = 1000, 000 m2
(C) The extent to which the bob is displaced 1 km2 = 100 hectares
(D) None of these
www.betoppers.com
10 7th Class Physics
47. How many small squares are there in 1sq.cm ?

Formative Worksheet (A) 1000 (B) 100 (C) 10 (D) 1
43. 1 cm2 = ________. 48. Area of irregular shaped bodies are measured using
(A) 1/10000 m2 (B) 10–5 m2 (A) Graph paper (B) Scale
2
(C) 1/100000 m (D) 10–4 m2 (C) Using formula (D) Tape
44. 1 km2 = ____________ hectares. 49. The area of the land is 100m2, here m2 stands for
(A) 10000 (B) 1000 (A) Numerical value of area
(C) 100 (D) 10 (B) Unit of area
45. Statement I : 1 km2 = 1,000,000 m2 (C) Both (A) and (B) (D) None of these
Statement II : 1 hectare = 100 Ares 50. 1km2 = _____________
(A) Statement - I is true, Statement - II is false. (A) 1 hectare (B) 10 hectares
(B) Statement - I is false, Statement - II is true. (C) 100 hectares (D) 1000 hectares
(C) Both Statements I & II are true. 51. 1 hectare = ____________
(D) Both Statements I & II are false. (A) 1000m2 (B) 10000m2
46. The area of a square surface, whose each side is (C) 100000m2 (D) 100m2
equal to one metre is
(A) Square millimetre (B) Square centimetre
(C) Square cube metre (D) Square metre 11. Measurement of Volume
47. A school hall measures 20 m in length and 12 m in The space occupied by a substance (solid, liquid or
breadth. Find the area of the school hall. gas) is called volume.
(A) 1200 m2 (B) 120 m2
(C) 240 m 2
(D) 2400 m2 The unit of volume in standard international (SI)
48. The length of the school play ground is 400 m and system is cubic metre. In short form cubic metre
breadth is 100 m. The area of the play ground is is written as m3.
_______ hectares. One cubic metre (1m3) is the volume occupied by
(A) 3 hectares (B) 2 hectares a cube whose each side is equal to 1 m.
(C) 4 hectares (D) 5 hectares
Submultiples of Unit of Volume
49. What is the area of rectangular graph paper having
6cm length and 5cm width ? Cubic metre is a fairly inconvenient unit for
(A) 11 cm2 (B) 1 cm2 measuring small volumes such as volume of a match
(C) 30 cm 2
(D) 60 cm2 box or volume of a glass full of water.
2
50. 1 m = ______ x_______hectare. A small unit called cubic centimeter (cm3) is used
1 hectare = _____y_____ km2 . for measuring small volumes.
1 mm2 = _____ z_____ km2.
(A) x = 10–6, y = 10–4, 10–2 The C.G.S unit of volume is cm3 or cc. Which is
(B) x = 10–4, y = 10–2, z = 10–6 used for measuring small volumes.
(C) x = 10–2, y = 10–4, z = 10–6 One cubic centimeter (1cm3) is the volume occupied
(D) x = 10–4, y = 10–6, z = 10–2 by a cube whose each side is equal to 1 cm.
Conceptive Worksheet Relation between 1 m3 and 1cm3

43. The amount of surface occupied by an object or a 1 m3 = 1 m × 1 m × 1 m
plane is 1 m3 = 100 cm × 100 cm × 100 m
(A) Length (B) Temperature
(C) Area (D) Volume 1
44. Unit of area is a
1 m3 = 1000,000 cm3 or 1cm 3  m3
1000,000
(A) Fundamental unit (B) Derived unit
(C) Both (1) and (2) (D) None 1cm3 = 10–6 m3
45. In C.G.S system the unit of area is Volume of a Rectangular Slab
(A) s2 (B) kg2 (C) cm2 (D) m2
46. Area of 1sqcm is Volume of rectangular slab is the product of its
(A) 100mm2 (B) 1000mm2 length, breadth and height.
2
(C) 10mm (D) 10,000mm2
www.betoppers.com
Measurement 11
Volume = Length × Breadth × Height 54. A rectangular box with lid is made of a metal sheet
of thickness 0.5 cm. Its outer dimensions are 40
V=l×b×h cm, 36 cm, 21 cm. If the weight of the metal is 2.5
Measurement of Volume of Liquids grams per cubic centimetre, then
Match the following
The volume of liquids is generally measured in litres
Column-I Column-II
(symbol l), the sub-multiple of one litre is millilitre
(A) Inner dimensions p) 30240 cubic
(symbol ml)
of the box centimetres
1(l) = 1000 ml. (B) Outer volume of q) 2940 cubic
One millilitre is also equal to one cubic centimeter the box is centimetres
(1 cm3 or 1 cc). (C) Inner volume of r) 0.39 m, 0.35 m,
the box is 0.20 m
1(l) = 1000 ml = 1000 cc or 1000 cm3 (D) Volume of the s) 27300 cubic
The volume of a liquid is measured using a container metal sheet centimetres
of known capacity. The space (volume) inside the t) 39 cm, 35 cm,
container is known as its capacity. 20 cm
55. Find the volume of cuboid of dimensions 5cm, 4cm
Different Measuring Jars and 3cm.
Measuring jar: It is used to measure the liquids of (A) 60 cm3 (B) 120 cm3
3
desired quantity. (C) 240 cm (D) 480 cm3
56. A measuring cylinder has 75cm3 of water, when a
Measuring Vessels: They are used to measure
stone is droped water level rises to 125cm3. What
volume of liquids like milk and oil.
is the volume of stone ?
Pipette: It is used in laboratories to take specific (A) 25 cm3 (B) 50 cm3
volume of liquid. (C) 75 cm 3
(D) 100 cm3
Burette: It is also used in laboratories to extract 57. A stone of volume 50cm3 lowered into 80cm3 of
required volume of liquid for the experiment. water in a measuring jar. Then what will be the
new reading in measuring jar ?
(A) 15 cm3 (B) 30 cm3
Formative Worksheet (C) 45 cm 3
(D) 60 cm3
51. Statement I : The smaller unit for measuring 58. The volume of a rectangular slab is 12 cm3. The
volume of liquids is milli litre. length and breadth of the slab are 3 cm and 2 cm
Statement II : In standard international system respectively. Find its height.
volume is measured in cubic metre (A) 10 cm (B) 8 cm
(A) Statement - I is true, Statement - II is false. (C) 4 cm (D) 2 cm
(B) Statement - I is false, Statement - II is true. 59. A boy has purchased a toy, which is in the form of
(C) Both Statements I & II are true. a cuboid. The cuboid has the following
(D) Both Statements I & II are false. dimensions: 0.003 km × 0.03 m × 3 cm. What is
52. If length, breadth and height of cuboid are 20 cm, volume of this cuboid?
18 cm and 15 cm, then it volume in M.K.S system (A) 900 cm3 (B) 1800 cm3
is (C) 2700 cm3 (D) 3600 cm3
(A) 540 cubic metre 60. When a stone is lowered into a measuring cylinder
(B) 540000 cubic metre containing water, the volume becomes 9.3 ml. If
(C) 640 cubic metre the volume of the stone is 5.8 ml, find the initial
(D) 640000 cubic metre volume of water in the measuring cylinder.
53. If length breadth and height of cuboid are 30 m, 28 (A) 3.5 ml (B) 5 ml
m and 12 m then it volume in C.G.S system is (C) 6.5 ml (D) 8.5 ml
(A) 1008.00 cubic cm 3
61. Express 5cm in terms of cubic millimetres.
(B) 10080000 cubic cm (A) 500 mm3 (B) 5000 mm3
(C) 10.08000 cubic cm (C) 50 mm 3
(D) 0.5 mm3
(D) 100.80 cubic cm
www.betoppers.com
Conceptive Worksheet 12. Measurement of Density

Consider two substances, say iron and cotton each
52. Which of the following measuring vessels are used
having the same mass, say 1 kg. They will occupy
to measure volume of liquids.
different volumes. Iron will occupy less volume as
(A) Measuring jar (B) Burette
compared to cotton having same mass. This is
(C) Pipette (D) Measuring flask
because substances differ from one another in their
53. 1 litre = _________________
densities. Density of iron is more than that of cotton.
(A) 1000 millilitre (B) 100 cc
Factors affecting Density of a Substance
(C) Both (A) and (B) (D) None
i) The Space between the Particles : Larger
54. The volume occupied by a cube whose each side is
the space between the particles, lesser is the
equal to 1 cm is called
density of the substance.
(A) Cubic centimetre (B) Cubic millimetre
ii) Mass of each Particle : Larger the mass of
(C) Cubic metre (D) None of these
each particle, more is the density of the
55. Volume of rectangular glass of a regular body is
substance.
___________
The property of matter that describes the
(A) length + breadth + height
relationship between mass and volume is called
(B) length – breadth + height
density.
(C) (length × breadth) + height
The density of a substance is defined as the mass
(D) length × breadth × height
per unit volume of the substance.
56. The space inside a regular or irregular objects is
Density of a substance (d) =
known as its
(A) Area (B) Volume mass of the subs tan ce(M)
(C) Mass (D) Length volume of the subs tan ce(V)
57. The unit for the volume of solids in MKS system is
(A) cm3 (B) m3 (C) ml3 (D) l3 M
58. One cubic meter is  d
V
(A) 106cc (B) 104cc (C) 103cc (D) 109cc Unit of Density
59. In laboratories to take specific volume of liquid we The S.I. unit of density = kg/m3 = kg m–3
use ? The C.G.S unit of density = g/cm3 = g cm–3
(A) Pipette Relationship between the S.I. and C.G.S
(B) Burette units
(C) Measuring jar
1kg 1kg
(D) Measuring vessel 1kg / m3  3

60. 1 litre = ___________. 1m 1m 1m 1m
(A) 1000cc (B) 1000cm
1000g 1g
(C) 100ml (D) 100cm  
61. The space occupied by a substance is called 100cm 100cm 100cm 1000 cm3
_________.
1
(A) Area (B) Length  1 kg/m3  g / cm3 or
(C) Volume (D) None of these 1000
62. The CGS unit of volume is _________ 1g/cm3 = 1000 kg/m3
(A) Cubic centimetre(B) Cubic millimetre Density of a substance in S.I. system
(C) Cubic metre (D) Cubic litre = 1000 × density in C.G.S system.
63. One cubic metre is equal to ––––– Example: The density of iron is 7.86 g/cm3 in C.G.S
(A) 106 cc (B) 104 cc system. The density of iron in S.I. system will be
(C) 103 cc (D) 109 cc 1000 × 7.86 i.e., 7860 kg/m3.
64. The volume occupied by a cube whose each side is Density of a substance in C.G.S. system
equal to 1cm is called density of the subs tan ce in S.I. system
(A) Cubic centimetre 
1000
(B) Cubic millimetre For example, the density of brass in SI system is
(C) Cubic metre 8400 kg/m3. So, density of brass in CGS system =
(D) None of these
www.betoppers.com
Measurement 13
64. 5 litre of alcohol has a mass of 4 kg, then the density

8400 of alcohol in g/cm3
 8.4 g/cm3.
1000 (A) 0.6 g/cm3 (B) 0.10 g/cm3
Note: Density depends upon the nature of the (C) 0.8 g/cm3 (D) 0.18 g/cm3
material of the substance. If the material is same 65. Find the mass of 555 cm3 of iron in kg when density
then density is same. of iron is 7.6 g/cm3
Determination of Density of a Solid by using (A) 2.218 kg (B) 4.218 kg
a Measuring Cylinder (C) 6.218 kg (D) 8.218 kg
In order to determine the density of a solid, we 66. If density of wood is 500 kg/m3, then what will be
must know the mass and volume of the solid. the value in g/cm3 ?
The mass of the solid is determined by a physical (A) 0.5 g/cm3 (B) 5 g/cm3
3
balance very accurately. Let it be M grams. (C) 0.6 g/cm (D) 4 g/cm3
In order to find the volume, take a measuring cylinder 67. Density in S.I system = _________× density
and pour in it some water. Record the volume of in C.G.S system.
water from the graduations marked on measuring 68. If one litre (1000 cm3) of water weighs 1000 g.
cylinder. Let it be 50 cm3. Hence the density of water is
Now tie the given solid to a fine thread and lower it (A) 0.1 g/cm3 (B) 2 g/cm3
gently in the measuring cylinder, such that it is (C) 0.2 g/cm3 (D) 1 g/cm3
completely immersed in water.
Record the new level of water. Let it be 75 cm3. Conceptive Worksheet
Therefore, 65. The C.G.S unit of density is
volume of the solid = (75-50) cm3 = 25 cm3 (A) g cm–3 (B) g cm–2
= V cm3 (Suppose). (C) g/cm (D) g/cm2
Knowing the mass and the volume of the solid, the 66. In order to find the density of a solid we have to
density can be calculated by the formula : find its
mass M (A) Mass and area (B) weight and area
Density   g / cm3 . (C) area and volume(D) mass and volume
volume V
67. The density of a body is represented by the
expression
(A) D = V/M (B) D = M × V
(C) D = 1/M×V (D) D = M/V
68. The unit of density in S.I system is
(A) kg/m2 (B) kg/m3
–2
(C) kg m (D) kg m–3
Formative Worksheet 13. Relative Density

62. Statement I : The density of liquids and gases The ratio of the density of a substance to the density
changes with change in temperature. of water at 4°C which is called relative density, or
specific gravity of the substance.
Statement II : The substances having a density
Mathematical expression of Relative Density.
less than 1 g/cm3 will flow in water.
(A) Statement - I is true, Statement - II is false. Density of thesubstance
Relativedensity =
(B) Statement - I is false, Statement - II is true. Densityof pure water at 4°C
(C) Both Statements I & II are true. We notice from the above expression that the
relative density is a ratio of similar quantities. So it
(D) Both Statements I & II are false.
is a mere number and has no units.
63. A piece of lead weight 232 g and has a volume of Relationship between Density and
20 cm3, then the density of lead Relative Density
(A) 11.6 g/cm3 (B) 21.6 g/cm3 1) Density of a solid (in S.I. Unit) = R.D. of the solid
(C) 31.6 g/cm3 (D) 41.6 g/cm3 × Density of water in S.I. Unit
= R.D. of the solid × 1000 kg/m3
www.betoppers.com
2) Density of a solid(in C.G.S. unit)
76. If the mass of 2 litres of water is 2 kg, find its
= R.D. of the solid × Density of water in C.G.S
density in S.I. system.
system = R.D. of the solid × 1 g/cm3
(A) 1 kg/m3 (B) 10 kg/m3
Formative Worksheet (C) 100 kg/m3 (D) 1000 kg/m3
69. Choose the correct options. 77. A sphere of radius 7 cm weighs 490 g. Calculate
(A) R.D = density of substance ÷ Density of water its density in S.I. system. (Volume of sphere
at 4°C 4
  r3 )
(B) R.D = mass of substance ÷ mass of an equal 3
volume of water at 4°C (A) 341 kg/m3 (B) 170.5 kg/m3
(C) R.D = Density of substance + Density of water
(C) 70 kg/m3 (D) 35 kg/m3
at 4°C
(D) R.D = Density of substance + Mass of water
at 4°C Conceptive Worksheet
70. Statement I : The CGS unit of relative density is 69. The relative density of a liquid is determined by
gm/cm3 . using ____________.
Statement II : 1 g/cm3 = 1000 kg/m3 (A) Density bottle (B) Density glass
(A) Statement - I is true, Statement - II is false. (C) Density stopper (D) None of theses
(B) Statement - I is false, Statement - II is true. 70. The CGS unit of relative density is
(C) Both Statements I & II are true. (A) g/cm3 (B) kg/m3
(D) Both Statements I & II are false. (C) Both (1) and (2) (D) None of these
71. Match the following 71. The relative density of mercury is (density of
Column-I Column-II mercury is 13600kgm–3)
a) Density of solid = 1) Relative density (A) 13.6 g/cm3 (B) 0.8 g/cm3
3
bottle (C) 2.5 g/cm (D) None of these
b) Relative density of 2) R.D × density of a 72. The C.G.S unit of relative density is
liquid is determined water (A) gm/cm3 (B) gm/cm2
by using (C) gm/cm (D) no unit
c) Density of a liquid = 3) 0.80 73. Relative density is also known as
d) Density of petrol 4) R.D of the solid × (A) Lighter density (B) Numerical density
density of water (C) Specific gravity (D) None of these
(in S.I) 74. If M is the mass of an object of volume V, such
5) R.D of the solid × that ‘D’ is its density, then we can say
1000 kg/m3 (A) V = DM (B) MVD = 1
72. If relative density of a substance is K then the (C) M = VD (D) D = MV
density of that substance is 75. C.G.S unit of density is __________
(A) K kg/m3 (B) 100K kg/m3 (A) kg/m3 (B) m3/kg (C) g/cm3 (D) cm3/g
(C) 1000K kg/m 3
(D) K / 1000 kg/m3 76. The density of alcohol is 800 kg/m3. Then the density
73. What is the mass of air in a room of dimensions 3 in g/cm3 is _______
m × 4 m × 5 m, when the density of air is 1.30 kg (A) 800000 (B) 0.80
m–3 ? (C) 0.008 (D) 80000
(A) 23.7 kg (B) 39 kg (C) 46.15 kg (D) 78 kg 77. 20 cm3 of aluminium has mass 54g. Then 1cm3 of
aluminium mass has ____
74. The length of an iron cylinder is 0.8 m and the area
(A) 74 g (B) 2.7 g
of cross-section is 0.45 m2. Find the mass of the
(C) 7.2 g (D) 5.4 g
cylinder if its density is 7800 kg/m3.
78. A piece of lead weighs 232 g and has a volume of
(A) 1404 kg (B) 2808 kg
20cm3. Then the density of lead is ________
(C) 5616 kg (D) 702 kg (A) 0.0862 g/cm3 (B) 0.0862 cm3/g
3
75. 30 cm of iron weighs 234 g. Find its density in kg (C) 11.6 cm3/g (D) 11.6 g/cm3
m–3 .
(A) 3600 kgm–3 (B) 78 kg m–3
(C) 7800 kgm–3 (D) 780 kgm–3
www.betoppers.com
Measurement 15
Summative Worksheet HOTS Worksheet

1. A piece of lead weight 232 g and has a volume of 1. Column-I Column-II
20cm3. Find the density of lead (A) 1 m p) 102 kg
(A) 5.8 g/cc (B) 23.2 g/cc (B) 1 pm q) 10–6 m
(C) 11.6 g/cc (D) 17.4 g/cc (C) 1 nm r) 10–4 m
(D) 1 qt s) 10–12 m
2. Find the mass of 555 cm3 of iron in kg when density
t) 10–9 m
of iron is 7.6 g/cm3
2. In S.I system
(A) 42.18 kg (B) 4.218 kg (A) All derived units are obtained by multiplying
(C) 421.8 kg (D) 4218 kg (or) dividing the fundamental units
3. The length of a school compound is 500m and (B) All derived units are obtained by adding the
breadth is 120m. Find the area of compound in fundamental units
hectares (C) All derived units are obtained by subtracting
(A) 3 hectare (B) 6 hectare the fundamental units
(D) Depends on the physical quantity
(C) 12 hectare (D) 24 hectare 3. Statement I : Derived unit is independent unit.
4. Find the weight of a body of mass 1 tonne Statement II : It is derived from fundamental units.
(A) 1 kg.wt (B) 10 kg.wt (A) Statement - I is true, Statement - II is false.
(C) 100 kg.wt (D) 1000 kg.wt (B) Statement - I is false, Statement - II is true.
(C) Both Statements I & II are true.
5. The relative density of mercury is 13.6 what is its
(D) Both Statements I & II are false.
density is C.G.S ans SI units
4. Derived units are the units of
(A) 13.6 g/cc (B) 1.36 g/cc (A) Derived physical quantities
(C) 1360 g/cc (D) 13600 g/cc (B) Fundamental physical quantities
6. The density of copper is 8900 kgm-3 what would (C) Both (A) and (B)
be the value of its relative density (D) None of these
(A) 8900 (B) 890 5. Which of the following are fundamental quantities?
(C) 89 (D) 8.9
(A) Mass (B) Length
7. The time taken to complete 10 oscillations by a (C) Time (D) All
seconds pendulum is 2
6. 1 cm = ______________
(A) 5 sec (B) 10 sec (A) 104 m2 (B) 103m2
2 2
(C) 15 sec (D) 20 sec (C) 10 m (D) 102 mm2
8. The density of a cuboid of mass 100g with 7. 10 kg m–3 = _____________ g cm–3
dimenssions 2 cm × 4cm × 5cm is (A) 1000 (B) 1 (C) 10–2 (D) 100
8. How many centimetre make 1 nano metre?
(A) 7.5 g/cc (B) 5.0 g/cc
(A) 10–7 cm (B) 10–5 cm
(C) 2.5 g/cc (D) 1.25 g/cc (C) 10–15 cm (D) 10–10 cm
9. The total mass of two object of mass 2130 kg and 9. 1 milligram = ________________.
16 tones is (A) 10–6 kg (B) 10–3 g
(A) 18130 kg (B) 18.13 tone (C) 106 kg (D) 103 g
2
10. 15 mm is equal to
(C) Both (A) and (B) (D) 16213 kg
(A) 15 × 10–2cm2 (B) 15 × 10–6m2
10. Density of a body is two fifth of the density of water. (C) 15 × 10–12km2 (D) all the above
Find the R.D of that body 11. The velocity of a body is 102 mm/nano second, it is
(A) 0.4 (B) 2.5 also equivalent to
(C) 0.2 (D) 0.6 (A) 3.6 × 103 km h–1 (B) 3.6 × 105 km h–1
(C) 3.6 × 107 km h–1 (D) 3.6 km h–1
www.betoppers.com
12. If 1 g cms–1 = x Newton - second, then the number

23. From the following sets choose the incorrect
x is equal to
representations.
(A) 1 × 10–1 (B) 3.1 × 10–3
–5 i) K.G. for kilogram ii) 0C for degree Celsius
(C) 1 × 10 (D) 6 × 10–4
iii) mts for metre iv) s for second
13. 1 kg m/s = ______gm-mm/s2
2
(A) Odd options (B) First two options
(A) 105 (B) 106 (C) 104 (D) 103
(C) Even options (D) Last two options
14. Unit of momentum is written as
24. Find the mass of 555 cm3 of iron in kg when density
(A) n.s (B) N + s
of iron is 7.6 g/cm3
(C) N – s (D) none of these
2 –1 (A) 4218 kg (B) 4.218 kg
15. If g - cm -sec = x Js, then the number x is equal
(C) 42.18 kg (D) 421.8 kg
to
25. If the length of the wooden cube is 4m and the
(A) 1 × 1047 (B) 1 × 10–7
(C) 1 × 10–5 (D) 1 × 105 1
mass is kg, then the relative density of the wooden
16. 1 decade = _________ millennium 8
1 1 cube is ______________
(A) (B)
100 10 1
(A) 19.53 × 10–7 (B)
(C) 100 (D) 1000 512
17. 1 m3 = ______________ cm3 .
(A) 106 (B) 108 1 1
(C) (D)
51200 32
(C) 1010 (D) 1012
26. A piece of iron has dimensions 3 cm × 1.5cm × 6
18. One litre container can contain ___________
cm. If its mass is 205.2g, its relative density is
millilitres of liquid.
______________
(A) 500 (B) 1000
(A) 27 (B) 7.6 (C) 6.5 (D) 8
(C) 1250 (D) 1500 27. An iron cylinder of radius 1.4 cm and length 8 cm
19. The volume of a rectangular glass slab of length = is found to weigh 369.6 g. The relative density of
3 cm, breadth = 2 cm and height = 2 cm is iron cylinder is _____________
___________ cm3
Take volume of cylinder = r 2  .
(A) 10 (B) 12
(A) 7.2 (B) 7.5 (C) 8 (D) 8.2
(C) 14 (D) 14 28. The length of a cloth measured is 200 cm. Match
20. A book of length 25 cm, breadth 18 cm and height the following from
2 cm. Then the volume of the book is List - A List - B
___________. i) Length a) Numerical value
(A) 900 cm3 (B) 45 cm3 ii) 200 b) Unit
(C) 900 m3 (D) 45m3 iii) cm c) physical quantity
21. Mass of a wooden piece of length 20 cm breadth (A) i-a, ii-b, iii-c (B) i-c, ii-a, iii-b
10 cm and thickness 0.5 cm is 50g. What is the (C) i-c, ii-b, iii-a (D) i-b, ii-a, iii-c
density of wood ? 29. 1 kg = ______________ tonne.
(A) 0.1 g/cm3 (B) 5.0 g/cm3 (A) 10–6 (B) 10–3 (C) 103 (D) 106
3
(C) 0.5 g/cm (D) 5.1 g/cm3 30. 1 micrometre (mm) = ____________ cm
22. A silk cloth of density ‘D’ units, is cut into 2009 equal (A) 104 (B) 106 (C) 10–6 (D) 10–4
parts. The density of each part is 31. Match the following :
2009 D List - A List - B
(A) units (B) D units i) Gram a) 10–3 kg
2
ii) Microgram b) 10–3 g
2009 D D iii) Milligram c) 10–6 g
(C) units (D) units
100 2009 (A) i-a, ii-b, iii-c (B) i-a, ii-c, iii-b
(C) i-b, ii-c, iii-a (D) i-b, ii-a, iii-c
www.betoppers.com
Measurement 17
32. A syringe has a capacity of 5 ml. Its capacity in cm3

and m3 is respectively are IIT JEE Worksheet
(A) 5 × 10–6 m3, 5 cm3 I. Single Correct Answer Type
(B) 5 cm3 , 5 × 10–6 m3 1. Mass per unit volume of a substance is called
(C) 5 × 10–3 m3, 5 cm3 ______
(D) 5 cm3 , 5 × 10–3 m3 (A) Weight (B) Force
33. A water tank has a capacity of 10, 000 litre. Its (C) Density (D) Time
value in m3 is 2. Specific gravity bottle is used for determination
(A) 100 m3 (B) 1000 m3 (A) Volume (B) Mass
3
(C) 1 m (D) 10 m3 (C) Density (D) Temperature
34. The water level of a measuring cylinder is 26 ml. A 3. The density is CGS system = _____ SI system.
piece of concrete having a volume of 6 cm3 is
1
immersed in it. The new level of water is (A) (B) 1000
(A) 20 ml (B) 26 ml (C) 32 ml (D) 6 ml 1000
35. The mass of an electron is 9.11 × 10–31kg. How 1
many electrons would make 1kg? (C) 100 (D)
100
(A) 1.1 × 1030 (B) 1.1 × 1031
–30 4. A piece of lead weight 232 gm and has a volume of
(C) 1.1 × 10 (D) 1.1 × 10–31
20 cm3. Find the density of lead.
36. A vessel of 200gm weight is filled with some
(A) 11.6 /cm3 (B) 11.2 gm/cm3
kerosene. If weight of the vessel with the kerosene 3
(C) 12gm/cm (D) 11.6 kg/ cm3
is 270g, then how much kerosene is filled in the
5. An iron neddle sinkds is water as its density is
vessel?
_______ 1gm/cm3
(A) 70ml (B) 80ml (C) 85ml (D) 70ml
(A) Greater than (B) Lesser than
37. If 10 copper pieces, each of mass 20g, are placed
(C) Equal to (D) None
in the vessel with water, the level of water increases
6. The weight is found by ______ balance.
to 300ml in the vessel. Find the initial level of water
(A) Physical balance (B) Spring balance
in the vessel.
(C) Sensitive balance (D) All the above
(A) 100ml (B)1000ml (C) 10ml (D) 0.1ml
7. The density of body is reperesented by the formula:
1kg x gm
38. If 3 =10 then find the value of x. v m
m cm 3 (A) d  (B) d 
m v
(A) –2 (B) 2 (C) –3 (D) 3
39. If m1, m2, m3 and m4 are masses of four bodies 0.3 1
(C) d = Mv (D) d 
kg, 0.3 mg, 0.3 × 10–6 g and 3000 g respectively. mv
The above, in increasing order of masses, are as 8. In order to find the Density of a Solid we have to
follows. find its
(A) m1 > m2 > m3 > m4 (A) Mass and Area (B) Weight and Area
(B) m4 > m2 > m3 > m4 (C) Mass and Volume (D)Weight and
(C) m4 > m1 > m2 > m3 Volume
(D) m3 > m2 > m4 > m1 9. The density of wood is 0.65 g/cm3. The density in
40. Mass = Density × Volume; if mass = p, SI system is
density = q and volume = r, if 10p = 1000q × 100r, (A) 65 kg/m3 (B) 650 kg/m3
if p, q and r in S.I system, then the value of q in (C) 6.5 kg/m 3 (D) 0.65 kg/m3
C.G.S system is 10. Substance which have density more than
(A) 10–7 g/cm3 (B) 10–5 g/cm3 1gcm–3 will
(C) 10–7 g/cm3 (D) 107 g/cm3 (A) Sink (B) Float
(C) Submerge (D) None
www.betoppers.com
II. Multiple Correct Answer Type Paragraph-II
11. The C.G.S unit of volume is Relative density (R.D)
(A) cm3 (B) c.c
(C) cm2 (D) m3 Density of the subs tan ce
= density of water at 4C
12. The density of oxygen
(A) 0.000143 g/cm3 (B) 1.43 kg/m3 20. Calculate the mass of a body whose volume is 2
(C) 0.00143 g/cm3 (D) 1.043 kg/m3 m3 and R.D is 0.52
13. Which of the following is the unit of length? (A) 1040 kg (B) 1004 kg
(A) Metre (B) Centimetre (C) 4001 kg (D) 1400 kg
(C) Foot (D) Second 21. An Iron cylinder of radius 3 cm and length 7 cm is
14. Which of the following is the unit of area? found the weight 396 g. The relative density of iron
(A) cm2 (B) mm2 (C) m2 (D) m/s2 cylinder is
15. Which of the following is the unit of mass? (A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4
(A) pound (B) metere (C) gram (D) ton IV. Integer Type
16. Which of the following is the unit of volume? 22. The ratio between density of substance and density
(A) cubic metre (B) mm2 of water at ________ degree celsius is called
3
(C) cm (D) (foot)3 relative density.
III. Paragraph Type (A) 1 (B) 2
Paragraph-I (C) 3 (D) 4
From the below figure, let l, b, h be the lengths of 23. Radha sees her mother cleaning the room with
AB, AD and AE. Here l and b are the length and broom. She takes two broomsticks of different
the breadths of the floor and h the height of the lengths and decides to measure the length of her
room, then room. She finds that the length of the room is 18
times the length of the shorter stick. The length of
H G the shorter stick is half the length of the other stick.
How many longer sticks will be required to fit along
F the length of the room?
E
(A) 9 (B) 18 (C) 27 (D) 36
h 24. Swati has three dolls. She names them as Reena,
C Teena, and Meena. She then takes a metre scale
D
and measures their heights. She observes that:
b I. Reena is taller than Teena by 5 cm.
A l B II. Meena is shorter than Reena by 4 cm.
If the height of Meena is 0.55 m, then Meena is
The length of any surface = Length × Breadth.
taller than Teena by ______cm.
Using the above information, answer the following
(A) 3 (B) 4 (C) 5 (D) 6
questions.
25. Ramesh measures the length of a thread and finds
17. If the length, breadth and height of a room are 8 m,
it to be 14hand-spans. He uses it to measure the
6 m and 5 m respectively, then area of rectangle
circumference of a rectangular table. He wounds
surface ABFE is
the thread around the circumference of the table.
(A) 58 sq. m (B) 48 sq. m
If the thread is wound around the table two times,
(C) 68 sq. m (D) 78 sq. m
then the circumference of the table is ________
18. If the length, breadth and height of a room are 4 m,
hand spans.
5 m and 10 m respectively, then Area of rectangular
(A) 14 (B) 28 (C) 42 (D) 56
surface BCGF is
26. The length of a blackboard is 240 cm. Rakesh tries
(A) 50 sq.m (B) 80 sq. m
to measure this length using a small wooden stick
(C) 120 sq. m (D) 210 sq. m
of length 40 cm. The number of times that the
19. If the length, breadth and height of a room are x m,
stick must be revolved over the blackboard to
y m and z m respectively, area of rectangular surface
completely cover the length is __________.
CDHG is
(A) yz m2 (B) xy m2 (A) 6 (B) 12 (C) 18 (D) 24
2
(C) xz m (D) none
www.betoppers.com
Measurement 19
V. Matrix Matching
D S R
C
N H G
M
30m
K E F L
A P Q B
40 m
27. From the above figure, the length and the breadth of a rectangular flat are 40 metres and 30 metres respectively.
Two rectangular paths each 5 metes wide run inside the peat, one parallel to the length of the plot and the other
parallel to its breadth, then
Column-I Column-II
(A) The area of the path KLMN p) 25 square metres
(B) The area of the path PQRS q) 200 square metres
(C) The area of the path EFGH r) 150 square metres
(Which is common to these two path)
(D) total area occupied by the paths s) 325 square metres
t) 2 × 102 square metres
Column-I Column-II
(A) 1 square metre p) The submultiples of standard unit of area
(B) 1 square q) The submultiples centimetre of 1 km
(C) One hectare r) The submultiples of 100 m
(D) One square s) Area of a square surface kilometre having
each side is equal to one metre
t) Area of a square surface having each side
is equal to one cm
Column-I Column-II
(A) dimensions of a p) 10 cubic metres cuboid
(B) one litre q) The volume of a cube whose side is one
centimetre
(C) A cubic r) Length, breadth and centimetre height are
equal
(D) A cubic is a s) length, breadth and cuboid height
t) 1000 cubic centimetres
Column-I Column-II
(A) Steel p) Density in CGS system is 8.9 g/cm3
(B) Iron q) Density in CGS system is 7.86 g/cm3
(C) Copper r) Density in CGS system is 19.3 g/cm3
(D) Gold s) Density in CGS system is 7.8 g/cm3
t) Density in S.I system is 19300 kg/m3

www.betoppers.com
www.betoppers.com
Learning Outcomes Motion
Chapter -2
B y th e e n d o f th i s c h a p te r , yo u w i l l un de r stan d
• Rest & Motion • Speed
• Types of motion • Distance and Time Graphs
• Vectors and Scalars
1. Introduction 3. Types of Motion

Mechanics is the branch of physics that focuses
All bodies in motion do not move the same way.
on the motion of objects and the forces that
For example, a car moves straight along the road;
cause the motion to change. There are two
a spinning top spins round and round; the strings of
branches of Mechanics: Kinematics and
a sitar move up and down and the pendulum of a
Dynamics. The word kinematics comes from
clock moves sideways in either direction. The
the Greek word “Kinema” meaning motion. The
motion of bodies is classified as under:
word dynamics comes from the Greek word
“dynamis” meaning power.
I. Translatory Motion
Kinematics deals with the concepts that are The motion in which all the particles of a body
needed to describe motion without any reference move through the same distance in the same
to forces or the cause of the motion. The goal time is called translatory motion.
of study of kinematics is to develop sophisticated Examples :
mental models, which serve us in describing the i) A car or a train moving along a road or
motion of real world objects. track.
Dynamics deals with the relation between the ii) A ball rolling on the ground.
forces and the motion. The motion of objects iii) Firing of a bullet from a gun.
can be described by words such as distance, iv) A stone hurled from a catapult.
displacement, speed, velocity and acceleration. vii) An apple falling from a tree.
Before we witness the concepts of kinematics,
viii) A striker on the carom board going
let’s review some basic concepts.
straight to hit the coin, etc.
There are two kinds of translatory motion:
2. Rest & Motion (a) Rectilinear motion and
I. Rest (b) Curvilinear motion.
A body is said to be at rest if it does not a) Rectilinear Motion
change its position with respect to the When an object moves along a straight line
reference point. The objects which remain like a ball dropped from a height, the motion
stationary at a place and do not change described by the body is called rectilinear
their position are said to be at rest. motion.
Example :A table and chairs lying in a Examples:
room are in the state of rest, because they i) A ball rolling on the ground.
do not change their position with respect ii) A car moving on a straight road.
to the surroundings of the room. iii) A stone falling freely from the roof
II. Motion of a building.
An object is said to be in motion if it iv) A coin moving over a carom board.
changes its position from one place to
b) Curvilinear Motion
another. In other words, the movement of
When a body moves along a curved path, the
an object is known as the motion of the
motion described by the body is called
object.
curvilinear motion.
Example: A vehicle has to be driven.
Rain drops fall due to gravitational pull.
Examples: Note:In circular motion, the position of a body

i) A stone thrown by a boy from a itself keeps changing with time, but in
height. rotational motion the position of a body
ii) A car moving along a curved path. does not change. It is to be noted that circular
iii) A javelin or shot-put thrown by an motion is a special case of rotatory motion.
athlete.
Comparision of Rotational and Circular
iv) A ball thrown upward at an angle.
Motions
v) A car or train moving along a curved
road or track are all examples of Rotational Motion Circular Motion
curvilinear motion. 1. Body stays in 1. Body doesn’t
II. Rotational Motion same place with stay in same
A motion in which a body moves about a fixed moves and place. It
axis without changing its position is called changes its respect to
rotational motion. position w ith time.
Examples: time.
i) The motion of the blades of a fan. 2. The body 2. It moves
ii) The wheel of a sewing machine. rotates about an along a path
iii) The motion of a giant wheel. axis may not whose axis
iv) A spinning top pass through passing
v) A spinning wheel (charkha) the body. through it.
3. No linear 3. Body may
vi) A rotating potter’s wheel
motion is undergo linear
Combination of Translatory and
observed for motion.
Rotational Motion
the body as a
In some cases, the motion of rotation and the motion whole.
of translation occur at the same time. When a drill
cuts through a metal piece, it performs the motion IV. Oscillatory Motion
of translation as well as the motion of rotation at A motion in which the body as a whole moves
the same time. Other examples of this kind of to-and-fro about its mean position is called
motion are the wheels of a moving bicycle or a car, oscillatory motion.
the ball delivered by a spin bowler.
Examples :
Translational Motion
i) The movement of a swing.
ii) The oscillation of pendulum of a clock.
Rotational iii) The needle of a sewing machine moving
Motion up and down.
iv) The piston of a motor car, the pressing
cylinder of a juice machine, the piston
of a spray pump etc.
A moving bicycle describes
both translational and rotational motion V. Vibratory Motion
It is another kind of oscillatory motion in which
III. Circular Motion the body does not move as a whole i.e. the
When a body moves around a circular path, entire object does not move but undergoes
the way an athlete runs around a circular track, change in shape or size.
such motion is called circular motion.
Examples: Examples:
i) Motion of an electric fan. i) When you pluck a string of a guitar or
ii) Motion of a merry-go- round. sitar, it vibrates to and fro about its
iii) Motion of a spinning top. position of rest and produces music.
iv) Motion of the earth around the sun.
www.betoppers.com
Motion 23
ii) When you strike the membrane of a Linear Motion of the ball
drum, it vibrates up and down about its
position of rest and produces sound.
These vibrations are like the oscillations A spinning ball
of a pendulum, except that they are
faster. There is another difference. The
pendulum swings freely, while the string ii) A person is drawing water from a well.
of a musical instrument is fixed at two Here, the pulley on which the rope runs
ends, and the membrane of a drum is has a rotatory motion while the bucket
fixed around the circumference of the coming up has a translatory motion.
drum. iii) A girl riding a bicycle. The wheels of
iii) During breathing, when our chest the bicycle rotate (rotatory motion ) and
expands or contracts, the motion is at the same time the bicycle moves
vibratory in nature; all the points on the forward in a straight or curved path
chest do not move out equally. (translatory motion).
VI. Periodic Motion iv) A drill used by a carpenter for drilling a
A motion which repeats itself at regular hole in wood, has both translatory and
intervals of time is called periodic motion. rotatory motions. This is because while
Examples: it is being rotated (rotatory motion), it is
i) The motion of the earth round the sun also getting pushed forward (translatory
is periodic. motion) into the wood.
ii) The swinging pendulum of a wall clock. v) The earth rotates about its axis (rotatory
iii) The needle of a sewing machine running motion) and at the same time it revolves
at constant speed. around the sun in a circular path
iv) The heart beat of a normal human (translatory motion).
being. vi) The mythological Sudarshan Chakra
v) The motion of a swing.
hurled by Lord Krishna to kill his
vi) The movement of the lungs during
enemies had both translatory as well as
breathing.
rotatory motion.
VII. Random Motion
A body which has a particular motion that
suddenly changes to another kind of motion
Formative Worksheet
is said to have random motion. In other words, 1. Which of the following is not making translatory
the motion without any sequence or direction motion ?
is random motion. (A) A ball delivered by a spin bowler
Examples :
1) A buzzing bee. (B) A brill that bores a piece of wood
2) A football player on the field. (C) Movement of toy car around circular path
3) The motion of a hockey ball during a
(D) Moving rear wheel of a bicycle on its stand
game.
4) The flying motion of a sparrow. 2. The motion described by a football ?
5) A monkey performing antics on a tree. (A) Curvilinear (B) Circular
VIII. Multiple Motion (C) Oscillatory (D) Non-uniform
Sometimes an object manifests two or more
types of motion at the same time. Such motion 3. Which of the following is a periodic motion ?
is called multiple motion. (A) Freely falling body
Examples: (B) A swinging pendulum
i) When a spin bowler delivers a ball, the
ball has a motion of spin (rotatory (C) Bullet fired from the gun
motion)while it moves towards the (D) A flying kite
batsman (translatory motion).
www.betoppers.com
4. Which of the following statement is not correct? 6. A book lying on the table is at___ .
(A) Needle of sewing machine undergoes circular 7. A body is said to be in _____ if it changes its
motion position with respect to surroundings with time.
(B) Motion of body thrown upward at an angle is 8. Can a body execute both rotatory and translatory
curvilinear motion simultaneously ?
(C) Movement of the earth around the sun is 9. Motion of pendulum of a clock is an example of
circular _____ motion.
(D) Ball dropped from a height is rectilinear 10. The heartbeat of a normal resting person is ____ .
5. How are day and nights caused ?
(A) Rotation of the earth 4. Vectors and Scalars
(B) Gravitational force of earth Consider a water melon that weighs 5 kg. Here,
(C) Mass of the earth the mass is represented by the number 5 along
(D) None with the unit kg. For specifying the mass of the
6. Which of the following is not an example of body, direction is not required, but magnitude. Such
translatory motion ? quantities are called scalars.
(A) A freely falling stone The quantities which have only magnitude but
(B) A coin moving over carom board no direction are called scalar quantities.
(C) A car or train moving along a curved road Examples: Mass, length, time, volume, density
or track temperature, etc.
(D) A ceiling fan It is right to express mass of water melon as 5 kg,
7. From the following pick out the example for rotatory but it is wrong to express mass of water melon as
motion ? 5kg towards north.
(A) A spinning wheel Now assume that you invited your friend for your
(B) Merry-go-round birthday party and your friend doesn’t know your
(C) Blades of mixer grinder house. You informed that your house is 200m from
(D) All the above a Corporate office.
8. Which of the are examples of circular motion? Will your friend find it easy to locate your house
(A) Revolution of earth around the sun ?
(B) Motion of the tip of the seconds hand of a It becomes difficult to trace the house as the
wall clock direction is not specified.
(C) Both (D) None But if you say it is 200m left or east of the Corporate
9. Which of the following posses both rotatory and office, he finds it easy to locate your house and
translatory motion ? your celebration becomes colourful.
(A) Motion of the wheels of a horse driven cart That is, for certain quantities, specification of
(B) When a drill bores a hole in a wooden piece direction is a must. Such quantities that are
(C) Ball delivered by a spin bowler represented with both magnitude and direction
(D) All the above are called vectors.
10. The motion of a bob of a simple pendulum is Examples: Displacement, velocity, acceleration,
(A) Rectilinear (B) Curvilinear force, weight etc.
(C) Periodic (D) Rotatory Representation of a Vector :
Any vector can be represented by a straight line
Conceptive Worksheet 
1. Which of type of motion do the strings of the violin OA .
describe?
2. Which type of motion is described by rolling ball ?
O A
3. All oscillatory motions are periodic by nature.
Explain . The length of the straight line indicates magnitude
4. Passengers sitting in a moving train are in _____ and the arrow mark (  ) indicates direction.
with respect to platform, but in _____ with respect
to co-passengers in the train ?
5. A body undergoing circular motion may also have
linear motion. Explain.
www.betoppers.com
Motion 25
5. Distance & Displacement

The actual length covered by a moving body in Formative Worksheet
between two points, irrespective of the direction in 11. Raju travels the path HS to reach his school from
which the body is moving, is called distance. home and SH to reach his home back from school.
In the figure shown, if the particle performs one He leaves to school every day at 9.00 AM and
complete rotation, then the distance covered by it back to home by 3.30 PM. Find the displacement
is 2r . and distance tranversed by him in this time.
r H 2 km S
12. Find the distance and displacement if the body

moves from A to B along the path AQB.
The straight line distance between the initial and Q
final positions of a body is called the magnitude of
the displacement. The direction of the
displacement is given by the direction from the initial
position to the final position.
A 7m B
The shortest distance covered by a moving body
in between two points, in a particular direction, 13. Find the distance and displacement if the body
is called the displacement. moves from A to B along the path APQB.
Consider the following motion depicted in the figure.
A man walks 4 metres east, 2 metres south, 4 B Q
metres west, finally 2 metres north.
4m
4m
2m
2m
A P
4m
4m
N 14. Find the distance and displacement if the body
moves from A to B along the path APQRSTUB.
W E
S R 2m S
A B
Though the man walked a total distance of 12 2m
metres, his displacement is zero metres. During 4m 4m 4m 4m
the course of this motion, he has covered 12 metres
of ground (distance = 12m). P 6m Q T 4m U
Yet when he has finished walking, he is not “ out of 15. Find the distance and displacement if the body
place” i.e., there is no displacement for his motion moves from A to B along the path APQRB.
(displacement = 0 m). Displacement, being a
vector quantity, must give attention and regard P R
to direction. The 4 metres east is cancelled by the
4 metres west; and the 2 metres south is cancelled 5m 5m
5m 5m
by the 2 metres north.
Both distance and displacement are measured in A
Q B
5m 5m
same units. In CGS and SI systems, the units are
metre and centimetre respectively. 16. A boy starts from his house and reach 5 km to
reach the market. After purchasing vegetables, he
returns back to home travelling the same path. Find
the distance and displacement of the boy.
www.betoppers.com
17. A body moving on a circular path covers half of 14. 1 MKS unit of distance = ____ CGS unit of
the path in one hour. What is the ratio of the distance distance.
covered by the body to its displacement. (A) 1 (B) 16
18. A body moves from P to S travelling along the path (C) 100 (D) 1000
PQRS. 15. The ratio distance to displacement is
10m (A) Zero (B) Always = 1
S R (C) Greater than (or) equal to 1
(D) Greater than 1
5m 16. If a body completes 1 round of a circular path of
radius 7 cm, its displacement is
P Q (A) Zero (B) 14 cm
10m
(C) 22 cm (D) 44 cm
Distance + displacement = ? 17. If a body completes 1 round of a circular path of
19. An ant starts from ‘A’ and reaches ‘F’. In doing radius 7 cm, its distance is
so, it travels along path that is ‘S’ shaped. If each (A) Zero (B) 14 cm
side of the transversed path is same, then.Find the (C) 22 cm (D) 44 cm
ratio of distance covered by the ant to its 18. A body starts from A and reaches back A in
displacement. 1 hour travelling along the path ABCDEFA. Find
B A the distance covered and displacement of the body
respectively.
A
C D 5m 5m
F B
F E
5m 5m
20. A rat starts from A and reaches B, running along
the path ABCDEB. E C
AB = BC = CD = DE = EB = 5m. 5m 5m
C D D
(A) 60m, 30m (B) 60 m, 15m
(C) 30 m, zero (D) 30m, 30m
B E
5. Speed
A
The FASTNESS OR SLOWNESS of a body can
If distance covered by rat is x times its be understood from the SPEED of the object.
displacement. Then find the value of x. The speed of an object is defined as the distance
travelled by it in unit time.
Conceptive Worksheet Therefore, an object that moves faster covers more
distance in a second (unit time) as compared to an
11. The total path covered by a body is called.
object that moves slower.
(A) Distance (B) Displacement
We can calculate the speed of an object if we know
(C) Speed (D) Velocity
the distance it travels in a given time.
12. The shortest distance travelled by a body is called
its Speed = Distance travelled
(A) Distance (B) Displacement Time taken to travel the distance
(C) Speed (D) Velocity Units of Speed
13. The MKS unit of distance is The SI unit of speed is metre per second (m/s) and
(A) Foot (B) Metre CGS unit is centimetre per second.
(C) Second (D) Centimetre Another commonly used unit is kilometre per
hour (km/h). When we talk of speed of
aeroplanes and cars, it would be more appropriate
to use km/h than m/s.
www.betoppers.com
Motion 27
Speed in m/s can be easily converted to km/h by The given information can be represented in both
dividing the answer in m/s by 5/18 or multiplying ways as shown below.
by 18/5.
Instrument used to measure Speed
The instrument/meter measuring the speed of the
vehicle is called a speedometer. The distance
travelled by the vehicle is given by an instrument
called odometer. Both of them are usually fitted
together. These instruments will give the reading
of speed and the distance travelled at the same
time.
Uniform Speed
When a body covers equal distances in equal
intervals of time (however small the time
intervals may be), the car is said to be moving
with a uniform speed.
Examples:
A rotating fan, a rocket moving in space, etc., have
uniform speeds. Similarly, an aeroplane flying at
200 km/h or a train running at 90 km/h are moving
with uniform speeds.
Non-Uniform Speed
When a body covers unequal distances in equal
intervals of time, the body is said to be moving
with a nonuniform speed.
Examples: This kind of a chart is called a Line chart or Line
A train starting from a station, a dog chasing a cat, Graph.
have variable speeds. It is created by plotting a series of data points and
Average Speed connecting them to form a line.
In practice, very few objects travel at a constant In this we have taken time on the x-axis and the
speed for long. For instance, Your school bus may distance on the y-axis.
speed up and slow down many times on the way to Some important points to note
school. It is difficult to mention the speed of the • When we try to locate an object, we usually
bus as its speed varies at each moment. In such relate it to some sort of reference point.
cases, to represent the speed of the entire journey, This point is usually the origin, the zero point
we use the concept of Average Speed. of an axis (x or y).
Average speed is defined as the total distance • We provide a numeric value for an object’s
travelled divided by the total time taken to travel location by placing it either in the positive
that distance. direction (+) or the negative direction (–)
in relation to that reference point.
Average Speed = Total Distance travelled
Total Time taken to travel the distance
6. Distance and Time Graphs

Generally, a vehicle travelling on a road does not
travel at a constant speed throughout its journey. If
we note the distance travelled by the object at equal
intervals of time (like every second or every
minute), we will get a clearer picture of its speed
at different points of time.
The data of the distance travelled and the time taken
can be presented either in tabular form or graphical
form.
www.betoppers.com
We can get the following points by examining the 24. The distance versus time graph of a car is shown
distance – time graph: in the given figure.
1. The steepness of the slope of the graph gives the
speed. If the slope is greater (i.e., if the slope is
steeper as in line OA of the figure, the speed is
greater than the speed shown by line AB,since its
slope is flatter).
2. The speed is zero if the graph is flat (i.e., parallel
to the ‘time’ axis) as in BC.
3. For a body moving with constant speed, the graph
will be a straight line passing through the origin.
A motion that can be represented by a straight line
as shown in figure is called uniform motion. It can be concluded from the given graph that the
In other words, a body is said to be in uniform (A) Car is moving at a uniform speed
motion if it covers equal distances in equal intervals (B) Speed of the car is increasing uniformly
of time. (C) Car travels a distance of 25 m in each second
(D) Distance traveled by the car is inversely
proportion to time
25. The distance between Paula's house and her school
is 12 km. The distance between her school and the
public library is 6 km, whereas the distance between
the public library and her house is 15 km.
Paula reaches her school from home in half an
hour and then takes another 15 minutes to reach
the public library. She further takes 15 minutes to
come back home from the public library.
What was Paula's average speed during the entire
trip?
(A) 11 km/h (B) 22 km/h
(C) 33 km/h (D) 44 km/h
26. If the moon revolves around Earth in a circle of
radius 385,000 km in 29 days, then its average speed
is approximately equal to ______.
(A) 11.063 km / h (B) 110.63 km / h
(C) 1,106.3 km / h (D) 11,063 km / h
27. An ant is moving around a book, as shown in the
Formative Worksheet given figure. It travels around the book once in
every five minutes.
21. The odometer of a car reads 36580 km when the
clock shows 9:00 AM. fiat is the distance moved
by the car if at 10:00 AM the odometer reading
has Aanged to 36620 km? Calculate the speed of
the car in km/h during this time.
22. Rajiv takes 10 minutes to reach the post office from
his house on a I rickshaw. If the speed of rickshaw
is 3 m/sec. Calculate the distance between his
house and post office.
23. Julia is traveling in a car to school, which is situated What is the ant's average speed?
at a distance of 40 km from her home. (A) 0.1 cm/s (B) 0.2 cm/s
If the car takes 30 minutes to reach to the school, (C) 0.3 cm/s (D) 0.4 cm/s
then the speed of the car in km/hour is
(A) 40 (B) 80 (C) 100 (D) 120
www.betoppers.com
Motion 29
28. Which position versus time graph represents a

stationary body?
Distance
(D)
Position
(A) Time
30. The given graph shows the position versus time
Time graph of a car.
Position
50
Distance (in km)

(B) 40
C
30
Time
20 A
B
10
Position
O
D
(C) 0 30 60 90 120 150 180 210
Time (in sec)

Time
What was the speed of the car during the entire
trip?
(A) 25 km/h (B) 50 km/h
Position
(D) (C) 100 km/h (D) 125 km/h

31. The distance versus time graph of a ball moving
Time with a constant speed is shown in the given graph.
29. A boy is cycling at a constant speed. His distance
versus time graph will look like
Distance (in metres)
40
30
Distance
(A) 20
10
Time
0 5 10 15 20 25
Time (in seconds)
Distance
What is the speed of the ball?

(B) (A) 1.2 m/s (B) 1.6 m/s
(C) 12.0 m/s (D) 16.0 m/s
Time
Distance
(C)
Time
www.betoppers.com
32. The given figure shows the distance versus time 34. Which of the following position versus time graphs
graph of a car. represents a a body at rest?
(A)
700
600
Distance (in km)
Position
500
400
300
200
100
Time
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 (B)
Time (in sec)
The speed of the car
Position
(A) Decreases linearly with time
(B) Increases linearly with time
(C) Is constant
(D) Is zero
33. Ethan and Jacob participate in a bicycle race. One
minute from the start of the race, Ethan and Jacob
Time
are at the same distance from the starting point. (C)
After another minute, Jacob gets ahead of Ethan.
Which table correctly describes the relationship

Position
between the speeds of Ethan and Jacob during first

two minutes of the race?
(A) During the Speed of Ethan

first minute = Speed of Jacob
During the Speed of Ethan Time
second minute < Speed of Jacob (D)
During the Speed of Ethan >

Position
(B) Speed of Jacob

first minute
During the Speed of Ethan <
second minute Speed of Jacob
During the Speed of Ethan =

(C) Speed of Jacob Time
first minute 35. An ant is moving over a ruler, as shown in the given
During the Speed of Ethan > figure. The digital clocks show the times when the
second minute Speed of Jacob ant is at two different points on the ruler.
(D) During the Speed of Ethan <

first minute Speed of Jacob
During the Speed of Ethan >
second minute Speed of Jacob
The speed of the ant is
(A) 1 cm/s (B) 3 cm/s
(C) 6 cm/s (D) 9 cm/s
www.betoppers.com
Motion 31
27. Speedometer of a car measures ?

Conceptive Worksheet (A) Average speed
19. Which of the following relations is correct? (B) Uniform speed
(A) Speed = Distance × Time (C) Instantaneous speed
(D) Distance travelled
Distance
(B) Speed = 28. A body cover 20 m in 1st second , 25 m in 2nd
Time second and 45 m in 3rd second . What is t h e
Time average speed of the body ?
(C) Speed = 29. A car starts at point A with a speed of 40 kmph
Distance
and reaches point B. Then the car returns
1 to the starting point A with a speed of 60 kmph.
(D) Speed =
Distance× Time What is average speed of the car?
20. The ratio of CGS unit to SI unit of speed is ______. 30. In the clock, the average speed is minimum for the
(A) 1:10 (B) 100:1 tip of ?
(C) 1000:1 (D) 1:1000 (A) Seconds hand (B) Minutes hand
21. Speed is a _____. (C) Hours hand (D) All the above
(A) Vector quantity 31. A crokroach covers a distance of 30 m in 1.5
(B) Scalar quantity minutes. What is the speed of cockroach ?
(C) Fundamental quantity 32. A train moves at a speed of 120km/h. How long
(D) None will it take to cover a distance of 15km?
22. If a body covers unequal distances in equal intervals 33. 1kmph = ______ m/s ?
of time, then the body is said to move 34. A horse runs a distance of 1200m in 3 min and 20s.
under ____. What is the speed of horse ?
(A) Uniform speed 35. The following graph shows the distance travelled
(B) Non- uniform speed by Rajni from home to school and the time taken.
(C) Uniform Velocity Study it and answer the following questions:
(D) Non- uniform velocity (i) What distance did Rajni travel in first two
23. A particle moves with a uniform speed minutes?
(A) The particle must be at rest (ii) What distance did Rajni travel in the next two
(B) The particle moves along a curved path minutes?
(C) The particle moves along a circle (iii) What distance did Rajni cover between 8
(D) The particle moves along a straight line minutes and 10 minutes from the start?
24. If a particle covers equal distance in equal time (iv) Are these distances equal?
intervals, it is said to be in. (v) What was the distance travelled between 12
(A) Uniform Speed (B) Non uniform speed minutes and 14 minutes’?
(C) Moving faster (D) Moving slower 900
25. A bus travels a certain distance with a speed 30 800
ms-1 and returns with a speed 20ms-1 700

then find average speed during total journey ?
600
(A) 25 m/sec (B) 20 m/sec
500
(C) 24 m/sec (D) 15 m/sec
26. When body starts at ‘A’ and comes to ‘A’ again as 400
shown by fig ,then the dispalcement is (r is radius) 300
200
? 100
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
r 36. Show the shape of the distance-time graph for the

(A) 2  r (B) 2r (C) 0 (D)
2 motion in the following cases:
(i) A car moving with a constant speed.
(ii) A car parked on a side road.
www.betoppers.com
(B)
Summative Worksheet
5 
Column-1 Column-2
Distance (in m)

4 
a) 10 m/s p) 72 Kmph
3 
b) 20 m/s q) 1000 cm/s 2 
c) 30 m/s r) 144 kmph 1 
d) 40 m/s r) 0.03 km/s

0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0
2. Two cars, A and B , are moving on the road with Time in (seconds) 
speeds 10 m/s and 36 kmph respectively. If their
starting point and ending point is same and if they
are moving in the same direction , then find the (C)
ratio of the times taken by them to reach the end
point once they start at same time from their starting
5 
Distance (in mm)

point.
4 
(A) 1 : 3.6 (B) 3.6 : 1
3 
(C) 1 : 1 (D) 2 :1 2 
3. The peregrine falcon (Falco peregrinus) is the 1 
fastest living creature, reaching speeds as much
as 310 kmph when swooping from great heights 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0
during territorial displays or while catching pry birds Time in (seconds) 
in midair. Express this speed in metre per second.
(D) None
4. Sudha, Vijay, Shruthi and Rohit participated in a 7. The graph give below represents the motion of four
100 m race. They took 20s, 22s, 25s and 28s animals A, B, C and D along a straight line. Identify
respectively to reach the finishing line. Who do you the one that is moving fastest among the four.
think run the fastest and the slowest in the race.
A
Also express their speed in m/s.
5. Cheetah is the fastest land animal and can achieve
B
a peak velocity of 100 km/h up to distances less
than 500 m. If it spots its prey at a distance of 100 C
5 
m, what is the minimum time it will take to get its
Distance (in m)
4 
prey, if the average velocity attained by it is 90 km/
h? 3  D
2
6. One of the following graphs represents the motion 
of snail. Identify it. 1 
(A)
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0
Time in (seconds) 
100  (A) A (B) B (C) C (D) D

Distance (in km)
80  8. A delivery by Brett Lee from Australia was bowled

60  at 161.8 kmph at Brisbane on November 23, 2000.
40 It was considered as the fastest ball ever bowled

20 
by a bowler in One day International Match by
then. Now, imagine the following hypothetical
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 situations. A straight road from Brisbane (Australia)
Time in (hours)  and Kingston Jamaica (West Indies) A car is moves
on this road with a uniform speed equal to Brett
www.betoppers.com
Motion 33
Lee’s ball mentioned above. If the Also and the 16. A car moves with a speed of 40 km/h for 15 minutes
distance between them is 14488.92 km, predict and then with a speed of 60 km/h for the next 15
how many days approximately would it take by the minutes. The total distance covered by the car is:
car to reach Kingston Jamaica. (A) 100 km (B) 25 km (C) 15 km (D) 10 km
9. An object covers a distance of 'S' metres in 't'
seconds as follows: HOTS Worksheet
S (meters) 0 8 20 20 16 10 0
1. Kurt is jogging along the outer edge of a park. The
t (sec) 0 2 5 10 12 15 18 dimensions of the park are shown in the given
figure. He takes one minute to complete one
Plot a graph, taking 't' on X-axis and 'S' on Y axis.
revolution around the park.
10. A car travels a certain distance with a speed of 50
km/h and returns with a speed of 40 km/h. Calculate 100 m
the average speed for the whole journey.
11. The given figure shows the position of a body at
different times. Calculate 50 m 50 m
(i) the speed of the body as it moves for 0 to 5 s
(ii) 5 to 7s
100 m
(iii) 7 to 9 s
Kurt's speed is
(A) 1 m/s (B) 5 m/s
(C) 50 m/s (D) 100 m/s
2. A toy car is moving away from a wall, as shown in
the given figure. As time increases, the distance of
the car from the wall also increases, as depicted in
the graph.
12. Plot a distance-time graph for the given data and

calculate
(a) the corresponding physical quantity and,
(b) the distance covered by the car at the end of
2.5 s and 6.5 s.
S (meters) 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
t (sec) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
13. The distance between two stations is 240 km. A

train takes 4 hours to cover this distance. Calculate
the speed of the train.
14. The odometer of a car reads 57321.0 km when the
clock shows the time 08:30 AM. What is the The hypothesis that can be derived from the given
distance moved by the car, if at 08:50 AM, the graph is
odometer reading has changed to 57336.0 km? (A) Distance of the car from the wall = Time
Calculate the speed of the car in km/min during
(B) Distance of the car from the wall = 2× Time
this time. Express the speed in km/h also.
15. Salma takes 15 minutes from her house to reach Time
her school on a bicycle. If the bicycle has a speed (C) Distance of the car from the wall =
2
of 2 m/s, calculate the distance between her house
and the school. Time
(D) Distance of the car from the wall =
3
www.betoppers.com
3. Julian is recording the time take by an ant to travel 8. Two cars M and N are standing 1 km away from
on the edges of a wooden structure, shown in the each other. Car M starts moving towards car N.
given figure. He is amazed to observe that the ant After 30 s, car N also starts its journey towards
takes exactly one second to travel the length of car M with the same speed. Both cars meet at a
each edge. point after 5 min.
With what speed were both cars moving towards
4cm each other?
(A) 1.14 m/s (B) 1.59 m/s
(C) 5.91 m/s (D) 6.89 m/s
2cm 3cm 9. Raj can run twice as fast as Lokesh. Raj runs for
10 min to cover the circumference of a playground.
How much time will Lokesh take to cover the
6cm circumference of the playground?
The speed of the ant is the maximum on the edge (A) 5 min (B) 10 min
of length (C) 20 min (D) 40 min
(A) 6 cm (B) 4 cm (C) 3 cm (D) 2 cm 10. A car moves from point M to point N with uniform
speed in 3 min. There, the car remains standing for
4. The reading of the odometer of a bus, which is
2 min. Then, it comes back to point M with uniform
about to start its journey, is 42124 km. It reaches
speed in 2 minutes.
its destination after 5 h travelling at a uniform speed
(A)
of 40 km/h.
The odometer of the bus now reads Distance
(A) 42194 km (B) 42244 km
(C) 42324 km (D) 42384 km
5. The odometer of a scooter reads 14316.0 km. The
person is moving with a uniform speed of 30 m/s
and reaches his destination after 20 minutes.
What is the reading of the odometer when the rider 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
reaches his destination? Time (in min)
(A) 14280.0 km (B) 14316.0 km (B)
(C) 14332.0 km (D) 14352.0 km
6. In a race, Zaheer and Abbas run with a speed such
Distance
that the former takes thrice the time more than the
latter to cover a distance.
What is the ratio of the speeds of Abbas and
Zaheer?
(A) 1:9 (B) 1:3 (C) 3:1 (D) 9:1
7. A cyclist is travelling with a uniform speed on a 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
straight road. After traveling 700 m, one of the tyres Time (in min)
of the cycle got punctured. He decided to cover (C)
the rest of the distance (300 m) by walking with
the cycle. He covers the remaining 300 m in 7
Distance
minutes.
If the cyclist takes a total of 12 minutes to complete
his journey, then what is his average speed during
the journey?
(A) 23.81 m/min (B) 61.28 m/min
(C) 83.33 m/min (D) 97.48 m/min 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Time (in min)
www.betoppers.com
Motion 35
(D)
Distance
(A)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Time (in min)
The given table shows the distance

11. covered and the time taken by four (B)
cyclists M, N, P, and R.
Cyclist Cyclist Cyclist
M M M
N N N
P P P
(C)
R R R
Which cyclist will take the maximum time to

cover any given distance?
(A) M (B) N (C) P (D) R
12. A train of length 570 m enters into the Pirpanjal
tunnel at 8:25 am. The length of the Pirpanjal tunnel
(D)
is 11.43 km. The speed of the train is 60 km/h.
When the train completely exits from the tunnel,
the clock will read
(A) 8:37 am (B) 9:01 am 14. An airplane starts its journey from Delhi to Chennai
(C) 9:37 am (D) 10:12 am at 8:50 am. When it lands at Chennai airport, the
clock time is 11:15 am. The shortest distance
13. Consider the following statements: between Delhi and Chennai is 2095 km.
I. Car I is parked near a post office What was the speed of the airplane during its
II. Car II is moving along a straight road with journey?
uniform speed (A) 14.48 m/s (B) 28.96 m/s
Which of the following distance?time graphs (C) 240.80 m/s (D) 481.60 m/s
represents the motion of the respective cars?
15. A car is moving with a speed of 53 km/h. It can
cover a distance of 318 km in
1 1
(A) h (B) h (C) 6 h (D) 12 h
6 12
www.betoppers.com
5. Two athletes, Ajay and Rahul, are participating in

IIT JEE Worksheet a 100 m race. Ajay runs with a speed of 5 m/s.
Rahul takes 5 s more than Ajay to complete the
I. Single Correct Answer Type
race.
A race is scheduled. There are four
1. What is the speed of Rahul?
participants only. The given table
shows the names of the participants and (A) 4.0 m/s (B) 4.5 m/s
their respective velocities. (C) 5.5 m/s (D) 6.0 m/s
Participant Participant 6. A boy ran for 30 minutes and then walked for the
same time to cover a total distance of 2.5 km.
Ranvir Chauhan Ranvir Chauhan The boy runs with a speed of 4 km/h.
Deepak Gupta Deepak Gupta The boy walks with a speed of
(A) 1.0 km/h (B) 1.5 km/h
Apurva Gupta Apurva Gupta
(C) 2.5 km/h (D) 3.0 km/h
Pavan Chauhan Pavan Chauhan 7. Rohit goes to school by a car. While boarding the
Who will touch the finishing line just after the car, he saw that its odometer reading was 1020
winner? km. When he reached the school, before getting
(A) Ranvir Chauhan (B) Deepak Gupta off the car, he saw that the odometer reading was
(C) Apurva Gupta (D) Pavan Chauhan 1041 km. The speed of the car remained 14 m/s
2. The position versus time graph of the motion of a throughout the journey.
boy along a straight path is shown in the given What is the time taken by the car to reach the
figure. school?
(A) 400 s (B) 800 s
(C) 1400 s (D) 1500 s
8. A few friends were going for a picnic to a nearby
hill station in a car. At the start of their journey,
they saw that the odometer reading is 1500 km.
They reached the picnic spot in 2 h. They were
travelling with a uniform speed of 100 km/h.
The total time for which the boy remains in motion What is the final reading of the odometer?
is (A) 200 km (B) 700 km
(A) 16 s (B) 10 s (C) 9 s (D) 4s
(C) 1300 km (D) 1700 km
3. While sitting in his father's car, Zaheer observes
that there is no change in the odometer reading 9. An express train and a passenger train start from
of the car for a certain period of time. the same station at the same time. When the
It can be concluded from Zaheer's observation express train reaches place B, the passenger train
that the car is at the same time reaches place A that is situated
(A) at rest (B) gaining speed midway between the station and Place B.
(C) moving uniformly (D) reducing speed What is the ratio of the speed of the express train
4. There is some problem in the speedometer of to that of the passenger train?
Raju's car. It always indicates a value twice the (A) 1: 2 (B) 2: 1
actual value. One day, he drives the car to a (C) 1: 4 (D) 4: 1
mechanic shop for repair. The shop is 100 km
10. Ram can run twice as fast as Shyam. Shyam runs
from his house. It takes 5 h to reach the destination
for 5 minutes and Ram runs for 10 minutes.
with a constant speed.
Distances covered by Ram and Shyam ared1 and
What will be the reading of the speedometer?
d2 respectively.
(A) 20 km/h (B) 40 km/h
(C) 250 km/h (D) 500 km/h What is the ratio d1:d2?
(A) 1: 4 (B) 1: 2
(C) 2: 1 (D) 4: 1
www.betoppers.com
Motion 37
11. The distance-time graph for a body with speed is 16. Which of the following is an effect of force?
a straight line the time axis.
(A) Moving a body at rest.
The information in which alternative completes the
(B) Stopping a ball in motion.
given statement?
(C) Changing the direction of motion.
(A) i ii (D) Changing the speed of a body in motion.
uniform parallel to III. Paragraph Type
The actual length covered by a moving body in
i ii between two points, irrespective of the direction in
(B)
which the body is moving, is called distance.
non-uniform parallel to Displacement is the shortest distance between two
points.
The units of both distance and displacement are
(C) i ii
metre and centimeter.
uniform at an angle with Using the above information answer the following
quesitons.
(D) i ii 17. If a body completes one complete revolution in a

circular path, then
non-uniform at an angle with
(A) Distance = 0
II. Multiple Correct Answer Type (B) Magnitude of displacement = 0
12. Metre is the SI unit of (C) Both (A) and (B) are correct
(A) Length (B) Distance (D) None of these
(C) Displacement (D) Speed 18. A man leaves his house at 5.00 a.m. for a morning
13. Which of the following is the unit of speed? walk for 2km and returns at 6.00. a.m. What is his
displacement traversed by him in this time?
(A) Metre per second
(A) 4 km (B) 8 km (C) 2 km (D) Zero
(B) Centimetre per second
19. In the above question, what is the distance travelled
(C) Kilometre per hour
by the man?
(D) Miles per hour
(A) 4 km (B) 8km (C) 2 km (D) Zero
14. Which of the following are examples for periodic
motion? 20. The figure given below shows the path taken by a
boy during a walk. Find the total distance covered
(A) The motion of the earth round the sun by the boy.
is periodic.
B
(B) The swinging pendulum of a wall clock.
(C) The needle of a sewing machine running
at constant speed. 3 km
4 km
(D) A car moving on a straight road.
15. Which of the following describe random motion? 2 km
(A) A buzzing bee. C D
A
(B) A football player on the field.
(A) 12 km (B) 9 km (C) 10 km (D) 5 km
(C) A car moving on a circular road.
(D) The flying motion of a sparrow.
www.betoppers.com
IV. Integer Type
21. A body is moving with a speed of 36 kmph. Its
speed = ________ m/s.
22. A body is moving along a circular path and 2012
revolutions round it. What is the total displacement
of the body?
23. A body covers a distance of 3.6km in 1 hour. The
speed of the body is ________ m/s.
IV. Matrix Matching
(Match the following)
24. Column – I Column – II
(A) A car moving (p) Periodic motion
on a straight road
(B) A javelin thrown (q) Rotatory motion
by an athlete
(C) Motion of a (r)Curvilinear motion
potter’s wheel
(D) Motion of heart (s) Translatory motion
beats

www.betoppers.com
Learning Outcomes Light
By the e nd o f t hi s c ha pte r , y o u w i l l u nd e r s ta nd
Chapter - 53
 Light  Application of reflection
 Reflection of light  Plane Mirror– Its uses
 General terms to the reflection  Spherical mirrors
 Laws of reflection  Terms related to spherical mirrors
 Image  Uses of Spherical Mirrors
 Geometrical construction of an image of an extended  Images Formed by Lens
object in a plane mirror  Sunlight
1. Light reflect the light incident on them which on entering

into our eyes, make them visible.
If we enter a dark room, objects present there are
not visible. However, if a bulb is switched on,
everything in the room becomes visible. It shows
that for vision the presence of light is essential.
Definition of light: It is an invisible energy which
causes in us sensation of sight (vision). Since light
is obtained from heat energy, i.e., when an object is
heated to a temperature beyond [500 0C, we can
say that light is a kind of energy].
It must be kept in mind that light energy makes the
surrounding objects visible, but by itself it is an
invisible energy.
For example, if we are seeing a coloured poster,
Note: Reflection is possible in case of plane mirror.
then we are seeing only the poster and not the
A plane mirror is a plane glass plate which is silvered
coloured lights reflected fronts it. It is because light
at its one surface. The other surface is then
is invisible. The various colours reflected from he
reflecting surface of the plane mirror.
poster excite the retina of the eye, which in turn
sends a message to the brain. It is the brain which Types of Reflections
finally makes out the colours of the poster. Thus, (a) Regular Reflection
we can conclude that light is an invisible energy The phenomenon due to which a parallel beam of
which causes in us sensation of vision. light travelling through a certain medium, on striking
some smooth polished surface, bounces off from it,
2. Reflection of Light as parallel beam, in some other direction is called
When a beam of light is incident on a surface, a part Regular Reflection.
of it is returned back into the same medium. The Regular reflection takes place from the objects like
part of light which is returned back into the same looking glass, still water, oil, highly polished metals,
medium is called the reflected light. etc.
The remaining part of light is absorbed if the surface Regular reflection is useful in the formation of
on which the incident light strikes is opaque or it is images, e.g., we can see our face in a mirror only on
partly transmitted and partly absorbed if the surface account of regular reflection. However, it causes a
is transparent. very strong glare in our eyes.
Reflection
The return of light into the same medium after striking
a surface is called reflection. Reflection of light is
the process which enables us to see different objects
around us. Luminous bodies are directly seen, but
non luminous objects are seen only because they
(b) Irregular Reflection or Diffused Reflection angle of reflection.  M’BC is the glance angle of
The phenomenon due to which a parallel beam of reflection in the figure.
light, travelling through some medium, gets reflected
in various possible directions, on striking some rough
surface is called Irregular Reflection or Diffused
Reflection.
The reflection which takes places from ground;
walls; trees; suspended particles in air; and a variety
of other objects, which are not very smooth, is
irregular reflection.
Irregular reflection helps in spreading light energy
over a vast region and also decreases its intensity. 4. Laws of Reflection
Thus, it helps in the general illumination of places
1. The incident ray, the reflected ray and the
and helps us to see things around us.
normal lie in the same plane, at the point of
incidence.
2. The angle of incidence is always equal to the
angle of reflection.
Formula for the Angle of Deviation due to
Reflection
In the figure angle of incidence = i; Angle of
3. General terms to the Reflection deviation = d
N
(a) Mirror: A smooth polished surface from which A B
regular reflection can take place is called mirror.
MM| is the mirror as shown in figure.
(b) Incident Ray: A ray of light which travels towards i r
the mirror is called incident ray. AB is an incident ray M
O d
M1
in the figure.
(c) Point of Incidence: The point on the mirror, where
an incident ray strikes is called point of incidence. ‘B’
c
is the point of incidence in the figure.
(d) Reflected Ray: A ray of light which bounces off the Consider the straight line AOC, i + r +d = 180°
surface of a mirror, is called reflected ray. BC is i.e., the sum of angle of incidence, angle of reflection
reflected ray in the figure. and angle of deviation is 180°.
(e) Normal: The perpendicular drawn at the point of  d = 180 – (i + r) = 180 – (i + i) (i = r)
incidence, to the surface of mirror is called normal.  d  180 – 2i
BN is the normal in the figure. Therefore, for an angle of incidence i, the angle of
(f) Angle of Incidence: The angle made by the deviation is equal to 180 – 2i =   2i
incident ray with the normal is called angle of Note: The deviation produced by n reflections from
incidence.  ABN is the angle of incidence in the
two plane mirrors inclined at an angle  is given by
figure.
D = n(180 –  ) = 360 – 2  , if n = 2 where n is even.
(g) Angle of Reflection: The angle made by the
reflected ray with the normal is called angle of 5. Image
reflection.  CBN is the angle of reflection in the
When the rays of light, diverging from an object point,
figure.
after reflection or refraction, either actually meet at
(h) Glance Angle of Incidence: The angle which the
some other point, or appear to meet at some other
incident ray makes with the mirror is called glance
point, then that point is called image of that object.
angle of incidence.  MBA is the glance angle of
incidence in the figure.
(i) Glance Angle of Reflection: The angle which the
reflected ray makes with the mirror is called glance
www.betoppers.com
Light 41
Types of images
Virtual image Real image

The rays of light
1. The rays of light after
after reflection
reflection or refraction
or refraction
appear to meet at some
actually meet at
other point.
some point.
2. It cannot be caught on It can be caught Characteristics of an Image formed by a Plane
the screen. on the screen. Mirror
3. It is always erect. It is always real. 1. The image is formed behind the mirror and has
Image formed the same size as the object
4. Image of our face in
on a cinema 2. The image is inverted laterally.
plane mirror is a virtual
screen is a real
image. 3. The image is as far behind the mirror as the
image.
object is in front of it.
6. Geometrical Construction of an 4. The image is virtual. It cannot be received on
Image of an Extended Object in a screen.
a Plane Mirror: (Two-Ray 5. The image is erected w.r.t object
Diagram)
7. Application of Reflection
Consider an extended object P situated in front of a
plane mirror. For geometrical construction, we will (i) Periscope:
consider two points X and Y on this object. First of A periscope is an instrument for observation from
all we will locate the position of the image, keeping a concealed position. In its simplest form it consists
in mind that image formed in a plane mirror is as of a tube with mirrors at each end set parallel to
far behind as the object is in front of it, by taking each other at a 45-degree angle. This form of
normal incidence. periscope, with the addition of two simple lenses,
In order to construct two-ray diagram, from point served for observation purposes in the trenches
X| draw two rays straight towards eye along X|E during World War I
and X|F, cutting the mirror at A and B respectively. Construction:
Join XA and XB to form incident beam on mirror. It consists of a cardboard or wooden tube bent twice
Similarly, from point Yj draw two rays towards the at right angles and is provided with two openings.
eye along Y|E and Y|F cutting at C and D. Join YC Two plane mirrors (a) are fixed at the bends of the
and YD to form incident beam on mirror. tube at an angle 45°. Both the mirrors face each
other. The tube is completely blackened from inside
to avoid and reflection from its sides. The parallel
rays coming from an object strike the first plane
mirror at an angle of 45°. The rays get reflected at
an angle of 45°. These reflected rays strike the
second mirror and further reflected through an angle
of 45°. Thus we can see the image.
Lateral Inversion: The phenomenon clue to which

the image of an object turns through an angle of
180" through vertical axis rather than horizontal axis,
such that right side of image appears as left or vice
versa is called lateral inversion.
www.betoppers.com
Uses: at one end. Make a lid out of tracing paper to cover
1. It is used to see above the head of crowds. the beads or coloured shapes. The lid must be high
2. It is used by soldiers in trench warfare. enough to let the beads or shapes them move about.
Disadvantages Look through the clear plastic at the other end of
1. The final image is not brightly illuminated as light the triangular tube which is now a kaleidoscope.
energy is absorbed due to tow successive Turn the kaleidoscope while looking through it a see
reflections. the changing patterns .formed by light bouncing off
2. Any deposition of moisture or dust on the mirror the aluminium foil.
reduces the reflection almost to nil and hence the A better kaleidoscope can be made if you can use
periscope cannot be used in places where there is small mirrors instead of aluminium foil. The
a lot of dust or moisture. kaleidoscope was invented by Sir David Brewster
Kaleidoscope (1781-1868).
(Kaleido = beautiful + edos = image + scope = U ses
viewing). It is an instrument used to view beautiful 1. Kaleidoscope is used as a toy for children.
images formed by the reflection of the two or more 2. Kaleidoscope is used by costume – designers
mirrors (usually three) when placed at different in cloth mills and fashion designing institutes.
angles.
Principle: Multiple reflections take place in plane
8. Plane Mirror– Its uses
mirrors. This is the principle of ‘Kaleidoscope’. 1. They are used as looking glass.
2. They are used by opticians to provide false
dimensions.
These false dimension can be obtained when two
mirrors are fixed parallel to each other.
3. They are used in the construction of reflecting
periscope.
Construction: 4. They are used in solar cookers for reflecting the
rays of sun into the cooker.
5. They are used for signalling purposes.
6. They are used by barbers to show the customer the
back of his head.
Formative Worksheet
1. What is the sum of the angle of the incidence, angle
of reflection and the angle of deviation equal to?
2. What is the angle of deviation for an angle of
incidence i ?
3. For an angle of incidence 30° on a plane mirror, find
the following a) angle of reflection b) angle of
Cut out a 16 × 16 cm piece of cardboard. Use a deviation c) glancing angle of incidence d) Sum of
pencil to divide the cardboard into 4 strips each 4 angles of incidence, reflection and glancing
cm wide. Use a sharp knife to score along the pencil 4. A ray is incident on a mirror at a glancing angle ‘g’.
lines so that the cardboard can be easily folded into Find the angle of deviation.
4 strips. Use paste to attach aluminium foil over 2 5. What is the maximum angle of deviation possible
of the strips at one end. Colour the next strip black. for a ray incident on a plane mirror?
Fold the strips to make a tube with a triangular cross- 6. What is the angle between the incident ray and the
section. Two of the inside walls of the triangular reflected ray for a normal incidence?
tube have aluminium foil on them and the inside of 7. For a certain angle of incidence the angle of
the third wall is black. Use adhesive tape to keep deviation and the angle of reflection are equal. Find
the folded cardboard in shape. Attach clear plastic the angle of incidence.
to each end of the triangular tube. Put coloured 8. The incident ray and the reflected ray are at right
beads or small coloured shapes on the clear plastic angles. Then find the angle of incidence and the
angle of reflection.
www.betoppers.com
Light 43
9. A ray of light is incident at 50° on the middle of a
pair of mirrors arranged at 60° to each other. Conceptive Worksheet
Calculate the angle of incidence on the second 1. Statement I : The plane containing the incident ray
mirror. and the normal is called plane of incidence.
10. Two plane mirrors are separated by 120° as the Statement II : The plane containing the incident ray
drawing illustrates. If a ray strikes the mirror M1 at and the normal is called plane of reflection.
60°, making an angle of incidence, at what angle (A) Both Statements are true, Statement - II is
(q) does it leave the mirror M2? the correct explanation of Statement- I
11. A ray of light is incident on a horizontal plane mirror (B) Both Statements are true, Statement - II is
at an angle of 45°. After reflection from M1, some not correct explanation of Statement - I
of the light is incident on another plane mirror. If (C) Statement - I is true, Statement - II is false
the ray reflected by the second plane mirror travels (D) Statement - I is false, Statement - II is true
horizontally, find the angle between the mirrors. 2. Match the following:
12. Can a plane mirror form a real image? Column-I Column-II
13. What about photographing a virtual image? Will you (A) Plane of reflection 1) The plane containing
succeed? Can your image in your image in a plane the reflected ray and
mirror be photographed? normal
14. An object is situated at a distance 10m in front of (B) Angle of deviation 2) The angle made by
the mirror. It is moved to a distance of 4 m towards incident ray with the
the mirror. Find the distance moved by the image mirror
towards the mirror and the final distance between (C) Glancing angle 3) Angle through which
the image and the object. a ray deviates from its
15. An object is situated at a distance of ‘x’m in front normal path
of a plane mirror. If the object is moved a distance (D) Normal 4) perpendicular drawn
of ‘y’ m towards the mirror, then find the distance to the surface at the
moved by the image towards the mirror and the point of incidence
final distance between the image and the object. 5) The angle made by
16. An object is moving away from the mirror with a reflected ray with the
speed of 30 m/s. After 2 seconds the distance mirror
between the object and its image is found to be 200 3. When the rays of light, diverging from a point, after
m. Find the initial distance between the object and reflection or refraction, appear to diverge from
the image. another point, then the image so formed is called
17. If the mirror is displaced by 10 m away from the (A) Virtual image (B) Real image
object, find the displacement of the image. (C) Both (A) and (B) (D) Neither (A) nor (B)
18. If both object and mirror move away from each 4. When the rays of light, diverging from a point, after
other by 10 m in 1 second, then find the displacement reflection or refraction actually converge at some
of the image. other point then that point is _____ image of the
19. A clock is kept in front of a plane mirror and the object
motion of the hands is observed. Do the hands of (A) Virtual (B) Real
the clock move in an anticlockwise direction? (C) Both (A) and (B) (D) Neither (A) nor (B)
20. An object situated at a distance of 10cm infront of 5. The image formed by a plane mirror is always:
a plane mirror. The distance of image from the (A) Real (B) Erect
mirror is __________ (C) Virtual (D) Both (B) and (C)
6. Reflection is possible in case of
(A) Plane mirror (B) Transparent glass
(C) Both (A) and (B) (D) Neither (A) nor (B)
7. The part of light which is returned back into the
same medium is called
(A) Reflected light (B) Refracted light
www.betoppers.com
8. Motion and still pictures projected in a cinema hall 16. A ray of light is incident on a plane mirror at an
are ______ images angle of 60° What is the angle of deviation?
(A) Real (B) Virtual (A) 60° (B) 30° (C) 90° (D) 180°
(C) Erect (D) All of these 17. An object situated at a distance of 10cm infront of
9. Choose the correct statements: a plane mirror. The distance of image from the
mirror is
(A) Regular reflection takes place on highly
polished smooth surfaces (A) 10cm (B) 20cm
(B) Irregular reflection takes place on rough (C) 5cm (D) Some other value
surface 18. A man standing in front of a plane mirror is wearing
(C) Irregular reflection is also called as diffused T-shirt on which the word HERO is written.
reflection. The word HERO will appear to the man in the mirror
as
(D) On plane mirror regular reflection takes place.
(A) (B)
10. Image of our face in a plane mirror
(A) Is a virtual image (C) (D)
(B) Is a real image 19. Pravjot is standing in front of a big plane mirror. He
can see his image in the mirror. Now, the mirror is
(C) Cannot be taken on the screen
moved away from him with a constant speed of 1 m/
(D) Both (B) and (C) s At what speed will Pravjot’s images move away
11. If a mirror is rotated by 10°, the reflected ray is from him?
rotated by (A) 1 m/s (B) 2 m/s
(A) 10° (B) 20° (C) 40° (D) 30° (C) 3 m/s (D) 4 m/s
12. Statement I : All the light rays actually converge at 20. Bunty, Pappu, and Babblee are standing in front of
some point a big plane mirror. The distance between the mirror
Statement II : All the light rays appears to converge and Bunty is twice as compared to that between the
at some point mirror and Pappu, which is double the distance
(A) Both Statements are true, Statement - II is between the mirror and Babblee. The distance
the correct explanation of Statement- I. between Babblee and her image is 1 m. What will be
(C) Both Statements are true, Statement - II is the distance between Bunty and his image, if the
not correct explanation of Statement - I.
(B) Statement - I is true, Statement - II is false. mirror is moved 1 m back from its original position?
(D) Statement - I is false, Statement - II is true. (A) 2 m (B) 4 m (C) 6 m (D) 8 m
13. Statement I : Real images are always inverted
Statement II : Virtual images are always erect 9. Spherical Mirrors
(A) Both Statements are true, Statement - II is Raj and Laxmi were waiting for their dinner. Raj
the correct explanation of Statement- I. lifted a stainless steel plate and saw his image in it.
(B) Both Statements are true, Statement - II is Oh! This plate acts as a plane mirror. My image is
not correct explanation of Statement - I. erect and is of the same size. Laxmi saw her image
(C) Statement - I is true, Statement - II is false. using the back of a steel spoon. “Raj look here! I
(D) Statement - I is false, Statement - II is true. can also see my erect image though it is smaller in
14. When a mirror is rotated through an angle  the size. This spoon also acts as a mirror of some kind”,
reflected ray from it, turns through an angle of said Laxmi. You can also use a spoon or any curved
shining surface to see your image. Now try to do
 these activities on your own.
(A)  (B) (C) 2 (D) 0
2 Activity -1
15. The incident ray and the reflected ray from a mirror Take a stainless steel spoon. Bring the outer side of
are mutually perpendicular to each other. The angle the spoon near your face and look into it.
of incidence is
(A) 90° (B) 45° (C) 22.5° (D) Zero
www.betoppers.com
Light 45
Convex mirror: A spherical mirror whose outer
surface is the reflecting surface is called a convex
mirror.
reflecting surface
opaque inner
surface
Do you see your image in it ? Is this image different
from what you see in a plane mirror? Is this image sphere
erect? Is the size of the image the same, smaller or
larger?
Now look at your image using the inner side of the
Convex mirror
spoon.
10. Terms related to Spherical
Mirrors
Aperture: The width (distance) of the spherical
mirror from which reflection can take place is called
This time you may find that your image is erect and its aperture. It is denoted by MM
larger in size. If you increase the distance of the Pole: The centre of a spherical mirror is called its
spoon from your face, you may see your image pole. It is denoted by P.
inverted . You can also compare the image of your Centre of Curvature: The geometric centre of the
pen or pencil instead of your face. hollow sphere of which the spherical mirror is a part
Understanding is called the centre of curvature of the spherical
The curved shining surface of a spoon acts as a mirror. It is denoted by C.
mirror. The most common example of a curved Radius of Curvature: The radius of the hollow
mirror is a spherical mirror. Let’s understand some sphere of which the spherical mirror is a part is
thing more about these spherical mirrors. called the radius of curvature of the spherical mirror.
A highly polished plane surface is called a plane In other words, the
mirror. A mirror in which the reflecting surface is M M
curved is called a spherical mirror.
Reflecting surface
Reflecting surface
Silvered surface
Silvered surface
X P X P
C F C F
   
M' M'
Concave mirror Convex mirror
distance between the pole and centre of curvature
In spherical mirrors the polished reflecting surface
of the spherical mirror (PC) is called its radius of
is a part of a hollow sphere of glass. Depending
curvature. It is denoted by r.
upon the nature of the reflecting surface of the
Principal axis: The straight line passing through the
mirror, spherical mirrors are of two types.
centre of curvature and the pole of a spherical
Different types of spherical mirrors
mirror is called its principal axis (PX).
Concave mirror: A spherical mirror whose inner
Focus: If a beam of light parallel to the principal
hollow surface is the reflecting surface is called a
axis falls on a concave mirror, all the rays after
concave mirror.
opaque inner surface
reflection meet at a point. This point is called the
focus (F) of the concave mirror.
reflecting
surface If a beam of light parallel to the principal axis falls on
a convex mirror, all the rays after reflection diverge.
sphere
If the reflected rays are extended backwards, they
appear to come from a point on the principal axis.
This point is called the focus of the convex mirror.
Concave mirror
www.betoppers.com
M M
principal F P P focus
axis
focus
. M'
M'
focal length Focal length
Focal length: The distance between the pole (P) and focus (F) is called the focal length (f). It is denoted by
f.
f  PF
Types of Images formed by Spherical Mirrors
A concave mirror forms both real and virtual images. The size and nature of the image formed by a concave
mirror depends on the position of the object. A convex mirror forms only virtual, erect and diminished images.
The different types of images formed by a concave mirror as follows.
Position of the object Position of the image Relative size of the Nature of the image
image
At infinity At focus (F) Highly diminished Real and inverted
Beyond C Between C and F Diminished Real and inverted
At C At C Same size Real and inverted
Between C and F Beyond C Enlarged Real and inverted
At F At infinity Highly magnified Real and inverted
Between F and P On the other side of Enlarged Virtual and erect
the mirror.
11. Uses of Spherical Mirrors erect image. Also they have a wider field of view as
I. Uses of Concave Mirror
they are curved outwards.
Concave mirrors are commonly used in torches,
search-lights and vehicles head lights to get powerful Formative Worksheet
parallel beams of light. They are used as shaving 21. Statement I : A concave mirror has a real focus.
mirrors to see a lager image of the face. The dentists Statement II : A convex mirror has a virtual focus.
(A) Both Statements are true, Statement - II is
use concave mirrors to see large images of the teeth
the correct explanation of Statement - I.
of patients. Large concave mirrors are used to (B) Both Statements are true, Statement - II is
concentrate sun light to produce heat in solar not correct explanation of Statement - I.
(C) Statement - I is true, Statement - II is false.
furnaces.
(D) Statement - I is false, Statement - II is true.
II. Uses of Convex Mirrors 22. What is the nature of image formed when object is
Convex mirrors are commonly used as rear-view placed beyond centre of curvature?
(A) Real (B) Virtual
mirrors in vehicles. These mirrors are fitted on the
(C) B oth A & B (D) No image is formed
sides of the vehicle, enabling the driver to see traffic
behind him/her to facilitate safe driving. Convex
mirrors are preferred because they always give an
www.betoppers.com
Light 47
23. An object is placed at centre of curvature of a 29. A man decides to start his saloon. He went to the
concave mirror whose radius of curvature is 20 cm. market to buy an item that would make the shaving
The image is formed from pole at a distance of the beard of his customers comfortable and
is__________ easier for him.What did the man buy?
(A) 10 cm (B) 20 cm (C) 30 cm (D) 15 cm (A) Concave lens (B) Convex lens
24. When object is placed at centre of curvature for a (C) Convex mirror (D) Concave mirror
concave mirror the image formed is 30. A ball is cut into two halves. On the outer surface
(A) Real inverted of same size of one half of the ball, a shiny aluminium foil is
(B) Virtual erect of same size pasted. A candle is now placed in front of this shiny
(C) Real erect of same size surface. The image of the candle formed by the
(D) virtual inverted of same size. shiny surface is
25. Column-I (A) Virtual and smaller in size
(A) Focal length of the spherical mirror (B) Real and smaller in size
(B) Radius of curvature is two times of (C) Virtual and bigger in size
(C) Plane mirror (D) Real and bigger in size
(D) Concave mirror 31. A small child stuck the non-reflecting ends of two
Column-II mirrors with glue. He saw his inverted image on
1) Virtual image one side of the mirror and on the other side, he saw
2) Distance between principal focus and pole
his magnified image. The types of mirrors used are
3) Real image
(A) Both convex
4) Half radius of curvature
(B) Both concave
5) Line passing through pole and centre of
curvature (C) One concave and the other plane
26. The image formed by a convex mirror of real object (D) One convex and the other plane
is larger than the object. 32. A parallelogram is kept in front of a convex mirror.
The front view of the parallelogram can be seen in
(A) When u  2f (B) When u > 2f
the convex mirror, as shown in the given figure.
(C) For all values of u (D) For no value of u
What is the apparent area of the visible side that
27. Statement I : The radius of curvature and focal can be seen on the convex mirror?
length of convex mirror are 80cm and 40cm
Statement II : The relation between radius of
curvature and focal length is R = 2f.
the correct explanation of Statement - I.
(B) Both Statements are true, Statement - II is
not correct explanation of Statement - I.
(A) 21 cm2 (B) 32 cm2
(C) Statement - I is true, Statement - II is false.
(D) Statement - I is false, Statement - II is true. (C) 45 cm2 (D) 48 cm2
28. A small boy went to a mirror show and found that 33. Four students named Anuj, Aruna, Priti, and Denny
there were five mirrors. He went in front of each deliver one statement each about the characteristics
mirror to see his image. In the first four mirrors, his of images formed by concave mirrors. The
image appeared smaller in size and in the last mirror, characteristics are listed below.
his image appeared magnified. While his image was Anuj: “Concave mirrors can form real as well as
inverted in the first three mirrors, it was erect in the virtual images.”
last two mirrors. How many convex mirrors were Aruna: “Concave mirrors can form only small real
there in the mirror show? images.”
Priti: “Concave mirrors can form erect as well as
(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4
inverted images.”
www.betoppers.com
Denny: “Concave mirrors can form large virtual (A) Convex Diminished
images.” (B) Concave Enlarged
Which student’s statement about concave mirrors (C) Concave Diminished
is incorrect? (D) Convex Enlarged
(A) Anuj (B) Priti 39. A convex mirror tends to diverge a falling parallel
(C) Aruna (D) Denny beam of light. This property of convex mirrors is
34. There are four mirrors labelled as I, II, III, and IV. used in
Mirrors I and IV can form virtual and small images (A) Solar furnaces
only. Mirror III can form an image that can be (B) Dentists’ mirrors
obtained on a screen. Mirror II cannot form real (C) Reflector in torch lights
images of objects. (D) Reflector in street lamps
Which of the given mirrors can form an inverted 40. Dentists use concave mirrors for investigations
image of the object? because concave mirrors form
(A) I (B) II (C) III (D) IV (A) Real images
35. Convex mirrors are used as rear view mirrors in (B) Inverted images
vehicles because they (C) Magnified images
(A) Form virtual and larger images (D) Diminished images
(B) Form real and large images 41. Convex mirrors are used as surveillance mirrors in
(C) Have a small field of view libraries because they form
(D) Have a large field of view (A) Real, erect, and magnified images
36. While reading his science book, Billu decides to (B) Real, erect, and diminished images
prepare a list of devices that involve the use of (C) Virtual, erect, and magnified images
concave mirrors. The given table shows the list (D) Virtual, erect, and diminished images
prepared by him. One device is listed incorrectly in
the table. Conceptive Worksheet
Torch 21. The spherical surfaces that have a property of
Headlight reflection and that are highly polished are called
Dentist’s mirror (A) Spherical mirror (B) Plane mirror
Rearview mirror (C) Plane glass plate (D) Both 1 and 2
22. Concave mirror acts as
Solar furnace
(A) Converging mirror (B) Diverging mirror
Which device is included incorrectly in the list?
(C) Both (A) and (B) (D) Plane mirror
(A ) Torch (B) Solar furnace
23. Convergence of concave mirror can be decreased
(C) Dentist’s mirror (D) Rearview mirror
by dipping in
37. John was driving his car. In the rearview mirror, he
(A) Water (B) Oil
saw that a vehicle was just behind his car. He was
(C) Both Oil& Water (D)Neither Oil nor Water
able to read the word on the
24. The image formed by convex mirror is always
vehicle.
(A) Virtual (B) Erect
Which of the following figures is inscribed on the
(C) Diminished (D) Real
vehicle?
25. Which of the following forms a virtual and erect
(A) (B) image for all positions of a real object
(A) Plane mirror (B) Convex mirror.
(C) (D) (C) Concave mirror (D) All the above
26. The diameter of spherical mirror in which reflection
38. A mirror is used as a shaving mirror takes place is called
because when placed close to the face, it can (A) Radius of curvature (B) Centre of curvature
(C) Linear aperture (D) Focal length.
form image of the face.
27. For a concave mirror when object is placed at infinity
Which alternative gives the correct information to the image is formed at
complete the given statement? (A) Pole (B) Principal focus
(i) (ii) (C) Centre of curvature (D) Infinity
www.betoppers.com
Light 49
28. The focal length of concave mirror is -40cm . Its (part of a sphere) in nature. Based on the shape of
radius of curvature is the curve on the surface of a lens, lenses are
(A) -20cm (B) +20cm grouped into two main types:
(C) -80cm (D) +80cm (i) A convex lens, having a bulge in the centre
29. Choose the correct statements and with narrow edges.
(A) Convex mirror acts as converging mirror. (ii) A concave lens, having a depression in the
(B) Image formed by convex mirror is virtual centre and thick at the edges.
(C) For a concave mirror when object is placed at
infinity the image is formed at principal focus.
(D) Convex mirror acts as diverging mirror.
30. Convex mirrors can be used as
(A) A solar furnace
(B) A dentists’ mirror
(C) Reflectors of torches
(D) Side-view mirror in cars
31. Images formed by a Formation of Spherical Lenses
(A) Convex mirror are always diminished Different Shapes of Spherical Lenses
(B) Concave mirror are always diminished A. Double convex (both the sides convex)
(C) Concave mirror are always enlarged B. Plano convex (converging lens)
C. Concave convex (convex meniscus)
(D) Convex mirror are always enlarged
D. Concave concave (concave meniscus)
32. The dentist’s mirror is a device used by dentists to
E. Plano concave (diverging lens)
check the position and size of cavity in teeth. The
F. Double concave (both the sides concave)
dentist’s mirror is basically a type of
(A) Plane mirror (B) Convex mirror
(C) Concave mirror (D) Parabolic mirror
33. Which of the following mirrors are used by
cosmetologists for their work?
(A) Parabolic (B) Concave
(C) Convex (D) Plane
34. The mirror is used as side view mirror
Different shapes of Spherical Lenses
in vehicles. It can form images of objects spread We call these lenses as glasses or specs (short for
over a area. a pair of spectacles) which are used by people with
The information in which alternative completes the poor sight to watch things through them. These are
given statements? nothing but a pair of lenses made from transparent
(i) (ii) glass and fixed to a frame which is held on to the
(A) Concave Large eyes. A lens, which is a magnifying glass, is used
(B) Convex Small by watchmakers to see very small parts of the
(C) Convex Large machine as big (large) through them.
(D) Concave Small Kinds of Lens
35. Concave mirrors cannot be used as Convex Lens:
(A) Side-view mirror in cars A convex lens makes the object magnified, when
(B) Reflectors of torches viewed through it. A convex lens is thick in the
(C) Dentists’ mirror middle and thin at its edge. When light rays pass
(D) Solar furnace through a convex lens, they bend inwards and
12. Images Formed by Lens converge at a common point to form an image of
the source of light.
What is a Lens? Rays from the sun converge to form its image as a
A lens is a piece of glass or any transparent material bright spot. A convex lens converges light rays.
bound with two surfaces, atleast one of which is a Therefore, it is also called a converging lens. The
curved surface. The curved surface is spherical image formed when the object is placed close to a
www.betoppers.com
convex lens is virtual, erect and magnified. Virtual rainbows arc is always directed away from the sun.
images cannot be caught on a screen. Images that It is believed that in the past, Norsemen saw
are caught on a screen are called real images. When rainbows as bridges for gods to come to the earth
the object is placed at a distance from a convex from their home in the sky. Norsemen were the
lens, the image formed is real, inverted and inhabitants of Norway. A rainbow lasted for about
diminished. 9 hours on 14th March, 1994, at a place called
Wetherby in Yorkshire, England. Although sunlight
appears white, it is composed of seven colours. The
colours in a rainbow are the colours of sunlight. A
rotating disc has a pencil that serves as a rotator.
The disc is covered with violet, indigo, blue, green,
yellow, orange and red coloured papers
When the disc is rotated, it appears white instead
of the individual colours. This is because a mixture
Convergence of light rays of colours of the rainbow in proper proportions
produces white colour. The colours of a rainbow
Concave Lens:
can be represented by the acronym: VIBGYOR:
It is a lens that possesses at least one surface that V - Violet, I - Indigo, B - Blue, G - Green, Y -
curves inwards. When light rays are incident on a Yellow, O - Orange and R - Red.
concave lens, they bend outwards or diverge. The
Dispersion of Light through a Prism
rays diverge away from each other. Thus, a
concave lens is also called a diverging lens. A Take a glass prism. Allow a narrow beam of sunlight
concave lens is thinner at its centre than at its edges, to pass through a small hole in the window of a
and is used to correct short sightedness. It does not dark room to fall on one face of the prism. The light
focus at a single point. The image formed by a bends when it passes through the prism. Now allow
concave lens is upright, virtual and smaller than the the light coming out of the other face of the prism
object. For example, the images seen through a to fall on a white sheet of paper or a white wall.
peephole are different from normal holes, because Different component colours of white light bend
these peep holes contain concave lenses. differently, and so the constituent colours can be
seen separately. Thus, the colours are said to have
dispersed after passing through the prism.
Formative Worksheet
42. Farman finds it difficult to read small-sized text from
one of his books. He wants to use an optical
instrument that helps him to read the book with ease
Applications of Lenses Which of the following optical instruments should
Lenses are used in magnifying glasses, peep holes, Farman choose?
cameras, bioscopes, binoculars, telescopes, (A) Concave lens (B) Convex lens
microscopes and projectors. A refracting telescope (C) Concave mirror (D) Convex mirror
uses a concave mirror and a convex lens.
43. A magnifying glass is simply a
13. Sunlight (A) Convex lens (B) Concave lens
A band of colours extending from violet to red is a (C) Convex mirror (D) Concave mirror
rainbow. A rainbow is formed by the refraction and 44. An activity is performed using a candle and an
reflection of the sun's rays through raindrops. optical instrument as shown in the given figure.
Rainbow
A band of colours extending from violet to red is a
rainbow. A rainbow is formed by the refraction and
reflection of the sun’s rays through raindrops. When
it is raining in one part of the sky and sunny in
another, a rainbow appears. The centre of the
www.betoppers.com
Light 51
Which optical instrument has been used in the 50. Diminished inverted images are produced by
activity? (A) Only a concave lens
(A) Concave lens (B) Convex lens (B) Only a concave mirror
(C) Concave mirror (D) Convex mirror (C) Both convex lens and concave mirrors
45. Rajesh took out the lens from his father’s old (D) Both convex mirrors and concave lens
spectacles and kept it in between sun rays and a 51. An image that is real and smaller than the object
paper. He varied the distance but he found that the can be produced by
paper did not burn. He became upset and looked at (A) A concave mirror only
the old spectacles through this lens. (B) A concave lens only
Appearance of the spectacles through the lens is (C) Either a concave lens or convex mirror
(A) Erect and large (B) Erect and small (D) Either a concave mirror or convex lens
(C) Inverted and large (D) Inverted and small 52. James allows a beam of sunlight to pass through a
46. Which optical instrument is used for reading small- glass prism in a completely dark room. He observes
size text? a multicolored band or spectrum of light, as shown
(A) Concave lens (B) Convex lens in the given figure.
(C) Convex mirror (D) Concave mirror
47. The image formed by a concave lens
is , , and .
given statement?
(A) i ii iii It can be concluded from James’ experiment that
real upright enlarged (A) A prism is made up of different colors
(B) White light is made up of different colors
(B) i ii iii (C) A prism can produce light of different colors
real inverted enlarged
(D) Any triangular object splits white light into
(C) i ii iii different colors
virt ual upright diminished 53. Ajay throws a narrow beam of white light on a glass
(D) i ii iii prism and observes the phenomenon of dispersion
virtual inverted diminished of light on the screen. He then placed a slit between
the prism and the screen such that the two colours
48. A convex lens is at the middle than the from the top and the three colours from the bottom
get obstructed.
edges. It is also called a lens. Which of the following pairs of colours still appear
The information in which alternative completes the on the screen?
given statement? (A) Yellow and orange (B) Green and yellow
(A) (B) (C) Blue and green (D) Indigo and blue
i ii i ii
thinner convergent thicker divergent 54. is the third colour in the rainbow when
(C) i ii (D) i ii counted from the bottom, while is the
thicker convergent thinner
divergent third colour when counted from the top.
49. The given figure shows a beam of sunlight passing Which colour is the third colour in a rainbow from
through an optical glass G. the bottom and top respectively?
(A) i ii (B) i ii
Yellow Blue Green Blue
Sunlight
(C) i ii (D) i ii
Red Yellow Orange Red
G
The optical glass G is a
(A) Concave mirror (B) Convex mirror
(C) Concave lens (D) Convex lens
www.betoppers.com
55. Tom is playing with a spinner. The spinner has all 46. Rainbow is formed due to _______ of light
the seven colors of the rainbow painted on it, as (A) Reflection (B) Refraction
shown in the figure. (C) Dispersion (D) Diffraction
47. Statement - I: A concave lens is used as a
converging lens.
Statement - II: A convex lens is used as a
diverging lens.
While the spinner is rotating, its color will appear to (A) I is true, II is false (B) I is false, II is true
be (C) Both are true (D) Both are false
(A) Red (B) Black (C) White (D) Yellow 48. Statement - I: A rainbow is formed by dispersion of
56. White light is composed of seven different colours. light when it passes through tiny droplets of water
These colours can be seen in a rainbow. suspended in air.
Which of the following colours is not present in a Statement - II: This band of seven colours is called
rainbow? spectrum or visible spectrum
(A) Green (B) Red (C) Black (D) Blue (A) I is true, II is false (B) I is false, II is true
(C) Both are true (D) Both are false
Conceptive Worksheet 49. Statement - I: A real image can be obtained on the
36. Which type of lens is called a converging lens? screen.
(A) Concave (B) Plano concave Statement - II: A virtual image can be obtained on
(C) Convex (D) All the screen.
37. Which type of lens is called a diverging lens? (A) I is true, II is false (B) I is false, II is true
(A) Concave (B) Plano concave (C) Both are true (D) Both are false
(C) Convex (D) All 50. Statement - I: Rainbow is not formed during noon.
38. Which type of image is formed by a convex lens? Statement - II: In the noon earth is in the direction
(A) Real (B) Inverted opposite to the sun and hence the rainbow on the
(C) Virtual (D) All earth is not seen.
39. Which type of image is formed by a concave (A) I is true, II is false (B) I is false, II is true
lens? (C) Both are true (D) Both are false
(A) Real (B) Inverted 51. Which type of lens is used to make fire with it
(C) Virtual (D) All during day time?
40. Which of the following acts a magnifying lens? (A) Concave (B) Plano concave
(A) Concave (B) Plano concave (C) Convex (D) All
(C) Convex (D) All
41. Which type of image is formed by a convex lens HOTS Worksheet
when an object is placed closer to it? 1. An object is placed at a distance of 20 cm infront
(A) Real (B) Inverted of a plane mirror. If the mirror moves towards the
(C) Virtual (D) All object by a distance of 20 cm, then find the
42. The splitting of white light into its constituent displacement of the image.
colours is called 2. An object is placed at a certain distance infront of
(A) Reflection (B) Refraction a plane mirror. If both object and plane mirror moves
(C) Dispersion (D) Diffraction towards each other through a distance of 15 cm,
43. The scientist who suggested that white light is a then find the distance through which the image
mixture of seven colours moves.
(A) Snell (B) Newton 3. If both object and mirror moves away from each
(C) Einstein (D) Rutherford other with a speed of 20 m/s, then find (a) the speed
44. Red, Blue and Green are called of the image (b) speed of the image with respect to
(A) Primary colours (B) Secondary colours object (c) speed of the image with respect to mirror.
(C) Tertiary colours (D) Universal colours 4. Two mirrors are inclined at a certain angle  . If a
45. White light is composed of light ray is incident on the first mirror parallel to the
(A) Three colours (B) Five colours second mirror and reflected from the second parallel
(C) Seven colours (D) Nine colours to the first mirror, then find the value of  .
www.betoppers.com
Light 53
5. A man 180 cm high stands in front of a plane mirror.
His eyes are at a height of 170 cm from the floor. IIT JEE Worksheet
Then the minimum length of plane mirror for him to
I. Single Correct Answer Type
see his full image is ___.
6. Two plane mirrors are inclined to each other at an 1. Mirrors cast images because they
angle of 70°. A ray is incident on one mirror at an (A) Absorb light (B) Reflect light
(C) Refract light (D) Transmit light
angle  . The rays reflected from this mirror fall on
2. Regardless of the positioning of an object, which of
the second mirror from where it is reflected parallel the following optical devices never produces a
to the first mirror . What is the value of  ? magnified or a diminished image?
7. Two plane mirrors are inclined at an angle of 60° (A) Plane mirror (B) Convex lens
as shown in the figure. A ray of light parallel to (C) Concave lens (D) Convex mirror
Mirror1 strikes the Mirror 2. At what angle will the 3. A mirr or can for m images but a plane glass
ray finally emerge? slab cannot. This is because a mirror
M2
(A) Reflects light while a plane glass slab absorbs
light
(B) Refracts light while a plane glass slab reflects
600 light
M1 (C) Reflects light while a plane glass slab refracts
8. Two plane mirrors are placed parallel to each other. light
The distance between the mirrors is 10 cm. An (D) Refracts light while a plane glass slab absorbs
object is placed between the mirrors at a distance light
of 4 cm from one of them, say M1. What is the 4. An image of a pencil is formed by a plane mirror at
distance between the first image at M 1 and the a distance of 40 cm from the pencil. The pencil is
second image formed at M2 ? moved 5 cm towards the mirror. What will be the
9. A plane mirror is moved away from a stationary new image distance from the mirror?
object with a speed of 20 cm/s. What is the speed (A) 10 cm (B) 15 cm (C) 30 cm (D) 35 cm
of the image? 5. A pencil of length 5 cm is kept vertical at a distance
10. The incident ray and the reflected ray are at right of 10 cm from a plane mirror. This pencil is then
angles. Then find the angle of incidence and the replaced by another pencil of length twice than that
angle of reflection. of the earlier one.What is the distance of the image
(A) 45° each (B) 90° each of this new pencil from the mirror?
(C) 30° each (D) 50° each (A) 5 cm (B) 10 cm (C) 15 cm (D) 20 cm
11. A ray of light is incident on a horizontal plane mirror 6. A candle and its image are at a distance of 30 cm
at an angle of 45°. After reflection, from M1, some from each other, as shown in the given figure.
of the light is incident on another plane mirror. If the
ray reflected by the second plane mirror travels
horizontally, find the angle between the mirrors.
(A) 50° (B) 22 ½°
(C) 67 ½° (D) 90° In this case, a i mirror is used, which is placed
12. Two plane mirrors are inclined at an angle ‘  ’. It ii from the candle.
is found that a ray incident on one mirror at any angle
given statement?
is rendered parallel to itself after reflection from
both the mirrors. Find the value of ‘  ’. (A) i ii (B) i ii
(A) 90° (B) 45° (C) 35° (D) 75° convex 10 cm plane 15 cm
13. Two plane mirrors are inclined at 70°. A ray incident (C) i ii (D) i ii
on one mirror at an angle  , after reflection, the convex 15 cm plane 10 cm
reflected ray makes an angle of 30° with the second 7. A convex mirror always produces a
mirror. Find  . (A) Real image smaller than the object
(A) 20° (B) 10° (C) 30° (D) 40° (B) Real image larger than the object
(C) Virtual image larger than the object
(D) Virtual image smaller than the object
www.betoppers.com
8. An activity is performed using a candle and an 14. Farman finds it difficult to read small-sized text from
optical instrument as shown in the given figure. one of his books. He wants to use an optical
instrument that helps him to read the book with ease.
Which of the following optical instruments should
Farman choose?
(A) Concave lens (B) Convex lens
(C) Concave mirror (D) Convex mirror
Which optical instrument has been used in the 15. Rajesh took out the lens from his father ’s old
activity? spectacles and kept it in between sun rays and a
(A) Concave lens (B) Convex lens paper. He varied the distance but he found that the
(C) Concave mirror (D) Convex mirror paper did not burn. He became upset and looked at
9. The side view mirror of a car forms an the old spectacles through this lens.
(A) Erect and real image Appearance of the spectacles through the lens is
(B) Erect and virtual image (A) Erect and large (B) Erect and small
(C) Inverted and real image (C) Inverted and large (D) Inverted and small
(D) Inverted and virtual image II. Multiple Correct Answer Type
10. Mirrors are placed at different corners of a certain
16. Which of the following forms a virtual image?
store. A small but complete view of the store is
possible through these mirrors. The given figure
(C) Concave Mirror (D) Convex lens
shows one such mirror.
17. Which of the following forms a real image?
18. Which of the following forms an image of same
size?
Which type of mirror is described here? 19. Which of the following forms a magnified image?
(A) Plane (B) Convex (A) Plane mirror (B) Convex mirror
(C) Concave (D) Parabolic (C) Concave Mirror (D) Convex lens
11. A rear-view mirror is a functional type of mirror 20. Which of the following forms a diminished image?
found on automobiles and other vehicles. It is (A) Plane mirror (B) Convex mirror
designed to allow the driver to see the area behind (C) Concave Mirror (D) Convex lens
the vehicle. The rear-view mirror of an automobile 21. Which of the following forms only virtual images?
is a (A) Plane mirror (B) Convex mirror
(A) Plane mirror (B) Convex mirror (C) Concave Mirror (D) Convex lens
(C) Concave mirror (D) Cylindrical mirror 22. Which of the following forms only real images?
12. A convex mirror tends to diverge a falling parallel (A) Plane mirror (B) Convex mirror
beam of light. This property of convex mirrors is (C) Concave Mirror (D) Convex lens
used in
(A) Solar furnaces
(B) Dentists’ mirrors
(C) Reflector in torch lights
(D) Reflector in street lamps
13. Concave mirrors cannot be used as
(A) Side-view mirror in cars
(B) Reflectors of torches
(C) Dentists’ mirror
(D) Solar furnace
www.betoppers.com
Light 55
III. Paragraph Type

360
Nature of image formed by two plane mirror inclined at an angle  is given by the formula n  .

If n is an even whole number the number of images = n –1
If n is odd whole number, the number of images = n
Using the above information answer the following.
23. Find the total number of images formed by two plane mirrors of same length and their reflecting
surfaces are parallel to each other.
(A) 5 (B) 6 (C) 10 (D) Infinity
24. Find the total number of images formed by two plane mirrors that are inclined perpendicular to each other.
(A) 1 (B) 3 (C) 5 (D) 7
25. Find the total number of images formed by two plane mirrors that are inclined at angle of 45° to each other.
(A) 1 (B) 3 (C) 5 (D) 7
IV. Integer Type
26. You are standing in front of a plane mirror, which is approaching you with a speed of 10cm/sec.
Then the speed of the image approaching you will be ______________cm/s.
27. A snake is approaching a stationary plane mirror with a speed of 5 m/s. Then it observes that its image is
approaching it with a speed of_____________ m/s.
28. Raju is standing at a distance of 15 cm from the plane mirror. The distance between him and his image is
___________cm.
V. Matrix Matching
29. Column A Column B
A) A plane mirror p) Reflector in a torch light
B) A convex mirror q) A magnifying glass
C) A concave mirror r) A looking glass in our homes
D) A convex lens s) Used in specs to view distant objects clearly
E) A concave lens t) A rear view mirror
30. Column A Column B
A) A plane mirror p) Only virtual image
B) A convex mirror q) Virtual image magnified
C) A concave mirror r) Virtual image diminished
D) A convex lens s) Real image magnified
E) A concave lens t) Real image diminished

www.betoppers.com
www.betoppers.com
Learning Outcomes Electric Current and Its Effects
Chapter - 64
 Electric Charge  Electric Circuit
 Electric Current  Symbols used in Electrical circuits
 Electric Potential & potential difference  Connecting Electric Cells in Series
 Sources of Electricity  Connecting Bulbs in Parallel
 Effects of Electricity  Conductors and insulators
1. Introduction Unit of Current

In 600 B.C. a great scientist ‘Thales’ observed that The S.I unit of current is ampere and it is denoted
when amber was rubbed with wool, it acquired a by the letter ‘A’.
strange property of attracting tiny bits of paper, cork The S.I unit of Q is coulomb and that of t is second.
or dry straw towards itself. Thus, the S.I unit of electric current is
Later in 16th century ‘Gilbert’ observed the same 1 coulomb
phenomena in some other substances. Such as  1A
1 second
ebonite & cat’s skin; glass and silk; sealing wax
and wool, etc. He named it as electricity. Definition of Ampere
The source of all electricity and electrical When a charge of coulomb flows through a
phenomena is Charge. conductor in one second, then the current flowing
through the conductor is said to be one ampere.
2. Electric Charge
Thus, when 1 coulomb of charge flows through a
In nature there are two types of charges. They are conductor in 1 second, then the current flowing
positive and negative charges. through it is said to be 1 ampere.
• Electric charges can exist independently either
as positive or negative charges.
1 coulomb
1 ampere 
1 second
• A positively charged body has more positive
charges and negatively charged body has Smaller units of Electric Current
more negative charges.
Sometimes smaller units of current are also used.
• A neutral body has equal amounts of positive These are microampere and milliampere.
and negative charges.
• Positive charge is denoted by +q and negative 1 microampere = 1 A  106 A
charge is denoted by -q.
1 milliampere = 1 mA  103 A
• Unit: S.I unit of Charge is Coulomb.
Bigger unit of electric current:
• Static electricity is study of electric charges
Sometimes the magnitude of the current flowing in
at rest.
a conductor is very large. This large magnitude of
3. Electric Current current is expressed in bigger units, such as kilo
ampere and mega ampere.
The rate of flow of charge in a circuit is called
electric current. In other words, it is the amount of 1 kilo ampere (kA) = 1000 A = 103 A
charge flowing per second. It is denoted by the 1 mega ampere (MA) = 1,000,000 A = 106 A.
letter I.
Flow of Current
If Q is the charge which is flowing through a
In metals, the moving charges are the electrons
Q constituting the current, while in electrolytes and
conductor in time t, then current is given by i 
t
ionized gases, electrons and positively charged ions 3. A polythene piece rubbed with wool is found to have
are the ions moving charges which constitute a negative charge of 3.2 ×10–7 C.
current. (a) Estimate the number of electrons transferred.
The charge on an electron is negative and is (b) Is there transfer of mass from wool to
–1.6 × 10–19 coulomb (symbol C). Therefore, IC polythene?
charge is carried by electrons. Hence if I A current
4. A comb drawn through person’s hair on a dry day
flows through a conductor, it implies that
causes 1022 electrons :o leave the person’s hair and
6.25 × 1018 electrons pass in 1 second across the
stick to the comb. Calculate the charge carried by
cross section of the conductor. the comb.
The direction of current is conventionally 5. A current of 0.5 A is drawn by a filament of an
taken opposite to the direction of motion of electric bulb : - minutes. Find the amount of electric
electrons. charge that flows through the circuit
If n electrons pass through a cross section of a 6. An electric bulb draws a current of 0.2 A when the
conductor in time t, then total charge passed voltage is 220 Calculate the amount of electric
Q = n × e and current in conductor charge flowing through it in one hour.
Instrument by which current measured: 7. Show that one ampere is equivalent to a flow of
6.25 × 1018 electron charges.
Current is measured by an instrument called
8. 1020 electrons, each having a charge of 1.6
ammeter. –19
× 10 C, pass from a point A towards another point
4. Electric Potential & Potential B in 0.1 s. What is the current in ampere?
9. If a current of 10 mA passed through your cell phone
Difference battery charger wire for 10 minute , what quantity
a) We define the electric potential difference of electric charge is transferred through the wire to
between two points in an electric circuit the battery?
carrying some current as the work done to 10. How much current does your laptop consume if
move a unit charge from one point to the other. 100 C of charge is transferred through the charger
wire in 4 second ?
Potential difference (V) between two points 11. A body has a negative charge of 1 coulomb. It
means that __________.
Work done  W  W
= V 12. A million electrons are added to a pith ball. Its charge
Ch arg e  Q  Q is __________.
b) The S.I unit of potential difference is volt(V). 13. A conductor carries a current of 2A. How long will
it take for 1800C of electricity to flow through a
1Joule given cross-section ?
 1Volt 
1Coulomb 14. How many electrons flow through a light bulb each
One volt is the potential difference between second if the current through the bulb is 1.6A ?
two points in a current carrying conductor 15. A current of 1.5A exists in a conductor whose
when 1 joule of work is done to move a charge terminals are connected across a potential
of 1 coulomb from one point to the other. The difference of 100 volt. Find a) the total charge
potential difference is measured by means of transferred in one minute.
an instrument called voltmeter. b) the work done in transferring the charge.
16. A polythene piece, rubbed with wool, is found to
Formative Worksheet have negative charge of 4  10–7C. The number of
1. A flow of 107 electrons per second in a conducting electrons transferred from wool to polythene is
wire . How much current do they constitute? ______________.
2. If the electronic charge is 1.6 × 10–19 C, then find 17. When a piece of polythene is rubbed with wool, a
the number of electrons passing through a section charge of –2 × 10–7C is developed on polythene.
of a wire per second, when the wire carries a current What mass (if any), is transferred to polythene ?
of 4 ampere.
www.betoppers.com
Electric Current & its Effects 59
18. An electric cell does 5 J of work in carrying 10 C 11. ___________ between two points in an electric
charge around a closed circuit. The electromotive circuit carrying some current as the work done to
force of the cell is _______________. move a unit charge from one point to the other.
19. A work of 100 joule is performed in carrying a (electric current, electric charge, potential
charge of –5 coulomb from infinity to a particular difference, electric power)
point in an electrostatic field. The potential of this 12. The SI unit of potential difference
point is ____________.
(ohm, volt, ampere, coulomb)
20. The work done in moving a charge of 20 C from A
13. What is the work done in moving a charge of Q
to B over a distance of 0.2 m is 2 J. The potential
coulomb against a potential difference of V volt?
difference across A and B is ______________.
(Q/V , QV, Q+V, Q–V)
21. A charge of 5 C is given a displacement of 0.5m.
The work done in the process is 10 J. The potential 14. What is the instrument used to measure potential
difference between the two points will be difference across a circuit.
_____________. (Ammeter, voltameter, galvanometer, all)
22. An electron of charge ‘e’ coulomb passes through 15. The device used for measuring current is
a potential difference of V volt. Its energy in joule (Galvanometer, Ammeter, Voltmeter,
will be _______________. Potentiometer)
Conceptive Worksheet 5. Sources of Electricity

Electrical energy available to us from electric power
1. The unit of charge is
houses, domestic generators, batteries, dry cells,
(ampere, coulomb, farad, volt)
button cells.
2. A body can be negatively charged
• Dry cell is the most handy source of electricity
(giving electrons to it, removing some electrons from which is used in torchlights, watches, clocks.
it, giving some protons to it, removing some neutrons
from it.) • We make use of button cells in wrist watches,
calculators.
3. ___________is the amount of charge flowing
through a particular area of cross section of a • A combination of two or more cells is called a
conductor in unit time battery.
(Charge, Electric current, Potential, Energy) • A car battery or batteries used in cars or trucks
4. The SI unit of electric current is are combination of ‘six’ or more cells.
These batteries once exhausted can be
(ohm, volt, ampere, coulomb)
recharged with the help of an electric changer
5. One ampere is equal to and used again and again. Hence these are
(1 C/s, 1C × 1s , 1 J × 1 C, 1 J/C) called accumulators.
6. Volt is the SI unit of
(potential difference, current, resistance, charge)
6. Effects of Electricity
7. No current flows between two charged bodies when Electricity is a form of energy, which help us with
connected, if they have same • Heating Effect
(capacity, potential, charge, none) • Light Effect
8. The surface of the earth is taken to be at • Magnetic Effect
• Chemical Effect
(infinite potential, negative potential, positive
potential, zero potential) Heating Effect
9. Which is bigger: a coulomb of charge or the charge Here electrical energy is converted into heat energy.
of an electron? • Heating effect of electric current in a wire is
(Coulomb of charge, Charge of an electron, Both used in appliances like electric iron, electric
are same, None) kettle, geyser, immersion rod, room heater etc.
10. How many electrons are equal to 1 coulomb? • Some metals like silver, copper, aluminium are
(6.25 × 1016, 6.25 × 1017, 6.25 × 1018, 6.25 × 1019) very good conductors of electricity.
www.betoppers.com
• They offer no obstruction (resistance) to the • Lighting effect of electric current is used in
flow of electricity through them. bulbs, fluorescent tubes.
• In case of an alloy of nickel and chromium • Compact fluorescent lights are a modification
(nichrome - an alloy), electric current does not of fluorescent tubes which emit more light with
flow easily and it finds obstruction (resistance). less of electric energy consumed.
This results in heating of the wire. Magnetic Effect: Magnetic effect of electricity
• Similarly filament (very thin wire) made from is of great use in our day to day life, in industries, in
a metal called ‘tungsten’ offers great the field of medicine etc.,
obstruction to the flow of the electric current • Magnetic effect of electric current was first
through it. Thus an electric work is done in discovered by ‘Oersted’.
overcoming this friction. This result in loss of
• He concluded that electric current produces a
energy. This lost energy appears in the form
magnetic field around the wire.
heat energy and light energy. On passing
current through it, it gets heated to a high • Here electrical energy is converted into
temperature so that it starts glowing. magnetic energy.
Fuses: • When current is passed through a soft iron
nail it gets magnetised. Hence this magnet is
• Fuse is a safety device used for breaking a
called as electromagnet.
circuit.
• Electric bell works based on the principle of
• It works based on the principle of heating effect
magnetic effect of electricity.
of electricity.
Electromagnet
• We make use of thin wires from soft metals
like lead and tin which melts at a low Wrap a wire around a soft iron piece (known as the
temperature. core).
• Most common type of fuses are: When an electric current is passed through the wire,
the iron piece behaves like a magnet.
• Kitkat fuse made from ceramics (porcelain).
• Miniature circuit breaker (MCB) there are
made like a switch.
• Cartridge fuse (Appliance fuse) are generally
used in electrical appliances.
Resistance: The friction offered to the passage of A magnet made using such an arrangement is called
electric current by a material is called resistance of an electromagnet.
material. It is the characteristic property of a A solenoid is a device which can be used as an
conductor. electromagnet.
Unit: Unit is ‘Ohm’ and it is represented by
‘ Ω ’(omega).
Ohm’s Law: The electric current(i) in conductor is
It is made of a long wire that has been wound many
directly proportional to the potential difference (V)
times into a tightly packed coil; it has the shape of a
between its ends at a constant temperature. It is
long cylinder.
represented by letter R with a symbol .
Strength of an Electromagnet
V i
The strength of the electromagnet depends on the
V = R i ; where ‘R’ is proportionality constant number of turns of the wire around the core and
called as electrical resistance of the conductor. the amount of current passing through it.
Lighting Effect: Electric current while passed The more the number of turns the more will be
through a filament produces heat and glows. The the magnetic effect.
glow emits light.
• Here electrical energy is converted into light
energy.
www.betoppers.com
The iron nail attracts two safety pins when wrapped

with a coil with more number of turns. Step 1: When you push the switch of the bell, an
electric current flows to the electromagnet.
What will happen if the current passing through the
coil is switched off? Step 2: The electromagnet attracts the soft iron
The iron piece will lose its magnetic effect, i.e., it strip. The hammer attached to the strip then hits
will stop behaving like a magnet and, thus, will not the gong, causing a ring.
attract the safety pin. Step 3: When the soft iron strip gets attracted to
Uses of Electromagnets the electromagnet, it no longer touches the screw
Electromagnets are used in cranes to pick up cars (interrupter) and hence the circuit is broken (much
in scrap yards and also to separate iron from garbage like a switch being turned off).
dump. This turns off the electromagnet and it can no longer
They are also used in loudspeakers, telephones, attract the soft iron strip.
electric motors which are used in electric fans, The soft iron strip returns to its initial position,
washing machines, refrigerators, etc. touching the screw (interrupter).
Electromagnets are also used in Electric Bell. This results in the circuit being complete, and current
flows again.
Steps 1 to 3 repeat in quick succession as long as
the switch is on. This is how we hear a
continuous ring of the bell.
Electric Buzzer: Nowadays, we use electric
buzzers and music bells, which work on a principle
different from that of the electric bell described
What do you do when you reach your friend’s house
here. Buzzers are of different types.
to let him/her know that you are at the door?
You ring the doorbell. Chemical Effect: This effect is used in
electroplating, electrotyping, purifying metals,
Do you know what makes the bell ring?
electrolysis etc. Here electrical energy can be used
An electric bell has an electromagnet that pulls a to produce chemical reaction in solutions.
strip of iron which makes the hammer hit the gong
to ring the bell.
Let’s study how an electric bell works . . .
Electric Bell: What do you do when you reach
your friend’s house to let him/her know that you
are at the door? You ring the doorbell.
Do you know what makes the bell ring? An electric
bell has an electromagnet that pulls a strip of iron
which makes the hammer hit the gong to ring the
bell.
www.betoppers.com
28. An electromagnet is not used in the functioning of

Formative Worksheet which of the following devices?
23. To construct an electromagnet, Morgan uses an iron (A) An electric motor (B) A generator
bar as the core and uses four electrical coils, made (C) A telescope (D) A door bell
of four different materials to construct a solenoid.
29. Adam has an electromagnet in his school’s electrical
This is represented in the given figure.
laboratory.
Which of the following materials can be used to

The iron bar will not be converted into an make the rod of an electromagnet?
electromagnet if the solenoid is made of a (A) Glass (B) Wood
(A) Copper wire (B) Aluminum wire (C) Iron (D) Plastic
(C) Silver wire (D) Plastic wire 30. John has to construct an electromagnet for his school
24. A light bulb is an incandescent source of light. project.
A light bulb emits light Which of the following figures shows the way in
(A) By magnetic induction which John should construct the electromagnet?
(B) By the burning of a fuel (A) (B)
(C) Because of high temperature
(D) Because of the passage of electricity through (C) (D)
a gas
25. Joseph wants to pick the iron nails kept on a table.
31. The hair dryer works on the principle of i effect

of current. The component of the hair dryer that
works on this principle is called ii .
given statements?
Which of the following devices should Joseph use
to pick the iron nails? (A) i ii (B) i ii
(A) A generator (B) An electric motor heating plate magnetic plate
(C) An electromagnet (D) A magnetic compass (C) i ii (D) i ii
26. Thomas brings four different devices near a current magnetic element heating element
carrying wire. 32. Tempenny constructs a simple electric generator
as shown in the figure.
Which device will show a deflection?

(A) The compass (B) The ammeter
(C) The voltmeter (D) The barometer
27. Which of the following actions will produce a
magnetic field? The part of the electric generator which is an
(A) Rubbing cotton on a glass rod electromagnet is the
(B) Passing current through a wire (A) Drill (B) Coil (C) Pencil (D) Bulb
(C) Rubbing two iron bars together
(D) Charging a conducting sphere
www.betoppers.com
33. 36. Clarke constructs a device by passing current
through a piece of long insulated wire wrapped
around an iron core. He uses this device for picking
paper clips.
When current flows through the coil, the iron rod is

attracted downward because the
What is the name of the device constructed by
(A) Current through the coil produces a
Clarke?
gravitational field
(A) Electric generator (B) Magnetic compass
(B) Current through the coil produces a magnetic
(C) Electromagnet (D) Galvanometer
field
37. An electric iron works on the principle of i effect
(C) Iron rod and the coil carry opposite charges
of electric current. The component of an iron that
(D) Iron rod and the coil carry like charges
works on this principle is its ii.
34. The figure shows an electromagnetic train signal.
When it is switched on, the signal remains in the
given statements?
upward position, whereas when it is switched off,
the signal remains in the downward position as (A) i ii (B) i ii
shown in the figure. chemical base heating element
(C) i ii (D) i ii
heating base chemical element
38. A doorbell can be constructed by using a coil, a
steel gong, and a hammer.
Which part of the electromagnetic train signal is

the electromagnet? When current is passed through the coil, the
(A) A (B) B (C) C (D) D hammer strikes the gong because it becomes
35. Steve constructs an automatic door latch as shown (A) Heavy (B) Charged
in the figure. When the switch is closed, the (C) Magnetized (D) Hot
electromagnet attracts the door latch toward itself 39. The presence of a magnetic field created by an
and the door can be opened. When the switch is electromagnet can be detected by a
opened again, the door latch comes back to its (A) Bulb (B) Compass
original position using the spring attached between (C) Coil (D) Battery
the core of the electromagnet and the door latch. 40. How many poles does an electromagnet have?
(A) One (B) Two (C) Three (D) Four
41. When current is passed through a wire wound
around an iron rod, it produces
(A) A gravitational field (B) An electric field
(C) A magnetic field (D) A nuclear field
42. Four parts of an electric iron are labelled
Steve can improve the structure of the automatic
as I, II, III, and IV (as shown in the given figure).
door latch by
(A) Using a wooden or plastic door latch
(B) Increasing the number of turns in the
electromagnet
(C) Using glass rod as the core of the
electromagnet The element of the given electric iron is labelled as
(D) Increasing the distance between the door knob (A) I (B) II (C) III (D) IV
and the electromagnet
www.betoppers.com
43. The element of a heater is
(A) Attributed to produce light Conceptive Worksheet
(B) A coil of low-melting-point wire 16. If an iron nail is introduced in a current carrying
(C) A coil of high-melting-point wire coil, then it will lead to the formation of
(D) Attributed to generate electricity (A) A magnetic compass (B) A cell
44. An electric fuse of 3 A rating is connected in a (C) A motor (D) An electromagnet
branch circuit. Suddenly, a current of amount 4 A 17. The needle of a magnetic compass gets deflected
flows through the circuit that consists of a bulb. when placed near a current carrying wire because
Which of the following events could be a possibility the current carrying wire produces
in the given circuit? (A) A gravitational field (B) A magnetic field
(A) The bulb will get fused (C) An electric field (D) A nuclear field
(B) The fuse will melt and break the circuit 18. A pin is placed near a wire loop, as shown in the
(C) The fuse will absorb 1 A current and will pass given figure. When current flows through the wire
3 A current only loop, the pin gets attracted toward the loop.
(D) The bulb will continue to work normally getting
a 4 A current
45. Electric fuses are
(A) Safety devices (B) Heating devices
(C) Switching devices (D) Controlling devices
46. Which of the following devices works on the
principle of heating effect of current? Which force attracts the pin toward the loop?
(A) Switch (B) Battery (A) Electric (B) Magnetic
(C) Electric fuse (D) Socket board indicator (C) Frictional (D) Gravitational
47. While reading about the heating effect of current, 19. In an electric bell, i energy is transformed into
Raju decides to list some home electrical devices ii energy.
that work on that principle. He lists some devices Which row completes the given statement?
(as shown in the given table). His father notices (A) (B)
i ii i ii
that one device is listed incorrectly in the table.
Electrical device: light heat electrical sound
Electric kettle, Motor, Toaster, Geyser, Hair dryer (C) i ii (D) i ii
Which device is listed incorrectly by Raju in the electrical sound mechanical light
table?
20. Stella has to construct an electric bell for her school
(A) Motor (B) Toaster
project. She has to make an electromagnet in order
(C) Hair dryer (D) Electric kettle
to complete the construction of the electric bell.
48. If a current of 3 A flows through a wire of resistance
8 ohms, calculate the potential difference applied
across its ends.
49. What would be the resistance of a conductor if the
current flow through it is 0.35 A when the potential
differenceacross is 1.4 V?
50. (a) How much current will an electric bulb draw
from a 220 V source, if the resistance of the bulb
filament is 1200  ? Which of the following materials should Stella use
(b) How much current will an electric heater coil as the core of the electromagnet?
draw from a 220 V source, if the resistance of the (A) Glass (B) Iron (C) Plastic (D) Wood
heater is 100  ? 21. An electric bell uses
51. The potential difference between the terminals of (A) A permanent magnet
an electric heater is 60 V when it draws a current (B) A non-magnetic material
of 4 A from the source. What current will the heater (C) An electromagnet
draw if the potential difference is increased to 120 (D) A liquid magnet
V?
www.betoppers.com
22. Electromagnets are used in electrical devices The part that moves when the switch is closed is
because they the
(A) Are cheap (A) Gong (B) Hammer
(B) Are strong (C) Iron bar (D) Wound coil
(C) Have a long life 27. The given figure shows a labelled picture of an
(D) Can be switched on and off electric bell. When the switch is ON, one of the
23. Which of the following characteristics is associated labelled parts of the bell becomes an electromagnet.
with an ideal fuse element?
(A) It should be cheap
(B) It should have very low resistance
(C) It should have a low melting point
(D) It should show the magnetic effect of current
24. Consider the following statements about an electric
bell:
I. An electric bell works on the principle of Which part of the given electric bell becomes an
magnetic effect of current electromagnet?
II. An electric bell consists of an electromagnet (A) I (B) II (C) III (D) IV
III. An electric bell produces sound continuously 28. The principle of magnetic effect of current is
Among the given statements, incorporated in the working of an electric
(A) Only I is correct (A) Geyser (B) Toaster
(B) Only III is correct (C) Door bell (D) Hair dryer
(C) Both I and II are correct 29. When current is allowed to flow through a coil of
(D) Both II and III are correct wire, the coil
25. The given figure shows a simple electric circuit that (A) Starts vibrating
consists of a coil of wire wounded around an iron (B) Generates electricity
rod. Some iron filings are placed near one end of (C) Behaves as a magnet
the rod. (D) Can repel a piece of iron
When the switch is closed, some iron filings get 30. Cranes used in junk yards for picking scraps have
attracted towards the rod. electromagnets attached to their lower ends.
Which of the following objects can be picked up
using a crane?
(A) Broken car (B) Wooden board
(C) Old foam sofa (D) Ceramic plate
7. Electric Circuit
An electric cell or dry cell is the source of energy
The iron filings will get attracted towards the iron for the bulb to glow and warm up. Let us now learn
rod the way in which this electric energy is made
(A) For a very long time available to the bulb in the torch.
(B) As long as the current flows through the coil Making of a Simple Electric Circuit
(C) Until the polarity of the battery is not changed Step 1:
(D) Until the sheet containing the iron filings is not
Take out the bulb from bulb from a torch. Examine
removed
the bulb carefully.
26. The internal construction of an electric bell is shown
The bulb is a small globe of thin glass enclosing a
in the given figure. The switch is in OFF position.
coiled filament supported on two thick wires. One
When it is switched ON, one part of the bell moves.
of these thick wires is connected to the metal casing
around the base of the bulb. The other wire is
connected to the metal tip at the base. The metal
casing and the metal tip at the base are the two
terminals of the bulb.
www.betoppers.com
Closed and Open Circuit
(a) (b)
Inside a torch bulb The dry cell has two terminals. The central terminal
Step 2: of the dry cell is called positive terminal. The base
Take two pieces of insulated wire. Insulated wires of the dry cell (which is made of a metal) is called
have metal wire inside with a plastic covering on negative terminal.
the outside. Remove the plastic covering from both The above figure (a) shows the terminals of dry
the ends of each piece of wire. Fix these wires on cell. The figure (b) shows the symbol for dry cell.
the bulb as shown in the figure with the help of The long line represents positive terminal of the cell
Insulating adhesive tape. Or fix the bulb on a bulb and the small and thick line represents negative
holder. The two screws on the bulb holder are the terminal of the cell.
two terminals which are connected to the two For this experiment you need a torch cell; a torch
terminals on the bulb. The two pieces of wire be bulb marked 1.5 V, cellotape, a plastic coated 1 metre
connected to the two terminals on the holder, as long copper wire and an old used blade.
shown in the picture. Cut the plastic coated copper wire into two halves
A and B. Remove plastic coating from each end of
the wire such that 1 cm of plastic is removed. Now
fix one bare end of each wire A and B to the
terminals of 1.5 V bulb with the cellotape. Fix the
other end of wire A to the base of cell with the help
Bulb connected with wires of cellotape. Now touch the bare end of wire B to
the central terminal of cell as shown in figure. What
do you observe?
The bulb lights up. This shows that electric current
is flowing in wire A and B through the bulb.
The path along which electric current flows is
called electric circuit.
Now remove the wire B from the central terminal
as shown in Fig. . What do you observe? The bulb
Step 3: does not glow. It is because electric current does
Connect the two free ends of the wires from the not flow, if the path is broken or path is incomplete.
bulb or the bulb holder to an electric cell in such a
way that one piece of wire is connected to the
positive terminals of the cell and the other to the
negative terminal of the cell. This may be done with
the help of a rubber band or an adhesive tape.
When you have finished with connections, the bulb
lights up.
With your finger trace the path of the electricity Closed Circuit or Complete Circuit
from the positive ( + ve) terminal on the cell to the
negative (–ve) terminal of the cell. It is a round
about path travelled by electricity.
www.betoppers.com
When the path which starts from one terminal of circuit or incomplete circuit.
the cell, ends at the other terminal of the cell, without For example, when we remove wire B from central
any break, then such a circuit is called complete terminal of cell, then the circuit is open circuit or
circuit or closed circuit. When the circuit is closed, incomplete circuit.
then any electric appliance in that circuit starts Switches are used in the household wiring^ to open
working. In the present case the bulb starts glowing. or close the electric circuit. When we switch on a
Open Circuit or Incomplete Circuit particular electric appliance, we close the electric
When the path of current, starting from one terminal circuit.
of the cell to another terminal of the cell is broken Conversely, when we switch off an electric
or incomplete, then such a circuit is called open appliance, we open the electric circuit.
8. Symbols used in Electrical Circuits
COMPO NENTS SYMBOLS
An electric cell
A battery or a combination of cells
Plug key or switch (open)
Plug key or switch (closed)
A wire joint
Wires crossing without joining
Electric bulb
A resistor of resistance R
Variable resistance or rheostat
Ammeter
Voltmeter
A switch, a simple device to ‘close’ or ‘open’ a circuit: An electric circuit passes through a
switch. Switch is a simple device which helps us to close or open the circuit. It helps in s a v i n g
electricity when not in use. You are always advised to switch ‘off the lights or other gadgets in your home to
save electricity.
Ammeter is used to measure the current and voltmeter is used to measure the potential difference. More
details of ammeter and voltmeter shall be learnt in higher classes.
www.betoppers.com
9. Connecting Electric Cells in Disconnect one of the three bulbs in the circuit.
The circuit becomes open and all the three bulbs
Series
stop glowing. In series connection of bulbs,’ if one
Take a dry cell and a torch bulb. Connect the bulb bulb gets fused, all the other bulbs in the series will
to the cell using copper wires as shown in Fig. . stop working. Three bulbs connected in Series
Observe the intensity- of light. The bulb does not
glow brightly. 10. Connecting Bulbs in Parallel
Connect three bulbs in parallel. That is, one end
of each of the three bulbs are connected one wire,
the other ends of the three bulbs are con n e c t e d
to another wire! These two wires are connected to
Now take one more dry-cell and connect two cells a dry cell. All the three bulbs glow dimly. Now
as shown in figure. In this method the positive of disconnect one of the bulbs. The other bulbs
the first cell is connected to the negative of the continue to glow as before.
second. The negative of the first and the positive of
the second are connected to the bulb. The bulb now
glows brighter.
In the battery torch or battery light two or three dry To study the properties of (i) Series circuit,
cells are put into a metal container in series. (ii) Parallel circuit
The positive of one cell is connected to the negative Materials required : a battery of four cells two bulbs
pole of another cell in the series connection, When of 1 watt each one fused bulb a switch few
the, switch is turned on, the circuit is closed and the lengths of connecting wires cellotape.
bulb glows and gives light.
Connecting Electric Cells in Parallel
Take three dry cells and connect them as shown in
fig.. That is all the positive poles of the three cells
are connected together, and all the three negative
poles are connected together. Method: Connect the bulbs A and B in series by
connecting them to connecting wires with the help
of cellotape as shown above. Connect the free ends
of connecting wires to a battery through a switch.
Close the switch. What do you observe? Both the
bulbs will glow. However, they will not glow very
These three positives and three negatives are brightly. Open the switch. What do you observe?
connected to the bulb- You will observe that there
is no change in the brightness of the bulb!
When cells are connected in parallel, their total
electromotive force is the same as that if any one
of them.
When cells are connected in series, their
Both the bulbs will stop glowing.
electromotive force is equal to the sum of the EMF
Now remove the bulb B and instead fix a fused
of all the cells used.
bulb C as in the above figure. What is your
Connect three torch bulbs in series as shown in
observation? Bulb A does not glow.
figure. Connect this to a dry cell and observe that
brightness of each of the three bulbs. Now connect
one more dry cell in series with he first cell. Observe
the brightness of each of the bulb. Then connect
one more dry cell in series with the first two cells.
Again observe the bulbs.
www.betoppers.com
Following are the conclusions from the above rubber. Coating of a conductor with a non-conductor
investigation. is called insulation.
1. In series circuit all the appliances work If we happen to touch a metallic end of a lead
simultaneously when switch is closed. Conversely, through which current is passing, it gives an electric
all appliances stop working when switch is open. ‘SHOCK’. The shock may be fatal too or otherwise
2. In series circuit, if any, of the appliances goes out it shakes the body and harms the person who has
of order, the other appliances stop working. suffered the electric shock. Insulation saves a
3. As the bulbs were not glowing very brightly, it can person from electric shock.
be concluded that in series the appliances do not
work to their full capacity. F ormative W orksheet
Now connect the bulbs A and B in parallel, such 52. If a current of 10 mA passed through your cell phone
that they have common positive and common battery charger wire for 10 minute , what quantity
negative terminals as illustrated by Fig. , through a of electric charge is transferred through the wire to
switch and a battery. the battery?
Close the switch. What do you observe? Both the 53. How much current does your laptop consume if
bulbs A and B glow very brightly. Now remove the 100 C of charge is transferred through the charger
wire in 4 second ?
bulb B and instead fix a fused bulb C Fig. . What is 54. How much time is required for 10 Coulombs of
your observation? charge to flow past a point if the current is 2
amperes?
55. Which of the following materials is a good
conductor of electricity?
(A) Plastic (B) Cork
(C) Soil (D) Iron
56. The handle of every electrical repairing tool is
covered by a certain material to prevent the user
from getting an electrical shock.
Which of the following materials cannot be used to
cover the handle of an electrical repairing tool?
The bulb A continues glowing brightly, whereas bulb (A) Tin (B) Glass
C does not glow. Following conclusions can be (C) Wood (D) Rubber
drawn from above investigation. 57. Mason constructs the circuit shown in the figure.
He leaves a gap in the circuit to test the conductivity
1. In parallel circuit all the appliances work of various materials.
independently
2. In parallel circuit if one appliance goes out of order,
the other continues working. It means that each
appliance in parallel circuit can be operated
independently by a switch.
3. As the bulbs glow brightly, it means each appliance
gets enough electric energy, and hence, works to
its full capacity. On inserting which of the following materials in the
gap will the bulb not light up?
11. Conductors and Insulators (A) Wood (B) Iron
The materials which allow the electric current to (C) Aluminium (D) Silver
pass through them are the conductors of electricity 58. Which of the following objects is an insulator?
(A) Iron rod (B) Plastic cup
and the materials through which electric current (C) Nickel coin (D) Steel spoon
does not pass are the non-conductors or the bad 59. Martin is constructing an electrical circuit. He
conductors of electricity. Metals are the conductors notices that all electrical metal wires are covered
of electricity. Non metals like glass, plastic, wood, with plastic.
paper, cloth and rubber are the non-conductors of Electrical metal wires are covered with plastic
electricity. because plastics are good
Non-conductors of electricity are also called (A) Electrical conductors
(B) Electrical insulators
insulators. All leads (wires) being used in an electric (C) Heat generators
circuit are metallic wires coated with plastic or (D) Heat absorbers
www.betoppers.com
60. Tommy sets up an electrical circuit as shown in the 67. The given figure shows four wires, a switch, a bulb,
figure. He connects points P and Q with different and a battery.
materials.
The bulb will light up when points P and Q are

connected by a plate made of The bulb will glow when the given components are
(A) Iron (B) Glass (C) Wood (D) Plastic connected as
61. Brad sets up an electrical circuit as shown in the
given figure. He connects points P and Q of the (A) (B)
circuit with four different rods made of four
different materials - glass, wood, copper, and
asbestos.
(C) (D)
The bulb in the circuit will not light up when points

P and Q are connected with
(A) Glass rod (B) Wood rod
(C) Copper rod (D) Asbestos rod
62. Ronald wants to make electrical wires with a wire 68. The given figure shows a simple circuit involving a
drawing machine. He considers using steel, copper, battery, a switch, and a bulb.
aluminum, and plastic as raw material.
The material that Ronald cannot use to make
electrical wires is
(A) Steel (B) Copper
(C) Plastic (D) Aluminum
63. Margaret notices that there are ceramic pulley-like
structures attached to the overhead electrical lines
near her house. Electrical wires pass over the If the terminals of the battery are reversed, then
pulleys as shown in the given figure. the bulb will
These pulleys are used as electrical (A) Glow
(A) Insulators (B) Generators (B) Not glow
(C) Conductors (D) Transformers (C) Glow for a short time
64. Which of the following materials cannot be used as (D) Glow after some time
an electrical insulator? 69. A simple electrical circuit containing two bulbs and
(A) Wood (B) Rubber (C) Plastic (D) Graphite a battery is shown in the given figure.
65. John is repairing the electrical line of his house. As
a precautionary measure, he stands on a wooden
plank.
John uses the wooden plank because wood is
(A) An electrical conductor
(B) An electrical insulator
(C) A heat conductor If bulb 1 fuses on closing the switch, then bulb 2
(D) A heat absorber
66. The given figure shows a simple circuit consisting will
of a bulb and a switch. (A) Keep glowing (B) Stop glowing
(C) Glow brightly (D) Glow dimly
70. The symbol for a fuse is
(A) (B)
On closing the switch, the bulb will (C) A (D)

(A) Glow 71. The symbol for a ammeter is
(B) Not glow (A) (B) V
(C) Glow after some time
(D) Glow only for a short time (C) A (D) ()
www.betoppers.com
72. In a parallel circuit of bulbs What is the minimum number of switches that must
(A) Same current exists in all the bulbs be closed to light at least one bulb?
(B) Same voltage exists in all the bulbs (A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4
(C) Failure of any bulb leads to a break down in 32. The handle of every electrical repairing tool is
the circuit covered by a certain material to prevent the user
(D) All of above from getting an electrical shock.
73. Column-I Column-II Which of the following materials cannot be used to
a) Cell 1) cover the handle of an electrical repairing tool?
V
b) Resistance 2) (A) Tin (B) Glass (C) Wood (D) Rubber
c) Closed switch 3) 33. The given figure shows a simple circuit that consists
d) Voltmeter 4) ( ) of a bulb, a battery, and two switches.
5) ()
74. When negative terminal of a cell is connected to
the positive terminal of the next cell are said to be
in
(A) Series (B) Parallel
75. When electric cells are connected in series the In the given circuit, when switch I is closed, the bulb
electromotive force will
(A) Increase (B) Decreases (A) Glow (B) Flicker
(C) Remain same (D) Become zero (C) Not glow (D) Flicker after some time
76. Choose the correct option 34. Which of the following materials is a good
(A) The path along which electric current flows is conductor of electricity?
called electric circuit (A) Plastic (B) Cork (C) Soil (D) Iron
(B) Coating of a conductor with a non-conductor 35. Robert constructs an electrical circuit as shown in
is called insulator the given figure. Four different points are labeled
(C) The materials which allow the electric current as P, Q,R, and S on the wooden rod.
to pass through them are called conductors
(D) The materials which allow the electric current
to pass through them are called non-
conductors
77. If a voltage V is applied across the bulbs in series
,then
(A) The voltage applied is divided among the bulbs In the given circuit, the bulb will glow when the
(B) The same current exists in all the bulbs positive terminal of the battery is connected to the
(C) The same voltage exists in all the bulbs point
(D) The current is divided among the bulbs (A) P (B) Q (C) R (D) S
78. Greater potential difference (or emf ) is obtained in 36. In which of the following circuits can the electrical
the circuit when cells are connected in bulb be operated using the switch in the circuit?
(A) Series (B) Parallel (A) (B)
Conceptive Worksheet
31. The given figure shows a simple circuit containing
four bulbs and five switches along with a battery.
(C) (D)
www.betoppers.com
37. The circuit shown in the given figure consists of a 40. The given figure shows two bulbs, a switch, a battery,
fan, a switch, and a battery. Andrew wants to and a fan. Using all the components, David makes
connect a bulb in parallel to the fan. a simple electrical circuit putting a bulb on either
sides of the fan.
Which of the following circuit diagrams represents

the one made by David?
Andrew should connect the bulb in the electrical (A) (B)
circuit as shown in figure
(A) (B)
(C) (D)
(C) (D)
41. The given figure shows two bulbs, a switch, and a
battery. Martha makes a simple circuit using all the
given components. The circuit is such that a bulb is
placed on either sides of the switch.
38. Alex constructs the electrical circuit shown in the

given figure in his school laboratory. His teacher
asks him to add a switch to the circuit such that Which of the following circuit diagrams represents
only bulbs N and P are operated by it. the one made by Martha?
(A) (B)
(C) (D)
Alex should add this switch at point
(A) I (B) II (C) III (D) IV
39. The given figure shows a simple electrical circuit
that consists of two bulbs, and a battery. One switch
has to be added to the circuit in order to operate 42. An electric circuit made by a student is incomplete
only bulb M.
because one of the wires is too short to connect
with the other wire as shown in the given figure. In
order to glow the bulb, he has to connect the open
ends by inserting an object between them.
Which of the following objects should the student

This switch must be placed at point insert between the open ends?
(A) I (B) II (C) III (D) IV (A) Nail (B) Bottle
(C) Glass sheet (D) Rubber band
www.betoppers.com
43. Which of the following objects can conduct 49. What is the total emf , when three cells of emf’s
electricity? are 2V,2.5V, 4V are connected in series
(A) (B) (A) 4V (B) 2.5V (C) 2V (D) 8.5V
50. What is the total emf, when three cells of emfs are
2V, 2V, 2V are connected in parallel
(A) 4V (B) 1V (C) 2V (D) 5V
51. The total emf of three cells of emf’s 1v,1v,1v are
(C) (D) connected in series is ____v
52. Which of the following is used as source of electrical
44. The given figure represents four circuit energy
arrangements, I., II, III, and IV. Each circuit (A) Electric cell (B) Dry cell
consists of an electric cell and a torch bulb. (C) Ammeter (D) Voltameter
Summative Worksheet
1. Electric current flows from ___ terminal to ___
terminal outside the cell through the circuit.
2. represents.
3. In which case, bulb glows in the circuit.

(A)
The bulb may glow in the circuit arrangements

labelled as
(A) I and II (B) II and III (B)
(C) III and IV (D) IV and I
45. An electric cell has i terminal(s). The metal
cap of an electric cell represents its ii terminal.
given statement? (C)
(A) i ii (B) i ii
two negative two positive
(C) i ii (D) i ii (D)
one negative one positive
46. The path along which electric current flow is called
(A) Electric circuit (B) Electric shock
(C) Both (A) and (B) (D) Neither (A) nor (B) (A) A (B) B (C) C (D) D
47. Which of the following are the non-conductors of 3. Is pure water a conductor of electricity ?
electricity 4. Electric current flows in ___ direction only.
(A) Wood (B) Paper (C) Cloth (D) Rubber 5. A cell has two terminals, one terminal is on the metal
48. Statement I : Switch is used to close are open base, second terminal is on ___.
electric circuit 6. Bulb in this circuit doesn’t glow; why?
Statement II : When switch is closed , then circuit
is closed and when it is opened, then circuit is open
circuit
the correct explanation of Statement- I
(B) Both Statements are true, Statement - II is 7. A device that is used to break an electric circuit is
not correct explanation of Statement - I called ?
(C) Statement - I is true, Statement - II is false 8. An electric cell has ___ terminals.
(D) Statement - I is false, Statement - II is true 9. Unit of electric current is ___.
www.betoppers.com
10. Match the following 18. Will the compass needle show deflection when the
(i) Battery (a) Rechargeable switch in the circuit shown by figure is closed?
Batteries
(ii) Accumulator (b) A combination of two or
more cells
(iii) Closed Circuit (c) An unbroken path of
electricity
(d) The path along which
electricity travels 19. Fill in the blanks:
(A) i - b, ii - c, iii - d (B) i - a, ii - b, iii - c (a) Longer line in the symbol for cell represents
(C) i - b, ii - a, iii - c (D) i - c, ii - d, iii - a its_________terminal.
11. (i) Button Cells (a) Torch light, Clocks (b) The combination of two or more cells is called
(ii) Dry Cells (b) Wrist watches, a _________.
Calculators (c) When current is switched ‘on’ in a room
(iii) Accumulators (c) In Cars, Trucks heater, it __________.
(d) Space Satellites (d) The safety device based on the heating effect
(A) i - b, ii - a, iii - c (B) i - b, ii - a, iii - d of electric current is called a _________.
(C) i - c, ii - d, iii - b (D) i - a, ii - b, iii - a 20. Mark ‘T’ if the statement is true and ‘F’ if it is
12. Draw in your notebook the symbols to represent false:
the following components of electrical circuits: (a) To make a battery of two cells, the negative
connecting wires, switch in the ‘OFF’ position, bulb, terminal of one cell is connected to the negative
cell, switch in the ‘ON’ position, and battery. terminal of the other cell. (T/F)
13. Draw the circuit diagram to represent the circuit (b) When the electric current through the fuse
shown in figure. exceeds a certain limit, the fuse wire melts
and breaks. (T/F)
(c) An electromagnet does not attract a piece of
iron. (T/F)
(d) An electric bell has an electromagnet. (T/F)
21. Do you think an electromagnet can be used for
separating plastic bags from a garbage heap? Ex-
plain.
14. Figure shows four cells fixed on a board. Draw 22. An electrician is carrying out some repairs in your
lines to indicate how you will connect their terminals house. He wants to replace a fuse by a piece of
with wires to make a battery of four cells. wire. Would you agree? Give reasons for your re-
sponse.
23. Zubeda made an electric circuit using a cell holder
shown in Fig. 14.4, a switch and a bulb. When she
put the switch in the ‘ON’ position, the bulb did not
15. The bulb in the circuit shown in Figure does not glow. Help Zubeda in identifying the possible de-
glow. Can you identify the problem? Make fects in the circuit.
necessary changes in the circuit to make the bulb
glow.
16. Name any two effects of electric current.

17. When the current is switched on through a wire, a
compass needle kept nearby gets deflected from
its north-south position. Explain.
www.betoppers.com
24. In the circuit shown in figure
(i) Would any of the bulbs glow when the switch

is in the ‘OFF’ position?
(ii) What will be the order in which the bulbs A, B
and C will glow when the switch is moved to
the ‘ON’ position? Which bell will produce a sound when the switch is
closed?
HOTS Worksheet (A) Bell 1 (B) Bell 2
1. It is impossible to construct a torch in the absence (C) Bell 3 (D) Bell 4
of 5. Suraj has constructed a simple electric circuit. It
(A) Plastic casing (B) Electric cells consists of a bulb, a switch, and a cell, as shown in
(C) Reflector (D) Switch the given figure. However, the lengths of the wires
2. are not sufficient. Hence, this circuit has two free
ends. He has four objects namely a wooden gilli, a
match stick, a pen cap, and a nail.
To glow the bulb, Suraj should connect the free ends

with the
Among the labelled parts, current does not flow
(A) Nail (B) Matchstick
through the
(C) Pen cap (D) Wooden gilli
(A) Battery (B) Switch
6. Raju has constructed four different circuits with four
(C) Filament (D) Reflector bulbs, four cells, and four different objects, as shown
3. The given figure shows a circuit with a cell in the given figure.
connected to a bulb and a switch.
When the switch is closed, the bulb lights up because

the
(A) Switch produces electricity
Which bulb will glow in the given circuits?
(B) Switch produces electricity
(A) Bulb 1 (B) Bulb 2
(C) Connecting wires produce electricity
(C) Bulb 3 (D) Bulb 4
(D) Circuit completes on closing the switch
4. Atul has constructed four electric circuits, each
consisting of a bell, a bulb, switch and a cell. The
bells of the circuits are labelled as 1, 2, 3, and 4, as
shown in the given figure.
www.betoppers.com
7. Raju bought five similar bulbs and connected them 10. Various parts on the outer surface of an electric
with two cells to construct an electric circuit. The cell are labelled as I, II, III, and IV respectively in
given figure shows the circuit constructed by Raju. figure (a). In figure (b), an incomplete circuit is
shown. M and N are the free ends of this circuit.
In the given circuit, the bulbs that would not glow

are To make the bulb glow, free ends M and N of the
(A) Bulb 1 and Bulb 2 (B) Bulb 2 and Bulb 3 circuit should be respectively connected to
(C) Bulb 3 and Bulb 4 (D) Bulb 4 and Bulb 5 (A) I and II (B) II and III
8. The given figure shows two circuits, each consisting (C) III and IV (D) IV and I
of a bulb and a cell. M and N are the terminals of 11. Which of the following parts of a torch is not paired
cell I and S and T are the terminals of cell II. The with its function?
direction of current in the respective circuits is (A) Part of a torch Funct ion
indicated by arrowheads.
Bulb Emits light
(B) Part of a torch Funct ion

Switch Breaks the circuit
Terminals M and T of the cells are (C) Part of a torch Function

(A) Both positive (B) Both negative Reflector Completes the circuit
(C) Positive and negative respectively
(D) Negative and positive respectively (D) Part of a torch Function
9. A circuit is constructed using two torch bulbs and a
cell, as shown in the given figure at the left. The Cell Provides energy
figure at the right shows four arrows whose tips 12. Raj performs an experiment to know the conducting
show their respective directions. These arrows have nature of some of the objects using a circuit, as
to be placed on each wire segments RS, RV, ST, shown in the given figure. He inserts some objects
and TV respectively, according to the directions of one by one between M and N and observes whether
current. the bulb glows or not.
The objects that he inserted are eraser, key, plastic
scale, glass bangle, bottle cap, nail, thermocol sheet,
and wallet.
The given arrows that can be placed on wire

segments RV, VT, ST, and RS are respectively
(A) , , , and  (B) , , , and  Raj will be able to glow the bulb if he inserts
(C) , , , and  (D) , , , and  (A) Key and nail respectively
(B) Key, nail, and wallet respectively
(C) Bottle cap and thermocol sheet respectively
(D) Eraser, scale, bangle, and bottle cap respectively
www.betoppers.com
13. The schematic diagram of an open circuit is shown 2. Most handy source of electricity which is used in
in the given figure. torch lights are.
(A) Dry Cells (B) Button Cells
(C) Batteries (D) None
3. In wrist watches ___ are used.
(A) Dry Cell (B) Button Cell
(C) Battery (D) None
Which of the following objects is inserted tightly in 4. Metals are ___ of electricity.
the gap to make the bulb glow? (A) Conductors (B) Non Conductors
(A) Key (B) Cork (C) Both (D) None
(C) Plastic bottle cap (D) Thermocol sheet
14. The picture of a household torch is shown is the 5. represents.
given figure. (A) Electric Switch (B) Battery
(C) Cell (D) Fuse
6. Electricity name was given by ___.
(A) Thales (B) Gilbert
(C) Newton (D) Coulomb
The electricity required to operate a simple torch is
7. Combination of two or more cells is called ___.
provided by the
(A) Battery (B) Accumulators
(A) Bulb (B) Electric cell
(C) Button Cells (D) None
(C) Switch (D) Curved mirror
8. ___ is a non-metal but is a Conductors of electricity
15. Different arrangements of an electric bulb with an
(A) Graphite (B) Glass
electric cell are shown in the given figure. The
(C) Mercury (D) Water
arrangements are labelled as M, N, S, and T
9. Electric current flows from ___ terminal to ___
respectively.
terminal outside the cell through a circuit.
(A) Positive, Negative (B) Negative, Positive
(C) Both (D) Cannot say
10. An electric cell converts ___ energy into electrical
energy.
(A) Chemical (B) Mechanical
(C) Wind (D) Light
11. Which of the following energy conversions take
place in a torch.
(A) Electrical Chemical Light
(B) Chemical Electrical Light
(C) Electrical Light Chemical
(D) Light Chemical Electrical
The bulb will glow in 12. Which of the following is an insulator?
(A) Arrangement N only (A) Pure Water (B) Impure Water
(B) Arrangement T only (C) Human Body (D) Earth
(C) Both arrangements M and N 13. Car battery and mobile phone battery are
(D) Both arrangements S and T rechargeable. Hence these are called ___.
(A) Dry Cells (B) Accumulators
IIT JEE Worksheet (C) Button Cells (D) None
14. There are two types of charges, they are ___ and
I. Single Correct Answer Type ___.s
1. The metallic wires used for connections in an (A) Positive & Neutral (B) Negative & Neutral
electric circuit is called. (C) Positive & Negative (D) None
(A) Leads (B) Cells 15. S.I unit of Charge is
(C) Batteries (D) Insulators (A) Ampere (B) Volt
(C) Newton (D) Coulomb
www.betoppers.com
16. The shorter, thicker vertical line in the symbol of Using the above answer the following
Cell represents. questions.
(A) The positive terminal 23. If there is a current of 10 amperes in a circuit for
(B) The negative terminal 10 minutes, what quantity of electric charge flows
(C) The direction of current in through the circuit?
(D) All of these 24. How much current must there be in a circuit if 100
17. Over head electric cables passing through poles are coulombs flow past a point in the circuit in 4 seconds?
NOT insulated because. 25. How much time is required for 10 coulombs of
(A) Insulation will cause energy loss charge to flow past a point if the rate of flow
(B) Air is a bad conductor (current) is 2 amperes?
(C) The wires will get heated
(D) It is costly IV. Integer Type
18. Photovoltaic cells produce electricity by using. 26. The current passing through a conductor is 5 ampere
(A) Wind Energy .Then the charge that passes through that conductor
(B) Solar Energy in 5 minute is _______Coulomb
(C) Geothermal Energy 27. If 60 coulomb of charge passes through a cross
(D) Mechanical Energy of Water section of a conductor in 4 sec, the average current
19. What happens to a circuit when the switch is off. is_________A
(A) The circuit is complete 28. A light ray is incident on a plane mirror making an
(B) There is a gap in the circuit angle of 450 with respect to the surface of the mirror.
(C) Electricity flows continuously the value of the angle between incident ray and
(D) Electricity flows discontinuously reflected ray is ________°
II. Multiple Correct Answer Type V. Matrix Matching
29. (A) Conductor (p) Wood
20. The symbol for switch
(B) Insulator (q) Graphite
(A) (B)
(C) Outside the cell (r) Electric current flows
(C) () (D) A through circuit from positive to negative
21. Which of the following are conductors? (s) Electric current flows
(A) Silver (B) Copper from negative to positive
(C) Aluminium (D) Glass 30. (A) Solar panels (p) Wind energy into
22. Which of the following are insulators? electrical energy
(A) Glass (B) Plastic
(B) Cells (q) Heat energy into
(C) Wood (D) Silver
electrical energy
III. Paragraph Type (C) Windmills (r) Chemical energy into
The rate of flow of charge in a circuit is called electrical energy
electric current. In other words, it is the amount of (D) Dams (s) Solar energy into
charge flowing per second. It is denoted by the letter electrical energy
I. (t) Potential energy of
If Q is the charge which is flowing through a water into electrical
Q energy
conductor in time t, then current is given by i 
t
Unit of current:
The S.I unit of current is ampere and it is denoted
by the letter ‘A’.
The S.I unit of Q is coulomb and that of t is second.
Thus, the S.I unit of electric current is
1 coulomb
 1A
1 second
www.betoppers.com
31. (A) A path along which electric current flows (p) Switch
(B) A device which converts chemical energy into (q) Electric circuit electric energy
(C) A device which makes or breaks the circuit (r) Cell
(s) Electric current
32. (A) Cell (p)
(B) Bulb (q)
(C) Switch (r)
(s)
33. Match the following.
Column 1 Column 2
A. P. Wire joint
B. Q. Plug key
C. R. A battery
D. S. Electric Cell
34. Match the following.

Column 1 Column 2
A. P. Resistor
B. Q. Rheostat
C. R. Wire Cross without joining
D. S. Ammeter

www.betoppers.com
www.betoppers.com
Learning Outcomes
Wind, Storm and Cyclones
Chapter - 35
 Air Pressure  Destruction Caused by Cyclones

 Winds  Meteorological Department
 Thunderstorms and Cyclones  Effective Safety measures
 Tornado
1. Introduction opposes the motion of a moving object. This is called

air resistance. That is why you have to exert
Let’s start the chapter with a tragic article. yourself and pedal hard when you ride a bicycle.
“Orissa was hit by a cyclone with wind speed of Another example in which air pressure can be
200 km/h on 18 October 1999. The cyclone observed: Take a glass and fill only 1/3 of it with
smashed 45,000 houses making 7,00,000 water. Cover the mouth of the glass with an index
people homeless. On 29 October the same year, card. Now hold the card in place and invert the
a second cyclone with wind speed of 260 km/h glass over a sink and remove your hand from the
hit Orissa again. It was accompanied by water card. The card sticks to the glass. This is due to
waves about 9 m high. Thousands of people lost air pressure. The air outside exerts an upward
their lives. Property worthcrores of rupees was pressure on the index card. This air pressure is
destroyed. The cyclone affected agriculture, more than the weight of the water in the glass.
transport,communication, and electricity
supply.” 3. Winds
In this article, apart from the tragedy, there is
something on which we have to ponder upon... Winds are caused by variations in air pressure. A
1. What are cyclones? wind blows from a region of high pressure to a
2. How are they formed? region of low pressure. The speed of the wind
3. Why are they so destructive? mainly depends on the difference between the
In this chapter we shall seek answers to some of pressures of the air in the two regions.
these questions. Let’s begin by understanding some
basic concepts.
2. Air Pressure
The pressure exerted by air on all bodies at all times
in all directions is called air pressure.
High speed winds are known to blow away

thatched and tiled roofs in rural and semi-urban
areas. Strong winds can uproot trees and electric
poles, and even snap cables.
Anemometer
The instrument used to measure the speed of wind
When air moves at high speeds, it creates a low is called the anemometer. It is usually fixed on the
pressure area. The air inside a balloon exerts top of a building.
pressure in all directions, and makes it blow up. Air
I. Effect of Heat on Air What did you expect? What happens?

Air expands on heating, and the expanded air
pushes for more space. Let’s observe few examples
to understand the same.
Example-1
1. Take two deep pans - one filled with hot water and
the other with cold water. To prove that air expands
when heated,
 Stretch a balloon across the mouth of a milk bottle
Activity-3
and seal it with tape.
1. Hold a strip of paper, 20 cm long and 3 cm wide,
 Keep this bottle in the hot water pan between your thumb and forefinger.
 The balloon is slowly inflated. This is because the 2. Now blow over the paper.
heat from the hot water in the pan heats up the air What do you think will happen to the paper?
inside the bottle, which makes the air inside the Will the paper rises up or moves down.
bottle expand.
Now place the bottle in the pan with cold water.
The balloon deflates and shrinks. This is because
the air inside the bottle gets cooled and so contracts.
Example-2
Observe a pressure cooker where the steam comes
out of the nozzle and escapes upwards. This is
because steam escaping from a pressure cooker is
lighter than the relative cool air surrounding it. Thus, Understanding the activities
hot air rises. 1. In Activity-1, when we blow into the mouth of the
bottle, the air near the mouth has higher speed. This
II. Speed of Wind Vs Air Pressure decreases the pressure there. The air pressure
inside the bottle is higher than near the mouth. The
Let’s understand with the help of following activities.
air inside the bottle pushes the ball out.
Activity-1:
2. In Activity-2, we observe that when we blew
1. Crumple a small piece of paper into a ball of size
between the balloons, they moved towards each
smaller than the mouth of an empty bottle.
other. How could this happen? This could happen
2. Hold the empty bottle on its side and place the paper
if the pressure of air between the balloons were
ball just inside its mouth.
somehow reduced. The pressure outside the
3. Now try to blow on the ball to force it into the bottle.
balloons would then push them towards each other.
4. Try if you can force the paper ball in by blowing
3. In Activity-3, we observe that when we blew over
into the bottle.
the paper strip, it goes upwards. Again, this could
You will be surprised to find that it is difficult to
happen if blowing over the paper reduced the air
force the paper ball.
pressure above the strip.
Why is it difficult to force the paper ball into the
We see that the increased wind speed is, indeed,
bottle?
accompanied by a reduced air pressure.
Activity-2:
1. Take two balloons of approximately equal size. III. Circulation of Wind
2. Put a little water into the balloons.
3. Blow up both the balloons and tie each one to a The equatorial and tropical regions get hotter than
string. the polar regions. The warm air at the equator rises,
4. Hang the balloons 8–10 cm apart on a cycle spoke and the cold air moves in from the polar regions.
or a stick. The air moves due to uneven heating of the earth’s
5. Blow in the space between the balloons. surface between the equator and poles, which
results in circulation of wind across the globe.
www.betoppers.com
Wind Storm and Cyclones 83
IV. Direction of Wind Reason (R): This is because the heat from the hot
water in the pan heats up the air inside the bottle,
Winds are also formed due to uneven heating of
which makes the air inside the bottle expand.
land and water in coastal areas. As the earth rotates
on its axis from West to East, these wind currents (A) Both A and R are TRUE, R is the correct
are not exact. There is a difference in the explanation of A.
temperatures of the air over sea and over land. (B) Both A and R are TRUE, R is NOT the correct
Cold winds from the South Pole move north towards explanation of A.
the equator, and whereas hot winds from the North (C) A is TRUE and Statement-R is FALSE
Pole move south towards the equator.
(D) A is FALSE and R is TRUE.
IV. Monsoon Winds 5. The density of hot air in relation with cold air.
(A) Heavier (B) Lighter
The word monsoon is derived from the Arabic word
(C) Same (D) None
“mausam,” which means season. The winds from
the ocean carry water in the form of vapours, 6. Statement-I: In a pressure cooker where the steam
resulting rains over land. These are called monsoon comes out of the nozzle and escapes upwards.
winds. Statement-II: This is because steam escaping from
a pressure cooker is lighter than the relative cool
F ormative W orksheet air surrounding it. Thus, hot air rises.
1. Statement-I: Air opposes the motion of a moving (A) Statement I is correct, Statement II is incorrect.
object. (B) Statement II is correct, Statement I is incorrect.
Statement-II: This is called air resistance. (C) Both statements are correct.
(A) Statement I is correct, Statement II is incorrect. (D) Both statements are incorrect.
(B) Statement II is correct, Statement I is incorrect. 7. Circulation of wind is due to
(C) Both statements are correct. (A) The warm air at the equator rises
(D) Both statements are incorrect. (B) Cold air moves in from the polar regions
2. Assertion (A): We have to exert yourself and pedal (C) Uneven heating of the earth’s surface between
hard when you ride a bicycle. the equator and poles
Reason (R): This is to overcome air resistance. (D) All the above
8. Winds are ____ at South pole.
(A) Both A and R are TRUE, R is the correct
(A) Cold (B) Hot (C) Very hot (D) None
explanation of A. 9. The word monsoon is derived from the Arabic word
(B) Both A and R are TRUE, R is NOT the correct (A) Meesam (B) Mensoon
explanation of A. (C) Mausam (D) None
(C) A is TRUE and Statement-R is FALSE 10. Take some water in a tin can with a lid. Heat the
(D) A is FALSE and R is TRUE. can till the water boils. Immediately put the lid tightly
3. Statement-I: Winds are caused due to same air on the can. Put the can carefully in a shallow metallic
vessel or a washbasin. Pour fresh water over the
pressure.
can.What happens to the shape of the can?
Statement-II: Wind blows from a region of high
(A) Expands (B) Compressed
pressure to a region of low pressure. (C) No changes (D) None
(A) Statement I is correct, Statement II is incorrect. 11. Statement-I: When you fly a kite, the wind coming
(B) Statement II is correct, Statement I is incorrect. from your back help.
(C) Both statements are correct. Statement-II: If you are in a boat, it is it easier to
(D) Both statements are incorrect. row it if there is wind coming opposite to us.
4. Assertion (A): Stretch a balloon across the mouth (A) Statement I is correct, Statement II is incorrect.
of a milk bottle and seal it with tape. Keep this (B) Statement II is correct, Statement I is incorrect.
bottle in the hot water pan. The balloon is slowly (C) Both statements are correct.
inflated. (D) Both statements are incorrect.
www.betopperps.com
10. Assertion (A): It is it difficult to force the paper

Conceptive Worksheet ball into the bottle.
Reason (R): The air pressure inside the bottle is
1. When air moves at high speeds, it creates a
higher than near the mouth. The air inside the bottle
____ pressure area. pushes the ball out.
(A) High (B) Low (A) Both A and R are TRUE, R is the correct
(C) Same (D) None explanation of A.
2. The air inside a balloon exerts pressure in ____ (B) Both A and R are TRUE, R is NOT the correct
direction. explanation of A.
(A) Upward (B) Downward (C) A is TRUE and Statement-R is FALSE
(C) Sideward (D) All (D) A is FALSE and R is TRUE.
3. The instrument used to measure the speed of wind
is 4. Thunderstorms and Cyclones
(A) Thermometer (B) Barometer
(C) Anemometer (D) Manometer I. Thunderstorms
4. What happens to air upon heating? A storm with lightning and thunder is called a
(A) Expands (B) Contracts thunderstorm. It occurs due to the convection of
(C) No change (D) Expands, then contracts air in hot and humid areas.
5. What happens to air upon cooling?
(A) Expands (B) Contracts
(C) No change (D) Expands, then contracts
6. Assertion (A): Stretch a balloon across the mouth
of a milk bottle and seal it with tape. Now place
the bottle in the pan with cold water. The balloon
deflates and shrinks.
Reason (R): This is because the air inside the bottle
gets cooled and so contracts. II. Cyclone
(A) Both A and R are TRUE, R is the correct A natural calamity caused by difference in air
explanation of A. pressure in the atmosphere is called a cyclone. A
(B) Both A and R are TRUE, R is NOT the correct cyclone is a violently rotating windstorm. Cyclones
explanation of A. are dangerous. Cyclones begin as thunderstorms.
(C) A is TRUE and Statement-R is FALSE
(D) A is FALSE and R is TRUE.
7. Which regions are relatively hotter?
(A) Equatorial (B) Tropical
(C) Polar (D) None
8. ______are formed due to uneven heating of land
and water in coastal areas.
(A) Earthquakes (B) Cyclones In tropical regions like India, thunderstorms are
(C) Winds (D) Tsunamis common, but very few thunderstorms convert into
9. Earth rotates on its axis from _____ to _____. cyclones. In India, the eastern coast is more
vulnerable to cyclones than the western coast.
(A) North, South (B) South, North
(C) East, West (D) West, East In different parts of the world, cyclones are known
differently. For example, in America, a cyclone is
referred to as a hurricane, while the Filipinos and
Japanese called it a typhoon.
www.betoppers.com
The largest tropical cyclone recorded was Typhoon

Tip that struck Japan in 1979. At its peak strength,
the diameter of its eye wall was 2220 kilometres.
The wind speeds were recorded at 305 kilometres
per hour.
III. Formation of Cyclones
The formation of a cyclone depends on the speed
and direction of the wind, temperature and humidity.
A cyclone also arises:
1. Due to the difference in the temperatures of the
two regions.
2. A low pressure is created as the air in the high
temperature region becomes warm and rises.
3. The gap in the low pressure area is filled by cold
air rushing in from the surrounding areas.
4. When the warm air arises, it cools, condenses and
forms clouds.
5. When the water vapour in the clouds turns into
raindrops, the heat possessed by the water vapour
is released into the atmosphere.
6. The process repeats and the release of heat from
the water vapour continues.
Precautions
During a thunderstorm, move away from open
garages, metal sheds and water bodies. During a
thunderstorm, sit inside a car, a bus or a closed
vehicle, or inside a building. 5. Tornado
During a thunderstorm, do not:
A rotating column of high speed winds that appears
 Rest under a tree
as a dark funnel-shaped cloud reaching from the
 Take shelter under an umbrella with a metallic end
ground to the sky is called a tornado. A tornado
 Lie down flat, if in an open place
may form within a cyclone. A tornado forms due to
 Sit near a window
the effect of low pressure in the eye of a cyclone.
IV. Humidity Objects near the base of a tornado, such as cars,
Humidity is the amount of water vapour in the dust, debris and even houses, are sucked into its
atmosphere. As the humidity in a region increases, funnel and thrown out at the top.
the difference in temperature also increases. This
results in the formation of a cyclone. More than a thousand tornadoes occur every year
V. Gales across the world. Most occur in the United States.
Winds moving at high speeds are known as gales. Tornadoes occur regularly in the regions around
VI. Eye of a Cyclone the Atlantic Ocean. Weak tornadoes travel with
wind speeds of 50 to 60 km/hr, while a violent
The calm and clear area at the centre of a cyclone
tornado can travel at a speed of about 400 km/hr.
is called the eye of the cyclone.
A tornado is a natural disaster, but not as dangerous
The following flow chart will help you to understand
as a cyclone.
the phenomena that lead to the formation of clouds
and falling of rain and creation of storms and
cyclones:
www.betopperps.com
6. Destruction Caused by Cyclones A cyclone causes destruction through:

1. High-rise waves
2. High-speed winds that uproot trees, houses and
other property
3. Contamination of drinking water
4. Heavy rainfall that worsens the flood situation
5. Flooding of agricultural land by sea water making
it infertile.
7. Meteorological Department
The department that carries out a scientific study
of the atmosphere and focuses on weather
forecasting and processes. Tropical cyclones are
Cyclones cause a lot of damage to land, people
given names. The names are selected from a list
and property, and create a lot of havoc in the lives
decided by the national meteorological organisation
of the people. When a cyclone hits an agricultural
of a country, or by a committee of the World
field, it makes the land infertile and useless for
Meteorological Organisation. The names of tropical
agriculture. A cyclone spares nothing. It worsens
cyclones that cause major death or destruction are
the flood situation. There are indirect impacts of a
not used again, as a tribute to the people who lose
cyclone as well, such as flooding in coastal areas.
their lives in the disaster.
Flooding not only damages land, but also pollutes
drinking water sources. This can cause epidemics. Some noteworthy points
High waves several kilometres away from the shore 1. Cyclone Alert: A warning issued 48 hours before
indicate an upcoming storm. As a cyclone strikes the expected time of a cyclone.
the coast, the intense winds raise the water into a 2. Cyclone Warning: A warning issued 24 hours
gigantic wave that is pushed towards the shore. before the expected time of a cyclone.
High-speed winds during a cyclone can cause major
damage to houses, human beings, animals, trees, 8. Effective Safety Measures
power supply, and even communication systems To keep people safe and secure during a cyclone,
such as telephones. the government takes certain measures, such as:
Storm Surge 1. Constructing cyclone warning centres
2. Making arrangements to relocate people during
A high wall of water moving towards the shore cyclones
from the ocean is called a storm surge. 3. Providing information about a cyclone, and warning
people, fishermen, ships, ports, airlines and various
government agencies
4. Delivering accurate and effective cyclone forecasts
and warnings
Safety measures to follow before and during a
cyclone:
1. Do not move out unless and until required.
2. Keep a note of all the warnings given by the
Meteorological Department.
Storm Tide
3. Keep emergency phone numbers of police,
The combination of a storm surge and a tide is ambulance and fire brigade handy.
known as a “storm tide”. The most dangerous
4. Move people and valuable items to a safe place.
storms are the ones where the storm surge arrives
on the top of a high tide, and then the storm reaches 5. Store hygienic drinking water.
an area that might otherwise have been safe. 6. Help neighbours.
7. Avoid contact with wet electric lines and switches.
www.betoppers.com
19. Which of the following is formed due to the effect

Formative Worksheet of low pressure in the eye of a cyclone?
12. A natural calamity caused by difference in air (A) Typhoon (B) Hurricane
pressure in the atmosphere is called (C) Tornado (D) Gales
(A) Thunderstorm (B) Wind 20. What is speed of a violent tornado?
(C) Cyclone (D) Earthquake (A) 200 km/hr (B) 400 km/hr
13. Statement-I: All thunderstorms are cyclones. (C) 600 km/hr (D) 800 km/hr
Statement-II: All cyclones are thunderstorms. 21. Which of the following are damaged due to the
(A) Statement I is correct, Statement II is incorrect. effect of a cyclone?
(A) Land (B) People
(B) Statement II is correct, Statement I is incorrect.
(C) Property (D) All
(C) Both statements are correct.
22. The department that carries out a scientific study
(D) Both statements are incorrect. of the atmosphere and focuses on weather
14. Cyclone in America is known as forecasting and processes.
(A) Typhoon (B) Hurricane (A) Agriculture Department of India
(C) Both (D) None (B) Meteorological Department
15. The formation of a cyclone depends on
(C) Broad Casting and Communication
(A) The speed of wind (D) All the above
(B) The direction of wind 23. Which of the following measures keep people safe
(C) Temperature (D) All and secure during a cyclone?
16. Which of the following precautions should be taken (A) Cyclone warning centers
during a thunderstorm? (B) Arrangements to relocate people during
(A) Sit inside a car cyclones
(B) Move away from open garages (C) Not providing information about a cyclone
(C) Move away from water bodies (D) Delivering accurate and effective cyclone
(D) All forecasts and warnings
17. Assertion (A): Humidity results in the formation 24. Statement-I: During a cyclone, not move out unless
of a cyclone. and until required
Reason (R): As the humidity in a region increases, Statement-II: Before a cyclone, keep emergency
the difference in temperature also increases. This phone numbers of police, ambulance and fire brigade
results in the formation of a cyclone. handy.
(A) Both A and R are TRUE, R is the correct (A) Statement I is correct, Statement II is incorrect.
explanation of A. (B) Statement II is correct, Statement I is incorrect.
(B) Both A and R are TRUE, R is NOT the correct (C) Both statements are correct.
explanation of A. (D) Both statements are incorrect.
(C) A is TRUE and Statement-R is FALSE
(D) A is FALSE and R is TRUE. C onceptive W orksheet
18. Statement-I: Winds moving at high speeds are 11. The convection of air in hot and humid areas
known as gales. results in
Statement-II: The calm and clear area at the centre (A) Thunderstorm (B) Wind
of a cyclone is called the head of the cyclone. (C) Rain (D) none
(A) Statement I is correct, Statement II is incorrect. 12. A violently rotating windstorm is a
(B) Statement II is correct, Statement I is incorrect. (A) Thunderstorm (B) Wind
(C) Both statements are correct. (C) Cyclone (D) Earthquake
(D) Both statements are incorrect. 13. Which of the following area is more vulnerable to
cyclones in India?
(A) Eastern coast (B) Western coast
(C) Northern coast (D) Southern coast
www.betopperps.com
14. The largest tropical cyclone recorded in 4. Air moves from a region of ____________
(A) India (B) America pressure to a region of
(C) Japan (D) Australia ____________ pressure.
15. Which of the following should not be done during a 5. Air around us exerts ______ in all directions.
thunderstorm? 6. Winds carrying _______ bring rain.
(A) Rest under a tree 7. Air ______ on heating while ________ on cooling.
(B) Take shelter under an umbrella with a metallic 8. A cylcone is called a ______ in the American
end continents and ______ in Japan and Phillippines.
(C) Lie down flat, if in an open place 9. The word monsoon is derived from the Arabic word
(D) All the above _____, which means ‘season’.
16. The amount of water vapour in the atmosphere is 10. ___________ is used to measure speed of wind.
called II. Say True or False
(A) Water cycle (B) Humidity
11. Increased wind speed is, indeed, accompanied by a
(C) Vapour pressure (D) None
reduced air pressure.
17. Winds moving at high speeds are known
12. Air moves from the region where the air pressure
(A) Typhoon (B) Hurricane
is low to the region where the pressure is high.
(C) Gales (D) All
13. The warm air is lighter than cold air
18. A rotating column of high speed winds that appears
as a dark funnel-shaped cloud reaching from the 14. If a storm is accompanied by lightning, we must
ground to the sky is called a take shelter under an isolated tree.
(A) Typhoon (B) Hurricane III. VERY SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS
(C) Tornado (D) Gales 15. What is wind?
19. In which of the following countries, tornadoes occur 16. You see that leaves of trees, banners or flags flutter
frequently ? when the wind is blowing. Why is it so?
(A) India (B) America
17. What is the main cause of wind?
(C) Japan (D) Australia
20. Which of the following is more dangerous? 18. What is the main cause of wind movements on the
(A) Wind` (B) Rain earth?
(C) Cyclone (D) Tornado 19. What happens when temperature is increased at a
21. A high wall of water moving towards the shore place?
from the ocean is called a 20. Which factor is increased the speed of wind?
(A) Storm tide (B) Storm surge 21. From which word monsoon is derived?
(C) Water tide (D) Air surge
22. What is a monsoon?
22. A cyclone causes destruction through:
(A) High-rise waves 23. In which areas does the thunderstorms develop very
(B) High-speed winds that uproot trees, houses and frequently?
other property 24. What is thunderstorm?
(C) Contamination of drinking water 25. What is a cyclone?
(D) All
26. What are the other names of cyclones?
27. What are the factors which contribute to the
Summative Worksheet development of cyclones?
I. Fill in the blanks 28. What is called the eye of the storm?
1. Wind is ____________ air. IV. SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS
2. Winds are generated due to ____________ 29. What is wind? What is the cause of wind?
heating on the earth. 30. What is cyclone and how is it formed?
3. Near the earth’s surface ____________ air 31. What are the different reasons for wind current?
rises up whereas ____________ 32. What are monsoon winds?
air comes down.
33. What are the advantages and disadvantages of rain?
www.betoppers.com
34. What is Thunderstorm? 2. Which of the following statements regarding the

35. What are the precautions in thunderstorms? safety measures to be followed during cyclones
36. What are tornadoes? is incorrect?
37. What is eye of a storm? (A) One should not go out unless advised
38.. What are the stepstaken by government for cyclone
warning. (B) One should not drink contaminated water
39. Describe the action on the parts of the people. (C) One should not cooperate with neighbours
40. What are the other precautions if you are staying
in a cyclone hit are? (D) One should not touch wet switches and power
41. Suggest two methods to find out wind direction at lines
a given place. 3. During a thunderstorm four students Shashank,
42. State two experiences that made you think that air Somak, Sanjeev, and Sanjay take shelter in different
exerts pressure.
places, as shown in the following table.
43. You want to buy a house. Would you like to buy a
house having windows but no ventilators? Explain
your answer. Name Place of shelter
44. Explain why holes are made in hanging banners
and hoarders. Sanjeev under an umbrella
45. How will you help your neighbours in case cyclone
approaches your village/town? Shashank under a tree
46. What planning is required in advance to deal with
the situation created by a cyclone? Somak on a scooter
47. What happens when we blow air between the two
balloons of nearly equal size hanging on a stick? Sanjay inside a car
48. Why hot air goes up?
49. Explain that how uneven heating between equator Who is safe from the effects of the thunderstorm?
and the poles generates wind current.
(A) Sanjeev (B) Shashank
50. What is an anemometer? Explain with the help of
a diagram? (C) Somak (D) Sanjay
4. When a tornado occurs, people should
HOTS Worksheet (A) Climb to the roof
1. Which of the following graphs correctly represents (B) move out to the open field
the relationship between wind speed and the (C) Take shelter under a tree
distance to which wind-dispersed seeds travel? (D) Bend down on their knees
5. When a cyclone strikes one should
(A) Go fishing
(B) Move to a shelter
(A) (B) (C) Move out into an open place
(D) Climb onto the roof of the building
6. Which of the following measures is a safety
measure to be followed during a thunderstorm?
(A) Taking shelter under a tree
(B) Standing on an open ground
(C) (D) (C) Taking shelter inside a bus
(D) Standing on a roof-top
www.betopperps.com
7. Mutum has recently got to know about a (A) Low-pressure area and region Q is the region
thunderstorm warning in his town. He decides to where wind speed is high
take shelter in the underground basement of his (B) High-pressure area and region Q is the area
house. On his way to the basement he picks up where wind speed is low
four objects along with him. These are a radio, a
(C) Low-pressure area and region Q is the area
water bottle, a music system, and a torch.
where wind speed is low
Which of the following objects will not be useful (D) High-pressure area and region Q is the area
to Mutum in the basement during a thunderstorm? where wind speed is high
(A) Radio (B) Torch 12. A low pressure condition is formed during cyclones
over a region because of the
(C) Water bottle (D) Music system
(A) Release of heat by air
8. In order to be safe from the effect of tornadoes a
(B) Release of heat by water vapour
place should have
(C) Absorption of heat by land surface
(A) Many doors (B) Many windows
(D) Absorption of heat by water vapour
(C) A wooden foundation 13. Which figure correctly depicts the conditions
(D) An underground basement required for the formation of thunderstorms?
9. Which of the following statements regarding the
(A)
safety measures to be followed during cyclones
is incorrect?
(B)
(A) One should not go out unless advised
(B) One should not drink contaminated water
(C) One should not cooperate with neighbours (C)
(D) One should not touch wet switches and power

lines
10. Thunderstorms occur because of the collision
between
(A) Two hot air columns (D)
(B) Two cold air columns

(C) Descending cold and ascending hot air
(D) Ascending cold and descending hot air
11. The formation of a cyclone is depicted in the given
figure.
14. Cyclones are formed when

(A) Warm air does not rise up
(B) Winds do not move in high speed
(C) There is a drop in the air pressure
(D) There is a drop in the humidity levels
In the given figure, region P is the

www.betoppers.com
15. The centre of a cyclone is called . 18. A hot air balloon moves in the air as a result of the
heating of the air inside the balloon.
Its diameter varies from .
given statements?
(A)
i ii
focus 10 to 20 cm
(B)
i ii
This heating of air inside the balloon
focus 10 to 30 km
(A) Makes the air lighter
(C) (B) Makes the air heavier
i ii
(C) Causes contraction of air
eye 10 to 20 cm (D) Causes condensation of air
19. After washing clothes, Vikram dries them under

(D) i ii the Sun, as shown in the given figure. He observed
that when a high speed wind blows, the clothes lift
eye 10 to 30 km up in the air.
16. Consider the following statements regarding
cyclones.
I The Western coastline of India is more prone to
cyclones than the Eastern coastline.
II Technological advancements make it possible to
predict the occurrence of cyclones.
III A cyclone develops as a result of the combination
of high speed winds and pressure differences.
Among the given statements,
(A) Only I is incorrect
(B) Only III is incorrect
The clothes lift up because high speed wind is
(C) Both I and II are incorrect accompanied by
(D) Both II and III are incorrect
(A) Increase in the pressure of air
17. A loud sound is heard, when a tyre of a bus or a
truck bursts.This loud sound is the result of (B) Decrease in the pressure of air
(A) High gravitational force on the tyres
(C) Increase in the weight of clothes
(B) Low gravitational force on the tyres
(C) High air pressure in the tyres (D) Decrease in the weight of clothes
(D) Low air pressure in the tyres
www.betopperps.com
20. Most parts of India receive rainfall during , 23. Land breeze is the name given to the wind that
moves from the land to the sea. It blows because
which is caused by the . It is an example
(A) Of the intense cooling of the seas during winters
of a breeze. (B) Of the intense heating of the land surface during
summers
The given statements are completed by the
information in alternative (C) The temperature of air above the sea is lower
than that above the land
i ii iii (D) The temperature of air above the sea is higher
than that above the land
(A) summers loo land
24. breeze is the name given to the wind
(B) winters monsoons land that moves from sea to land. It blows when the
temperature of air above the sea is than
(C) summers monsoons sea
that above the land. The information in which
(D) winters loo sea alternative completes the given statements?
21. Which of the following statements is incorrect? i ii

(A) Monsoon winds are an example of land breeze
(A) S ea higher
(B) Land breeze blows mainly during winters
(C) Sea breeze blows mainly during summers (B) S ea lower
(D) The direction of winds change seasonally
(C) Land higher
22. Wind currents are generated because of the
difference in temperatures of different regions. One
of the reasons for these differences in temperatures (D) Land lower
is the uneven heating of the Earth’s surface, as a
result of its shape. The direction of winds in different 25. If three balloons A, B and C are inflated with air at
regions is shown in the given figure. different temperatures T A, TB and TC, respectively,
they will rise to different heights as shown in the
figure.
What will be the correct relation among their

The winds move in a curved trajectory in each
temperatures?
climatic zone of the Earth because of its
(A) TA >TB > TC (B) TA < TB < TC
(A) Shape (B) Rotation
(C) TA >TC > TB (D) TA = TB = TC
(C) Revolution (D) Atmosphere
www.betoppers.com
II. Multiple Correct Answer Type

IIT JEE Worksheet
11. The air inside a balloon exerts pressure in ____
I. Single Correct Answer Type direction.
(A) Upward (B) Downward
1. A cyclone warning can be issued:
(C) Left side (D) Right side
(A) 6 hours in advance 12. Circulation of wind is due to
(B) 12 hours in advance (A) The warm air at the equator rises
(C) 24 hours in advance (B) Cold air moves in from the polar regions
(D) 48 hours in advance (C) Uneven heating of the earth’s surface between
2. Pick the odd one out of the following: the equator and poles
(D) Even heating of the earth’s surface between
(A) Monsoon (B) Typhoon
the equator and poles
(C) Hurricane (D) Cyclone
13. Which regions are relatively hotter?
3. In which did Orissa was hit by a cyclones in the
(A) Equatorial (B) Tropical
recent past:
(C) Polar (D) None
(A) 1998 (B) 1999
14. The formation of a cyclone depends on
(C) 2000 (D) 2001
(A) The speed of wind (B) the direction of wind
4. Air moves from:
(C) Temperature (D) Soil condition
(A) The region of low pressure to high pressure 15. Which of the following are damaged due to the
(B) The region of high pressure to low pressure effect of a cyclone?
(C) Air does not depend upon the pressure (A) Land (B) People
(D) Air does not move (C) Property (D) Jobs
5. The winds from oceans carrry water and bring rain 16. Which of the following precautions should be taken
are called: if you are staying in a cyclone hit area
(A) Cyclone (B) Typhoon (A) Do not drink water that could be contaminated.
(C) Monsoon (D) None of these Always store drinking water for emergencies.
6. What happens if air is heated? (B) Do not touch wet switches and fallen power
lines.
(A) Contracts (B) Expands
(C) No change (D) First expands then (C) Do not go out just for the sake of fun.
contracts (D) Do not pressurise the rescue force by making
7. The moving air is called undue demands.
(A) Tsunami (B) Cyclone III. Paragraph Type
(C) Typhoon (D) Wind
8. High-speed winds and air pressure difference can
We see that the increased wind speed is, indeed,
cause accompanied by a reduced air pressure.
(A) Tsunamis (B) Cyclones
17. When we blow into the mouth of the bottle, the air
(C) Typhoons (D) Earth quakes
near the mouth has _____speed.
9. Which of the following made it easier to monitor
cyclones? (A) Higher (B) Lesser
(A) Satellites (B) RADARs (C) Same (D) none
(C) Both (D) None 18. Blow up two balloons with some water inside them.
10. Choose the correct statement. Tie each one to a string and hang them apart on a
(A) Increased wind speed is, indeed, accompanied cycle spoke or a stick. What happens if we blow in
by a reduced air pressure. the space between the balloons?
(B) The warm air is lighter than cold air (A) They move away (B) They come closer
(C) Both
(B) They do not move (D) None
(D) None
www.betopperps.com
19. Hold a strip of paper, 20 cm long and 3 cm wide, between your thumb and forefinger.Now blow over the
paper. The strip
(A) Goes downwards (B) Goes upwards (C) Remains horizontal (D) None
IV. Integer Type

20. Cyclone Alert is a warning issued ____ days before the expected time of a cyclone.
21. Cyclone Warning: A warning issued ___ days before the expected time of a cyclone.
V. Matrix Matching
22.
Column A Column B
(i) Wind carrying water (i) Thunderstorms
(ii) Moving air (ii) Tornado
(iii) Measures the speed of wind (iii) Monsoon
(iv) Dark funnel shaped clouds (iv) Wind
(v) Develops in India very frequently (v) Anemometer

www.betoppers.com
Learning Outcomes Sound
Chapter -3
6
• Sound • The Human Ear

• Sound Produced By Humans • Characteristics of Sound
• Propagation Of Sound • Noise Pollution
1. Sound Carefully, observe the surface of water in

the utensil. Do you see concentric circles
If somebody calls you from behind, you will
moving on the water surface? These are
quickly turn around. What makes you do so?
vibrations in water, produced by vibrations of
We turn back in response to a call because of
the utensil body, on beating.
the sound heard by us. We are able to talk to
Therefore, it can be concluded that a
each other because of the sound produced by
vibrating body produces sound.
us. We are able to predict the distance of a train
The back and forth movement of an
only by listening to the sound it produces.
object produces sound. An object moving
Similarly, we can distinguish between different
back and forth is said to be in vibration.
musical instruments because of the sounds they
Hence, sound is produced by vibrating
produce.
objects.
Sound is a form of energy that causes the
sensation of hearing. 3. Sound produced by Musical
How do you realize that an alarm bell is Instruments
ringing?
Musical instruments such as flute,
Vibrating bodies produce sound
guitar, tanpura etc. produce sounds by
2. Sound produced by Vibrating vibrations of its vibrating parts. A guitar produces
Objects sound because of the vibrations in its plucked
strings. When we hit the skin of a tabla, it starts
Do you know how a sound is produced?
vibrating. This produces sound. The skin of
To find out, let us perform the following
a tabla is known as stretched membrane.
activities.
Vibrating part that
Musical instrument
produces sound
Stretched membrane
Stretched string
i) Take a rubber band and stretch it between two
poles. Now, pluck the rubber band in the
middle. Can you hear any sound? Does the
rubber band vibrate when it produces a Stretched string
sound? On plucking a stretched rubber band or
a stretched string, it vibrates rapidly and
produces a sound.
ii) Take a cooking utensil and pour some water in Air-column
it. Now, beat the utensil with a rod. You will
hear a sound.
Vibrating part that Let us understand better by performing a small

Musical instrument
produces sound activity. Take a piece of paper and cut two small
rectangles out of it. Now, put these two pieces of
paper one above the other such that there is a small
Air-column gap between them.
Stretched membrane
A rectangular slit
When you beat the skin of a drum, it vibrates and Now, blow air through this small gap. Can you hear
hence, produces sound. a sound? Your voice box functions in the same
The sound produced by a drum is not only that of way.
the skin, but the drum is itself forced to vibrate. We can hold these pieces of paper tightly as well
Hence, the sound produced by a drum is the sound as loosely. In the same way, our vocal chords can
of vibration of the whole instrument. be held tightly or loosely with the help of the muscles
4. Sound Produced By Humans attached to them. Different people have different
vocal chords. Due to this reason, we all have a
While watching a group of children playing hide
different voice quality.
and seek, Himesh observed how a blind-folded boy
was able to catch the other children by hearing the 5. Propagation of Sound
sounds produced by them. This made him
wonder how sounds are produced by humans. We are able to hear the bursting of crackers even
While singing a song, put your hand on your throat. when we are standing at a distance. How is it
You will find a part of your throat moving up and possible? How does the sound produced by a
down. This part of your throat is known as the voice cracker reach us?
box or larynx. The larynx is responsible for The sound of a bursting cracker reaches us through
producing sounds in humans. It moves when we air. It shows that sound can travel through air.
swallow something.
Experiment to demonstrate that sound requires a
medium for propagation.
Requirements: Electric bell, Glass bell jar,
Vacuum pump, Battery
Method: Place the electric bell inside the glass
bell jar and connect it to a battery. When the circuit
is closed, you can hear the bell ring. The jar contains
air and sound travels through this air.
Now, remove the air from the jar with the help of
the vacuum pump connected to the bell jar. As the
air is taken out, the loudness of the sound slowly
We know that a vibrating object produces decreases until the sound becomes too faint. Finally
sound. Then, which part of our body vibrates you cannot hear the bell even though the hammer
to produce sounds? of the bell is seen striking the gong as before.
The voice box consists of two vocal chords. These Allow air to enter the jar gradually. You will hear
chords are arranged in such a manner that there is the sound slowly increasing.
a small gap between them. This small gap allows
air to pass through. When we speak, air is forced Result: Sound cannot propagate in the absence
into this small gap by the lungs. This prompts our of a material medium like solid, liquid or gas.
vocal chords to vibrate and hence, produce sounds.
www.betoppers.com
Sound 97
Stethoscope is an example of sound travelling
through solids. Doctors use stethoscopes to
listen to your heartbeat.
A material medium is necessary for the

propagation of sound. Vacuum is devoid of Sound can travel in solids, liquids, and gases.
any material. Hence, sound cannot travel However, sound cannot travel in vacuum.
through vacuum.
Outer space is devoid of any material medium. 6. The Human Ear
Hence, no sound can be heard in outer spaces. To The ear is one of the sensory organs in our body.
communicate in such areas, astronauts use walkie- We hear sounds with the help of our ear.
talkies. A walkie-talkie is an instrument, which uses It is the eardrum present in the ear, which vibrates
radio waves for the transportation of messages. when vibrating air hits its surface. This vibration
Can sound travel through liquids? gives us the sense of hearing.
To find out whether sound can travel through liquids, To understand the functioning of an eardrum,
let us perform the following activity. let us perform an activity.
Take a metal plate and spoon. Place them inside a Take an empty plastic bottle with a rectangular base
bucket filled with water. Hit the plate with the spoon and put some dry rice in it. Now, speak loudly
in such a way that it does not touch the body of the through the mouth of the bottle and tell your friend
bucket. to carefully observe the rice grains. As you speak,
Now, carefully place your ear near the surface of the rice grains jump up from the surface of the
water. bottle because your sound causes the base of the
Are you able to hear the sound produced? bottle to vibrate. The eardrum performs the same
You can hear the produced sound. Sound reaches function. It vibrates and moves to and fro when it
your ear after travelling through water. Hence, we receives a sound.
can say that sound travels through liquids. Working of the human ear
Interesting point to note Before understanding the working of a human ear,
Dolphins communicate with each other by sending let us first glance at the different parts of the human
high pitched squalls. It shows that sound can travel ear.
through water.
Can sound travel through solids?

Place your ear on one end of a long table. Ask Eardrum
your friend to tap the table from the other end. The eardrum is a thin membrane, which is stretched
Do you hear any sound? tightly in the middle ear. It is also called
You can hear the produced sound. Sound reaches the tympanic membrane. If damaged, then it may
your ear after travelling through the table. This result in severe pain, loss of hearing, discharge of
indicates that sound can travel through solids. ear fluids, ringing in the ear, etc.
www.betoppers.com
Once you lose your hearing, it is gone forever.
4. The plucking of a stretched metal wire produces
It cannot be repaired or regained.
sound because
If you are standing on a platform, you can easily
tell if a train is coming towards you or going away (A) Of change in atmospheric pressure around the
from you, even though you are not able to see wire
it. How is this possible? (B) It is made up of a good conductor of electricity
As a train draws near you, the sound produced by (C) of generation of heat
it keeps on increasing. This vibrates our eardrum. (D) It starts vibrating
As soon as the train leaves, the sound produced by
it keeps on decreasing. Hence, vibrations produced 5. The human vocal cord controls the i of sound
by it also decrease. Hence, you can easily tell if by ii itself.
the train is coming towards you or going away from The information in which alternative completes the
you. given statement?
Interesting facts
i ii
The frog is the only animal whose eardrum is (A) speed drying or wetting
present outside the body i.e., behind the eye.
Hearing in snakes
i ii
Snakes have no external ears such as humans. They (B)
cannot hear a snake charmer’s sound. However, speed loosening or tightening
they can sense sound with the help of their sense
of touch and respond to the movement of the (C) i ii
trumpet. quality drying or wetting
Formative Worksheet (D)

i ii
quality loosening or tightening
1. A police officer, who is investigating a robbery in a
locality, presses the door bell of house number 6. Which part of the human body vibrates to produce
211.To alert people, a door bell emits sounds?
(A) Heat energy (B) Light energy (A) Windpipe (B) Eardrum
(C) Sound energy (D) Potential energy
(C) Vocal cord (D) Nasal cavity
2. Kevin touches four objects, I, II, III, and IV. He
makes the following conclusions: 7. vs = Speed of sound in solid medium
Object I is hot. vl = Speed of sound in liquid medium
Object II is vibrating. vg = Speed of sound in gaseous medium
Object III is cold. When arranged in the descending order of their
Object IV is sticky. magnitudes, the speed of sound in the three different
Among the given objects, the object producing media is
sound is
(A) vs > vl > vg (B) vs > vg >vl
(A) I (B) II (C) III (D) IV
3. Which of the following musical instruments (C) vg > vs > vl (D) vl > vg > vs
is not matched with its vibrating part? 8. The sound coming from an alarm clock cannot be
heard if it is kept inside a box that is
Musical instrument Vibrating part
(A) (A) Filled with liquid only
Guitar Stretched string
(B) Filled with both solid and liquid
Musical instrument Vibrating part (C) Made up of iron with air inside it
(B)
Jaltarang Water column
(D) Devoid of any material medium inside
Musical instrument Vibrating part 9. What should a hearing-impaired person wear in
(C) Dhol Stretched order to enhance his hearing power by amplifying
membrane sound?
(A) Ear-horn (B) Stethoscope
(D) Musical instrument Vibrating part (C) Mobile headset (D)Jackhammer’s headphone
Ghatam Air column
www.betoppers.com
Sound 99
10. The given table lists the main parts of the human i ii
ear that take part in hearing. (A)
moving forward veena
Parts of the human ear
I Ear canal i ii
II Three tiny bones (B)
moving forward drum
III Eardrum
IV Cochlea i ii
(C)
The order in which sound vibration moves through vibrating veena
the human ear is
(A) I  II  III  IV i ii
(D)
(B) I  III  II  IV vibrating drum
(C) III  I  IV  II 6. Which of the following actions is not related to the
(D) III  IV  I  II production of sound by humans?
11. Vibration can be defined as the (A) The forcing out of air by the lungs through the
(A) Stretching of a membrane windpipe
(B) Roughness of a membrane (B) The expansion of the lungs in order to fill air
(C) Circular motion of a membrane (C) The loosening of the vocal cord
(D) To and fro motion of a membrane (D) The vibration of the vocal cord
7. Justin and his friend Daniel stand at the two ends
Conceptive Worksheet of a large empty hall. Justin makes a sound with a
1. Sound is produced by tuning fork by hitting the wall at his end. His friend
(A) Burning a candle Daniel puts his ear against the wall at the other
(B) Beating a drum end. He hears two sounds at an interval.
(C) Photosynthesis Daniel hears two sounds because
(D) A battery (A) Justin makes two sounds
2. When two people talk with each other, energy is (B) A tuning fork has two vibrating arms
transferred through (C) Sound br eaks into two perpendicular
(A) Electric currents components
(B) The movement of mouth (D) Sound travels at different speeds through air
(C) Sound waves and wall
(D) Wind force 8. Two fishing boats are at mid sea. One of the boats
3. One end of a ruler is fixed on a table and the other sends two sound signals (to the other boat) at the
end is struck same time; one through air and the other through
The vibration of the ruler produces water.
(A) Heat (B) Light The second boat will receive
(C) Sound (D) Electrical (A) The sound signal sent through water first
4. Tom spreads some sand particles on a drum-head. (B) The sound signal sent through air first
He strikes the drum with a hammer. The striking (C) Only the sound signal sent through air
of the drum will cause the sand particles to (D) Both the sounds signals at same time
(A) Cut through the drum-head 9. Sound waves cannot travel through
(B) Get stuck to the drum-head (A) Wood (B) Gass
(C) Move to and fro on the drum-head (C) Gasoline (D) Vacuum
(D) Move up and down on the drum-head 10. With reference to the human ear, exposure to
5. When a stretched membrane is beaten, it excessive sound may damage its
(A) Pinna (B) Eardrum
starts . This phenomenon is used to make (C) Ear canal (D) Eustachian tube
a .
given statements?
www.betoppers.com
7. Characteristics of Sound same phase is called wave length. It is denoted by

Consider a pendulum moving continuously from left the Greek letter  (lambda).
to right such that it passes through point C each
time. This type of to and fro motion of an object is
known as vibration or oscillation. Ex:

Unit : The S.I unit of wave length is meter (m).
Wave velocity
It is the distance travelled by a wave in one second.
Expression for wave velocity
We know that, velocity of the wave =
distance travelled by the wave
time taken
Suppose a wave travels a distance  in time T,,

Frequency then v 
The number of oscillations of a vibrating body per T
second is known as the frequency of oscillation. [i.e. the relation between wave velocity, wavelength
It is measured in hertz (Hz). If in one second, the and time period]
pendulum passes point C 10 times then, its Hence T is the time taken by one wave. We know
frequency of oscillation is 10 Hz. 1
Time period that becomes the number of waves per second
T
The time required to complete one oscillation is and this is known as frequency (f) of the wave.
known as the time period of an oscillation. It is So the above equation can also be written as, v =
given by the inverse of the frequency of oscillation. f× 
It is expressed in seconds (s).
Where, v = velocity of the wave; f = frequency;
1  = wavelength
Hence, Time period 
frequency In other words velocity of a wave = frequency ×
Example: An object oscillates at the rate of 2 wavelength
oscillations per second. What is its time period? Thus, the velocity (or speed) of a wave in a medium
is equal to the product of its frequency and
1 1 wavelength. The formula v = f ×  is called wave
Time period    0.5s
frequency 2 equation.
Hence, the time period of the given object is 0.5
seconds. Loudness
Amplitude You can easily distinguish between the difference
Amplitude of an oscillation is the distance covered in sounds produced by a tabla and guitar. Similarly,
on either side of the mean position. In the above there are many sounds that you can identify without
example of a pendulum, distance covered by the looking at the objects producing them. This shows
bob on either side of point C gives its amplitude. that there are some characteristics that make these
sounds different.
Extra Milestone Let us perform an activity to understand
Wavelength better.
Sound propagates in the form of waves. Wavelength Take a plastic ball and throw it on the ground. When
of a wave is the length of one wave. it hits the floor, it produces a sound. Again, throw
The distance travelled by the wave in one time the ball with greater force. In this case, the sound
period is called the wavelength or The distance produced will be louder and the height to which it
between two nearest particles which are in the bounces will also be higher. The height to which
www.betoppers.com
Sound 101
the ball bounces gives the measure of its amplitude to the human ear. Thus, for human ear, the range
of vibrations. of audible frequencies is roughly from 20 to 20,000
Hence, we can say that loudness increases with Hz.
an increase in amplitude. Note: Some animals can hear sounds of frequencies
Loudness of sound is proportional to the square of higher than 20,000 Hz. Dogs have this ability. The
the amplitude of the vibration produced. Loudness police use high frequency whistles which dogs can
of sound is expressed in decibels (dB). As the hear but humans cannot. The ultrasound equipment,
amplitude of vibrations increase, the loudness of a familiar to us for investigating and tracking many
sound also increases. medical problems, works at frequencies higher than
Loudspeakers increase the amplitude of the 20,000 Hz.
produced sound. Due to this, the sound produced
8. Noise Pollution
becomes very loud.
When we burst crackers, a loud sound is produced. Pollution occurs when there is an excess of some
Hence, they have large amplitude. unwanted entity. Noise pollution occurs when there
Whispering has small amplitude, whereas shouting is an excess of unwanted sounds in the
has large amplitude. Hence, shouting is louder than environment. It is one of the biggest problems of
whispering. modern era. Noise pollution like air pollution is
Pitch largely created by humans. It is mainly caused by
We can easily distinguish between the sound of a factories, vehicles, construction instruments such
drum and the whistle of a train. Why is it so? The as jackhammer, bulldozer, leaf blower, air
sound produced by two different objects can be conditioner, desert cooler etc.
equally loud. Even then we can distinguish between Loudspeakers and crackers produce noise pollution.
them. How? Televisions and transistors running on high volumes
The frequency of an oscillation determines the can also contribute to noise pollution.
shrillness or pitch of a sound. If the frequency of However, the worst offenders of noise pollution
vibration is higher and the sound produced is shrill, are transportation vehicles.
it will have a high pitch. Similarly, if the frequency Effects of noise pollution:
of oscillations is small then, the sound produced Noise pollution can lead to many health related
will have a low pitch. problems like:
Sound produced by a drum is an example of low  Insomnia
pitched sound. However, it has large amplitude.  Loss of hearing
Sound produced by the buzzing of a bee is shriller  Hypertension
than the roar of a lion. This suggests that buzzing  Severe headache
of a bee has higher frequency of oscillations than  Stress related diseases
the roar of a lion. Likewise, the voice of a child is  Aggressiveness in behavior
always shriller than the voice of a man. How can noise pollution be controlled?
Male voice is less shrill than female voice. This is To control noise pollution, we must control its
because of the pitch of sound. Female voice has source. Hence, silencers must be installed in
a higher pitch in comparison to the male voice. vehicles such as motorcycles, cars, trucks, buses,
When your teacher writes on the blackboard with and other noise producing machines. We should
a piece of chalk, sometimes the chalk makes a watch television and listen to music at a low volume.
displeasing sound. Also, use of loudspeakers as well as horns of buses
and trucks should be minimized.
Audible and Inaudible Sounds Regular maintenance of automobiles should be
We know that we need a vibrating body for the done so that noise produced by them can be kept
production of sound. Can we hear the sound of all under check. All industrial work should be done
vibrating bodies? The fact is that sounds of away from residential areas. More trees should be
frequencies less than about 20 vibrations per second planted in residential areas as they help in reducing
(20 Hz) cannot be detected by the human ear. Such noise.
sounds are called inaudible. On the higher side,
sounds of frequencies higher than about 20,000
vibrations per second (20 kHz) are also not audible
www.betoppers.com
19. Humans cannot hear all the sounds produced in

Formative Worksheet their surroundings. The sounds whose frequencies
12. Ivan shakes one end of a rope attached to a wall. fall in the audible range can only be heard by
This produces a wave motion in the rope. humans. The lower limit of the audible range for
He observes that the first peak of the wave reaches human ears is 20 Hz and the upper limit is a ×
the wall in 5 seconds, and a total of 15 peaks are 10b Hz.
produced in the vibrating rope in 5 seconds. The What are the respective values of a and b?
length of the rope is 3 meters. (A) 1 and 2 (B) 2 and 4
What is the wavelength of the wave produced in (C) 3 and 2 (D) 1 and 3
the rope? 20. I. The amplitude determines the pitch of the
(A) 10 cm (B)15 cm (C) 20 cm (D) 25 cm sound.
13. Alex hits a tuning fork on a wall. The fork begins II. For human ears, the audible range is 20 Hz to
to vibrate. He connects a digital counter with it 20,000 Hz.
and records the number of complete vibrations. His III. Sound can travel through water.
recordings are listed in the given table. Among the given statements, only
Time (s) Number of vibrations (A) I is correct
1 256 (B) III is correct
5 1,280 (C) I and II are correct
15 3,840 (D) II and III are correct
14. What is the time period of a pendulum if its bob 21. Objects that produce sound:
oscillates 100 times in two seconds? I Fire crackers
(A) 0.01 s (B) 0.02 s II Siren
(C) 0.1 s (D) 0.2 s III Mouth organ
15. Eric throws a stone in a river. The stone travels a IV Fire alarm
distance that is 100 m away from the river bank. V Factory machines
He observes that the first wave comes to the bank Which of the given objects does not produce sound
2 seconds after the stone touches the water surface. that is harmful to the human ear?
He counts that a total of 20 waves are created in 2 (A) I (B) II
seconds. (C) III (D) V
What is the distance between two consecutive 22. Nowadays, government and local bodies are taking
waves? initiatives in roadside plantation. This helps in
(A) 2 m (B) 5 m (C) 20 m (D) 50 m (A) Reducing noise pollution
16. The maximum displacement of a sound wave on (B) Reducing traffic congestion
either side of the mean position of its vibration is (C) Increasing the durability of roads
the measure of its (D) Increasing the visibility of drivers
(A) Amplitude (B) Frequency
(C) Period (D) Speed Conceptive Worksheet
17. The intensity of sound waves is measured in 11. Which of the following sound waves produces the
(A) Hertz (B) Joules loudest sound?
(C) Meters (D) Decibel
18. The famous band of Beetles has used an ultrasonic
whistle in one of their songs. The sound produced
(A)
by the whistle cannot be heard by humans, but it
can be heard by dogs.
From the given information, it can be inferred that
the sound produced by the whistle may have a
frequency, which
(A) Is less than 5 Hz
(B)
(B) Is less than 80 Hz
(C) Lies between 20 kHz to 25 kHz
(D) Lies between 20 Hz to 20 kHz
www.betoppers.com
Sound 103
19. High noise levels can injure the ear drum and cause
deafness. Which of the following devices can lead
(C) to the production of high noise?
(A) Fan
(B) Alarm clock
(C) Washing machine
(D) Leaf-blowing machine
20. Which of the following effects is unlikely to occur
because of noise pollution?
(D)
(A) Loss of hearing
(B) Breathing problem
(C) Sleeping disorder
12. With reference to sound, the number of to and fro (D) High blood pressure
motions of a membrane in per unit time is expressed
in the unit of Summative Worksheet
(A) Angstrom (B) Second 1. Choose the correct answer.
(C) Meter (D) Hertz Sound can travel through
13. Julie hears the ringing of a bell at a nearby church. (A) Gases only (B) Solids only
She hears the bell ring 24 times in one minute. (C) Liquids only (D) Solids, liquids and gases
The ringing frequency of the bell is 2. Which of the following voices is likely to have
(A) 0.2 Hz (B) 0.3 Hz minimum frequency?
(C) 0.4 Hz (D) 0.5 Hz (A) Baby girl (B) Baby boy
14. A membrane is vibrating at a rate of 20 oscillations (C) A man (D) A woman
in two seconds. The sound produced by the 3. In the following statements, tick ‘T’ against those
membrane is which are true, and ‘F’ against those which are
(A) Loud false.
(B) Shrill (a) Sound cannot travel in vacuum.
(C) Of good quality (b) The number of oscillations per second of a
(D) Out of the audible range vibrating object is called its time period.
15. The loudness of a sound is determined by (c) If the amplitude of vibration is large, sound is
(A) The amplitude of the vibrations of the sound feeble.
(B) How fast the source is moving to and fro (d) For human ears, the audible range is 20 Hz to
(C) The size of the source of the sound 20,000 Hz.
(D) How it is reflected from a surface (e) The lower the frequency of vibration, the higher
16. Cruz is standing in a pond. He throws a stone in is the pitch.
the pond at some distance away from him. A wave (f) Unwanted or unpleasant sound is termed as
is produced on the water surface. He observes music.
that 30 peaks reach him in 5 seconds. (g) Noise pollution may cause partial hearing
What is the frequency of the produced wave? impairment.
(A) 5 HZ (B) 6 HZ 4. Fill in the blanks with suitable words.
(C) 30 HZ (D) 150 HZ (a) Time taken by an object to complete one
17. The bob of a simple pendulum is oscillating with a oscillation is called _________.
frequency of 25 Hz. How much time will the (b) Loudness is determined by the ________ of
pendulum take to make 100 oscillations? vibration.
(A) 1 s (B) 2 s (c) The unit of frequency is _________.
(C) 4 s (D) 6 s (d) Unwanted sound is called _________.
18. Which of the following frequencies of sound (e) Shrillness of a sound is determined by
is not heard by humans? the _________ of vibration.
(A) 18 Hz (B) 180 Hz 5. A pendulum oscillates 40 times in 4 seconds. Find
(C) 1800 Hz (D) 18000 Hz its time period and frequency.
www.betoppers.com
6. The sound from a mosquito is produced when it 3. Which of the following statements about sound
vibrates its wings at an average rate of 500 produced by human beings is incorrect?
vibrations per second. What is the time period of (A) Larynx produces sound.
the vibration? (B) Larynx is also called voice box.
7. Identify the part which vibrates to produce sound (C) Vocal cords are cords stretched across
in the following instruments. larynx.
(a) Dholak (b) Sitar (c) Flute (D) Windpipe modifies the quality of voice
8. What is the difference between noise and music? produced by larynx.
Can music become noise sometimes?
4. Which of the following statements is incorrect about
9. List sources of noise pollution in your surroundings.
human ear?
10. Explain in what way noise pollution is harmful to
(A) The inner ear sends sound signals to the
humans.
brain.
11. Your parents are going to buy a house. They have
been offered one on the roadside and another three (B) The outer ear collects sound from the
lanes away from the roadside. Which house would surroundings.
you suggest your parents should buy? Explain your (C) Vibrations present in sound waves help in
answer. vibration of eardrum.
12. Sketch larynx and explain its function in your own (D) The eardrum vibrates to reproduce sound
words. that goes to the brain.
13. Lightning and thunder take place in the sky at the 5. Which part of a tabla vibrates to produce sound?
same time and at the same distance from us. (A) Wooden shell
Lightning is seen earlier and thunder is heard later. (B) Stretched membrane
Can you explain? (C) Stretched side strings
(D) Ring holding the strings
HOTS Worksheet 6. Which of the following acts cannot produce sound?
1. The given figure shows a human ear with parts (A) Striking a stretched metal cord
labelled as I, II, III, and IV. (B) Beating a stretched membrane
(C) Blowing into a narrow pipe
(D) Heating a stretched string
7. Hearing impiarment is caused by either excessive
noise or injury, disease, age, or by a combination of
any of them. Many devices are used by the hearing
impaired persons. Ear-horn is one of them.
Ear-horn is a device that is used to
(A) Cure any infection in ear
Which part of the ear vibrates with sound and sends (B) Cancel the noise pollution
these vibrations to the inner ear? (C) Protect ear from external agents
(A) I (B) II (D) Amplify and enhance the hearing power
(C) III (D) IV 8. Jackhammer is an electric device that is used to
2. John places an alarm clock inside a box as shown drill on hard surface. It produces unwanted sound
in the given figure. He then creates a vacuum inside that is very loud and irritating. The person who
the box. When the alarm goes on, John does not works with a Jackhammer generally wears a
hear the alarm sound. headphone known as Jackhammer’s Headphone.
John does not hear the alarm sound because What does the Jackhammer’s Headphones do?
(A) The walls of the box block the sound (A) Prevents the worker from brain
(B) Sound cannot travel through vacuum hemorrhage
(C) There is no medium between John and the (B) Connects the worker with his manager
box
(C) Absorbs and cancels the noise
(D) The inside wall of the box reflects the sound
(D) Entertains the person
back
www.betoppers.com
Sound 105
9. In medical sciences, doctors use ultrasound devices

to investigate and track the affected internal parts
of the body that are not visible directly. The
technique is called sonography. These devices use
sound to observe internal human parts and work at
a frequency greater than 20 KHz.
The sound emitted by ultrasound equipments are
(A) Inaudible (B) Audible
(C) Louder (D) Feeble
10. Jackhammer is an electric device that is mainly
used for drilling on a hard surface. In this process,
Which alternative gives the correct information to
a large sound is produced. The person who works
complete the given statement?
with jackhammer generally wears a ‘protection with
jackhammers’ to avoid this. i ii iii
(A)
With reference to the given information, what does continue can through vacuum
the ‘protection with jackhammers’ device do?
(A) Protects ear from noise i ii iii
(B) Protects eye from dust (B) continue cannot between
(C) Protects from electric shock beaked
(D) Protects from wind and rain points
11. Telephone operators answer the calls on
telephones. A sound is easily transmitted and clearly i ii iii
heard over a telephone conversation if it is of high (C)
unable cannot through vacuum
frequency.
Mostly women are recruited as telephone operators i ii iii
because they can (D)
unable can between beaked points
(A) Do hard work
(B) Produce louder sound 14. There is a hollow glass partition in a room. It divides
(C) Produce high pitched sound the room in two compartments. Two brothers X
(D) Work continuously for many hours and Y are sitting in each compartment. An alarm
12. Humans are able to hear because of the vibration clock, which is placed inside the glass partition, is
of a stretched thin membrane. This membrane is producing sound, as shown in the given figure. Both
called eardrum. brothers are able to hear the sound.
If elasticity of the eardrum is loosened, then All the air from within the glass partition is removed
(A) It will vibrate rapidly with the help of a vacuum pump.
(B) It will not vibrate properly
(C) Inaudible sound can be heard
(D) Sound cannot be heard at all
13. Suraj and Pankaj are playing with a specially
designed electric rod. The rod is inserted through a
glass vacuum sphere. On switching the current,
the rod can break and separate at point O. Suraj is
tapping the rod at one end and Pankaj is able to
hear a sound at the other end of the rod. The After evacuating the partition completely,
situation is shown in the given figure. (A) The alarm will produce a louder sound
After closing the switch, the rod breaks at O. Pankaj (B) Both will be unable to listen to the sound
will i to hear the tapping because sound ii (C) Only X will be able to listen to the sound
travel iii . (D) The alarm will produce a high pitch sound
www.betoppers.com
15. An electric drum is enclosed inside a specially The information in which alternative completes the
designed closed glass chamber, as shown in the given statement?
given figure. On switching the current, the hammer
repeatedly strikes the membrane of the drum. (A) i ii
Hence, the membrane vibrates and produces sound rotates electricity
that can be heard at a distance. Now, the chamber
i ii
is evacuated by closing the switch of the vacuum (B)
rotates sound
pump.
i ii
(C)
vibrates electricity
(D) i ii
vibrates sound
18. Astronauts in deep space use radio devices to
communicate with each other. The radio device
converts the sound produced by the first astronaut
into radio signals that reach to the radio device of
the second astronaut. There, this radio signal
converts back into sound so that the second
As the chamber is evacuated, the astronaut can hear the voice of the first.
In outer space, astronauts use radio devices instead
(A) Frequency of hammering decreases
of direct sound to communicate because
(B) Membrane stops vibrating (A) Sound cannot travel in vacuum
(C) Hammer stops striking (B) It is very difficult to speak in vacuum
(C) Radio devices are very cheap and easily
(D) Sound cannot be heard available
16. Dolphins and whales communicate under water (D) Vocal cords do not vibrate to produce sound
using sound. They can see each other with their in outer space.
eyes and also by producing sound. 19. Underwater detection of objects is possible in
navigation because
Dolphins and whales are able to communicate in (A) Underwater objects can also produce sound
water because sound (B) The speed of sound is the highest in water
(A) Can travel in water (C) The energy of sound increases in water
(D) Sound can travel through water
(B) Travels fastest in water
20. Astronauts use walkie-talkie to communicate to
(C) Does not scatter in water each other in deep space. Walkie-talkie radiates
(D) Does not lose energy in water radio waves to connect with the respective pair.
Astronauts use walkie-talkie to communicate in
17. Microphone is an electrical device that is used to deep space because
amplify a human voice to be heard at a distance. It (A) Sound cannot travel through vacuum
consists of a thin membrane called diaphragm (B) Range of the walkie-talkie is very large
that in response to . (C) Walkie-talkie amplifies the sound produced
by astronauts
(D) Radio waves cannot be transmitted without
walkie-talkie
21. When a stretched thread is plucked, it starts
vibrating.
The given information is used to make a
(A) Flute (B) Veena
(C) Manjira (D) Jaltarang
www.betoppers.com
Sound 107
22. The presence of excessive and unwanted noise in 8. We differentiate between voices of two different
the surroundings may cause persons without seeing them by ___ of sound
(A) Vision defects produced ?
(A) Pitch (B) Loudness
(B) Mental problems
(C) Quality (D) All
(C) Hearing impairment
9. When a drum is hit softly, a soft sound is produced.
(D) Breathing difficulty Because, the vibration of ___.
22. Which of the following preventive measures (A) Amplitude is large (B) Amplitude is less
cannot be attributed to roadside noise pollution? (C) Frequency is less (D) Frequency is more
(A) Plantation on the roadside 10. Mosquitos produce high pitch sound,
(B) Installing silencers in vehicles because_____.
(C) Regular servicing of engines (A) Their frequency of vibration is high
(D) Smoothening of roads (B) Their frequency of vibration is low
(C) Amplitude is low
IIT JEE Worksheet (D) Amplitude is high
I. Single Correct Answer Type II. Multiple Correct Answer Type
11. Which of the following produces sound?
1. Every source of sound is
(A) Beating of drums
(A) Vibrating Body (B) Stationary Body
(B) Heating an iron rod
(C) Moving Body (D) None (C) Vibrating strings
2. Sound travels fastest in (D) Movement of charges
(A) Gases (B) Liquids 12. Through which of the following media, sound can
(C) Solids (D) None propogate
3. The frequency of ultrasonic vibrations is (A) Air (B) Water
(A) < 20 Hz (B) 20Hz - 20,000 Hz (C) Iron rod (D) Vaccum
(C) > 20,000 Hz (D) None 13. Which of the following are the parts of a human
4. Sound produced by irregular vibrations of a material ear?
is (A) Retina (B) Cochlea
(A) Music (B) Noise (C) Cornea (D) Pinna
(C) Loudness (D) None 14. Which of the following statements are correct?
(A) The unit of frequency is Hertz
5. The conditions for hearing sound are
(B) The unit of time period is second.
(A) There must be a vibrating body to produce
(C) The unit of wave velocity is metere per
sound
second
(B) There must be a material medium to (D) Loudness of sound is expressed
propagate in decibels.
(C) There must be a receiver to receive the 15. Which of the following sounds cause noise
sound vibrations pollution?
(D) All (A) The sound coming from factories.
6. Why the thunder is heard after the flash of lightning (B) The sound created by heavy vehicles.
? (C) Cry of a child.
(A) Light travels very fast compared to sound (D) Cutting of vegetables.
(B) Sound travels very fast compared to light III. Paragraph Type
(C) Light and sound travel with same velocity Velocity of sound is given by the expression,
(D) None v=f× 
7. The Frequency of electric tuning fork is 8000 Hz. Where, v = velocity of the wave ;
Will this sound be audible ? f = frequency ;  = wavelength
(A) The sound will be audible Using the above information answer the following
(B) The sound will not be audible questions
(C) May or may not be audible
(D) None
www.betoppers.com
16. The velocity of sound in air is 344 m/sec. What is 19. The wavelength of the wave generated by a tuning
the wavelength of a sound wave of frequency fork of frequency 256 Hz. velocity of sound in air
32Hz? at ordinary conditions is 340 m/s is
(A) 9.75m (B) 10.75m (A) 1.33m (B) 2.3m
(C) 7.25m (D) 8.25m (C) 0.1m (D) 0.3m
17. A wave travels at a speed of 330 m/s. If the 20. A tuning fork produces 256 waves in 2 seconds.
wavelength is 2.2cm, what will be the frequency The frequency of the tuning fork is
of the wave? (A) 1.120 Hz (B) 125 Hz
(A) 15,000Hz (B) 14,500Hz (C) 128Hz (D) 130Hz
(C) 15,500Hz (D) 14,000Hz IV. Integer Type
18. Calculate the wavelength of radio waves of 21. The time period of oscillation is 1 second. Its
frequency 109Hz . The speed of radio waves is frequency = ______Hz.
3×108 m/s. 22. The time period of oscillation of a body is 0.25 sec.
(A) 20 cm (B) 35 cm Its time period is ________ seconds.
(C) 30 cm (D) 25 cm 23. The time period of seconds pendulum is _______
seconds.
V. Matrix Matching
24. (A) Audio vibrations of lower frequency (p) Audio Vibration
(B) Audio vibrations of higher frequency (q) Bass Effect
(C) Frequencies up to 40,000 Hz can heard by (r) Shrill Effect
(s) Dogs
(t) Dolphins
26. (A) Galton Whistle (p) Dolphins
(B) Bat (q) Dogs
(C) Ultrasonic Vibrations are used (r) Ultra sonic Vibration
(D) Reflection of Sound (s) For homogenising milk
(t) In Megaphone
27. (A) Frequency < 20 Hz (p) Ultrasonic
(B)Frequency 20 Hz - 20,000 Hz (q) infrasonic
(C) Frequency > 20, 000 Hz (r) Audible range
(s) Reflection of sound
(t) Absorption of sound
28. (A) Frequency (p) Mechanical form
(B) Amplitude (q) Reflected sound
(C) Time period (r) Maximum displacement of vibrating body
(D) Sound waves (s) Time taken to complete one vibration
(t) Hertz
29. (A) Sounds which have pleasing effect on ears (p) Amplitude & frequency of vibration
don’t change suddenly
(B) Sounds which do not have pleasing effect on ear (q) Music
(C) In Musical sounds (r) Irregular vibrations in a material
(D) Noise is produced due to (s) Noise
(t) Sound from construction site
30. (A) Veena, Guitar (p) Membrane instruments
(B) Mrudangam, Table (q) Wind instruments
(C) Flute, shahnai (r) Keyboard instrument
(D) Harmonium, Piano (s) Stringed Instruments
31. (A) Pitch (p) Amplitude
(B) Loudness (q) Frequency
(C) Two notes of same pitch and loudness (r) Quality
are distinguished by
www.betoppers.com 
Learning Outcomes Heat
Chapter - 04
7
 Temperature  Measuring of heat

 Measurement of Temperature  Conduction of Heat
 Thermometers  Convection of Heat
 Heat  Radiation of Heat
1. Temperature (iii) Dip the index finger of one hand in the ice-
cold water and that of theother hand in the
Mr. Raj was on his way home after office. The
hot water. Hold the fingers in the water for
sun was beating down and he was sweaty and
some time(for about a minute).
uncomfortable. As soon as he reached home, he
(iv) Then dip both the index fingers into the water
sat down for a while. Then he went straight to the
at room temperature.
refrigerator for a bottle of cool water.
Observation: You will find that to one finger, the
water feels hot and to the other it feels cold.
Conclusion: This is because the finger that was
in ice-cold water has become cold, and when it was
placed in the water at room temperature, it felt that
Why did the bottle of water feel cool while it the water was warm, relative to the earlier
was so hot outside? experience of ice-cold water.
The answer lies in the concept of temperature. Similarly, the finger that was first in hot water will
Temperature indicates the degree of ‘hotness’ feel the water at room temperature to be relatively
or ‘coldness’ of a body or a place. cold. So you see the terms ‘hot’ and ‘cold’ are
only relative terms. There always has to be a
An Experiment – Hot & Cold are relative reference body with respect to which we can say
Aim: To show that the terms ‘hot’ and ‘cold’ as whether a given body is hot or cold. Therefore, it is
we feel them are only relative terms. important that we use an instrument, rather than
Materials needed:Three glasses, hot water (as our own judgement to measure temperature.
hot as you can bear to dip your finger in), ice-cold
water, and water at room temperature. 2. Measurement of Temperature
We measure temperature with an instrument called
the thermometer. All thermometers measure
temperature by making use of some property of a
substance that varies with temperature. One such
property is the change in volume (expansion and
contraction) with temperature. The substance
which is generally used in a conventional
Hot wat er Water at room t emp Ice cold water thermometer is either mercury or alcohol.
Method
(i) Pour hot water, water at room temperature,
and the ice-cold water into three separate
glasses.
(ii) Keep the three glasses side by side on a table
with the glass containing water at room Temperature Scales
temperature in the middle. Just like we use different units to measure length
(like inch, centimetre, etc.), we use different units
to measure temperature. These different units are Conversion Formula
represented by different temperature scales. Here Two simple equations given below will help us to
is a simplified description of how a temperature scale convert one temperature scale to another.
scale is defined. Two reference temperatures are
 9
chosen and the difference between these two F =  C×  4  32
temperatures are divided into a certain number of  5
divisions. Each division is called one degree. The 5
most commonly used reference temperatures are C=  F  32  where F is for Fahrenheit and C is
9
the melting point of ice and the boiling point of water.
The two commonly used scales are the Celsius and for Celsius.
the Fahrenheit scales. There is a third scale, the 3. Thermometers
Kelvin scale which you will learn in higher classes.
I. Mercury Thermometer
I. Celsius Scale
In 1714, Gabriel Fahrenheit invented the first
This scale is indicated by °C [read as degree Celsius
mercury thermometer. Mercury is used in
(in honor of Anders Celsius) or degree 1 centigrade].
thermometers because of the following reasons:
On this scale the melting point of ice is taken as 0
• Mercury remains in the liquid state for a wide
°C and the boiling point of water as 100 °C. The
range of temperature.
difference between these two points is divided into
• It melts at – 38.87 °C and boils only at
100 degrees.
356.58°C.
II. Fahrenheit Scale • It is relatively easy to see because of its silvery
This scale is indicated by °F (read as degree grey colour.
Fahrenheit). On this scale, 32 °F is taken as the • It does not stick to glass.
melting point of ice and 212 °F as the boiling point • It has a fairly uniform rate of expansion for a
of water. The difference between these two points wide range of temperatures.
is divided into 180 degrees
II. Alcohol Thermometer

Thermometers in which alcohol is used have some
advantage over mercury thermometers. Alcohol is
cheaper and less harmful than mercury. Alcohol
thermometers can measure much lower
temperatures (up to -115 °C) than mercury.
However, the main disadvantage of using an alcohol
thermometer is that these thermometers can
measure temperature only up to 78 °C while
mercury thermometers can measure much higher
temperatures.
Reading a Conventional Thermometer

A laboratory thermometer is shown in. It consists
of a thin glass tube which is sealed at one end and
www.betoppers.com
Heat 111
has a bulb at the other end. The bulb is generally
filled with mercury or alcohol. Mercury appears as Formative Worksheet
a silvery grey line and alcohol looks like a red line in 1. A laboratory thermometer generally reads
the thermometer. To read the temperature on this temperature from i while a clinical thermometer
thermometer, you just read the number on the scale reads temperature from ii .
at the tip of the red or silvery grey line. Remember The information in which alternative completes the
to mention the unit used (Celsius or Fahrenheit). given statement?
The range of temperature which a laboratory (A) i ii
thermometer can measure is from -10°C to 110°C.
- 10°C to 35°C 42°C to 110°C
(B) i ii
- 10°C to 110°C 35°C to 42°C
(C) i ii
The thermometer used to measure our body
- 10°C to 42°C 35°C to 110°C
temperature is called a clinical thermometer.
It is generally a mercury thermometer, though (D) i ii
nowadays digital thermometers are becoming very 35°C to 42°C - 10°C to 110°C
popular.
Characteristic feature of Mercury 2. A metallic ball at 40°C is dropped in a vessel
Thermometer containing water at 20°C.
Which of the following statements corresponding
• There is a little arrow (at 98.4 or 98.6 °F)
to the above statement is correct?
showing the normal body temperature.
(A) There will be an increase in temperature of
• There is a constriction or ‘kink’ in the tube
both the ball and water.
near the bulb. This kink has been made to
(B) There will be a decrease in temperature of
ensure that the mercury in the thermometer
both the ball and water.
does not contract (and flow back into the bulb)
(C) Heat will flow from the ball to the water.
before the temperature has been read.
(D) Heat will flow from the water to the ball.
Precaution in handling Thermometer
3. A solid substance having a temperature of 90°C is
• Wash the thermometer well and dip it in an
kept in a beaker. Some water having temperature
antiseptic liquid before and after using it.
of 60°C is then poured into the beaker. After
• Be careful while using a thermometer. It can
sometime, the temperature of the water will be
break easily. Remember, mercury is a toxic
(A) 60°C (B) 90°C
substance.
(C) Below 60°C (D) Between 60°C and 90°C
Digital Thermometer
4. Which of the following graphs represents rate of
These days digital thermometers are used to cooling of hot water?
measure temperature. These thermometers do not (A) (B)
use mercury. The temperature is displayed as a
number.
Temperature
Temperature
Time Time
(C) (D)
Temperature
Temperature
Time Time
www.betoppers.com
5. The given table lists some materials as conductors
or insulators.
Conductor Insulator
Iron Copper
Aluminium Plastic
Which material is listed incorrectly in the table? How can one small division be read in the given
(A) Iron (B) Plastic thermometer?
(C) Copper (D) Aluminium
6. (A) 0.1°C (B) 0.5°C
Column A Column B (C) 0.05°C (D) 0.01°C
i Black shirt a Summers 4. What is the temperature range for a clinical
ii White shirt b Laboratory thermometer on the Fahrenheit scale?
thermometer (A) 94°F – 110°F (B) 90°F – 108°F
(C) 94°F – 108°F (D) 93°F – 109°F
iii - 10°C to 110°C c Clinical
5. Which of the following temperatures represents the
thermometer
average human body temperature?
iv 35°C to 42°C d Winters (A) 25°C (B) 30°C (C) 37°C (D) 48°C
The alternatives in the given table can be correctly 6. A i thermometer has a temperature range of ii
matched as The information in which alternative completes the
(A) i  d, ii  a, iii  c, iv  b given statement?
(A) i ii
(B) i  a, ii  d, iii  b, iv  c
(C) i  d, ii  a, iii  b, iv  c laboratory 37°C - 57°C
(D) i  a, ii  d, iii  c, iv  b (B) i ii
7. The body temperature of an animal is 86 °F. Express
clinical 35°C - 42°C
the same temperature in degree Celsius.
(C) i ii
8. The day temperature in Delhi on a hot day was 45
°C. Express this temperature in degree Fahrenheit. clinical 25°C - 45°C
9. Express the following temperatures on the (D) i ii
Fahrenheit Scale.
(a) 35 °C (b) 15 °C laboratory 40°C - 140°C
10. Express the following temperatures on the Celsius 7. Before a clinical thermometer is used, it should be
Scale. ensured that the mercury level is
(a) 95 °F (b) 41 °F (A) At 42ºC (B) At 37ºC
(C) Below 35ºC (D) Between 35ºC and 42ºC
Conceptive Worksheet 8. For an experiment, Mahima requires water at 80ºC.
1. What is the temperature range of a clinical Which type of thermometer can she use to measure
thermometer? the temperature of water?
(A) 32°C to 38°C (B) 35°C to 42°C (A) Only clinical thermometer
(C) 38°C to 45°C (D) 40°C to 45°C (B) Only laboratory thermometer
2. Which of the following units cannot be used to (C) Both clinical and maximum-minimum
measure temperature? thermometer
(A) Fahrenheit (B) Celsius (D) Both laboratory and maximum-minimum
(C) Kelvin (D) Pascal thermometer
3. In the given thermometer, the bigger marks read 4. Heat
one degree. Also, there are ten small divisions
Have you stirred hot tea or milk with a stainless
between them.
steel spoon? Next time you do this, leave the spoon
in the hot liquid for a little while. Now, touch the
handle of the spoon. What do you notice? The
handle of the spoon would have got a little warm.
www.betoppers.com
Heat 113
Why did the handle of the spoon become warm? 5. Measuring Heat
Just as we measure length in centimetres and
metres, heat energy (and any other form of energy
for that matter) is measured in calories or joules. In
the SI system (which you know is the international
standard for the system of units), heat energy is
measured in joules. The symbol used to represent
‘joule’ is ‘J’.
Note
When there is a difference in temperature Temperature is not energy. However, if we know
between two bodies, a certain type of energy the temperature of a substance, we can calculate
flows between them. This energy is called heat the amount of heat energy it contains.
energy.
When this heat energy flows into a body, it warms 6. Conduction of Heat
the body while if it flows out of a body, it cools the We now know that heat is a form of energy and
body. In other words, the hot body loses heat energy that it flows from a region of higher temperature to
while the cold body gains heat energy. a region of lower temperature. But how does this
Flow of Heat energy happen? The methods by which heat is transferred
Heat energy flows from a region of higher from one region to another are called the modes of
temperature to a region of lower temperature and heat transfer. There are three modes of heat
never in the other direction. transfer, namely, conduction, convection and
Heat flow continues till the temperatures of both radiation.
the hot and the cold body become the same (whose We know that the metal objects heat up when they
value will be somewhere in between the come in contact with hot solids or liquids. Just like
temperatures of the hot body and the cold body). the stainless steel spoon becoming hot when left in
a hot liquid. How do you think this happens?
The heat from the hot liquid moves to the
Flow of Heat Energy
stainless steel spoon by a process called
Hot body Cold Body
conduction.
Activity – Direction of Flow of Heat How does Conduction Occur?
Aim: To show that heat energy flows from a hot We know that matter is made up of tiny particles
body to a cold body. called atoms and molecules. We know that in solids,
Materials needed:A coin, tongs, boiling water, the particles are very tightly packed and they cannot
cold water, and two glasses. move around freely. However, they can vibrate
Method: about a fixed point. Let us take the example of a
1. Take two glasses and fill them to three-fourths metal rod being heated at one end by a flame. Heat
of the capacity with cold water. Boil water in increases the vibrations of the particles at that end
a vessel and drop a coin in the boiling water. of the rod which is in contact with the flame. These
Leave it for some time so that the coin gets particles collide (bump) and transfer their energy
really hot. to their more slowly moving neighbors further away
2. Ask an adult to use the pair of tongs to pick from the flame, and make them vibrate faster. They
up the hot coin and drop it in one of the in turn pass the vibration on to their neighbors even
glasses filled with water. further away from the flame, and so on. In this
3. After about 2 minutes, dip your finger in the manner, heat energy is transferred from one particle
two glasses, first in the glass without the coin to the next, although each individual particle remains
and then in the glass with the coin. in its original location. Conduction is the primary
Observation: You will observe that the water in mode of heat transfer through a solid.
the glass in which you dropped the hot coin will be Conduction of heat energy can occur within a body
warmer. or between two bodies when they are in contact
Conclusion: Heat energy has been transferred with each other. However, the rate of conduction
from the hot body (coin) to the cold body (water). of heat is different in different materials. Also some
www.betoppers.com
materials allow heat energy to flow through them 7. Convection of Heat
easily while others do not. This mode of heat transfer is seen in liquids and
Conductors & Insulators gases in which the molecules are less densely
The substances that conduct heat easily are called packed and are free to move. Consider the following
conductors. For example, metals are good example . When a vessel containing water is heated,
conductors of heat. after sometime, the water at the top of the vessel
Substances such as wood, straw, clay, rubber, also becomes hot. How does this happen?
glass, and Bakelite (a kind of plastic) do not The water at the bottom of the vessel gets hot, and
conduct heat very well and are called insulators. since hot water is lighter than cold water, it rises
Air and water are also poor conductors of heat. up, carrying the heat energy with it. The colder and
Some materials such as wool, fur, and bird feathers denser water on the top falls to the bottom of the
are good insulators because they trap air between vessel and gets heated in its turn. This process
their fibres. continues and results in a circulating stream of hot
Activity – Rate of Conduction and cold water. As a result, the “whole water in the
Aim: To demonstrate that the rate of conduction vessel gets heated. This method by which heat is
of heat is different for different materials. transferred by the mass movement of the liquid or
Materials needed:Rods of equal diameters and gas itself is called convection.
equal lengths made of aluminium, copper, and iron Activity – Convection Transfers Heat
(you will find these in your school lab), two wooden Aim: To show that heat transfer in water is
slabs, small metal balls, wax, and flame due to convection.
Method: Materials needed:A glass beaker made of heat-
1. Take two rods at a time, say, first the copper resistant glass/glass, test tube, candle, match box,
and aluminium rods. potassium permanganate crystals/artificial food
2. Stick the metal balls to the rods at equal colouring, and a spoon.
distances using wax. Method
3. Light the burner and make your observations. 1. Fill the beaker to the half way mark with clear
4. Repeat the experiment with iron and water.
aluminium. 2. Take a pinch of the potassium permanganate
Observation: You will see that the balls drop crystals/food colouring and drop it gently to
fastest for copper, then aluminium and slowest for the bottom of the beaker.
iron. 3. Let it settle for a few minutes.
Conclusion: Of the three metals, the rate of Observation: You will see that the water at the
conduction is highest for copper and the lowest for bottom of the beaker is coloured, but the water at
iron. the top is quite clear. Light the candle and pick up
Practical Applications of Conduction the beaker very gently and hold it on top of the
1. Both good and bad conductors are useful to candle flame. You will see columns of coloured liquid
us, depending on our needs. We use good rise up in the beaker.
conductors (metals) for making cooking Conclusion: This is due to convection. Water
utensils, and heat-resistant plastic for making molecules at the bottom get heated up and rise,
the handles for these vessels. carrying the heat energy with them.
2. We wear woolen clothes in winter because Practical Applications of Convection
wool is a bad conductor of heat. Thus, it helps 1. The principle of convection of heat can be used in
in retaining body warmth. The wool fibre has many applications.
a series of curls and these are called ‘crimps’. 2. When you want to warm a fluid, you should warm
These crimps create small air pockets. The it from below. If a room has to be warmed with a
greater the number of crimps, the greater is room heater, the heater should be placed at a lower
the number of air pockets which can hold and level, so that the room gets warmed evenly.
trap air. 3. Similarly, an air conditioner used for cooling a room
Thus, a thin layer of air is created which should be placed at a higher level.
insulates us from the cold weather and also 4. In olden times, buildings were designed where
prevents body heat from escaping into the windows and ventilators were cleverly placed so
surroundings. that the buildings were kept cool in summers.
www.betoppers.com
Heat 115
Sea Breeze and Land Breeze Observation: You will observe that you can feel
Sea Breeze: Convection plays a major role in the heat of the heater/bulb even when you do not
maintaining a moderate temperature in places near touch it.
the sea. Land masses (beach, coastal town, or city) Conclusion: Heat energy is reaching your hand
heat up much faster than water bodies (sea, ocean) from the heater/bulb in the form of radiation. In the
during daytime, and cool down much faster during above activity, you can confirm that the heat energy
the night. This difference in temperature sets up a reaching your hand is being carried by radiation and
wind pattern. During the day, the air above land not convection.
rises since it is warm and cooler air from over the Hold your hand a little below the bulb. The heat
sea flows in to take its place. This gives rise to a which you feel below the bulb is mostly due to
sea breeze (sometime in the afternoon) which cools radiation because hot air always rises up.
the land. Practical Applications of Radiation
Land Breeze: In the night, since land cools down 1. Heat radiations travel in vacuum and in air just like
much faster than the sea, the cooler air over land light rays. That is why electric room heaters have
flows out to take the place of warmer air over the mirrors behind the heating coil. This helps in
sea which rises, setting up a land breeze. focussing the heat from the heating coil in front of
the heater.
8. Radiation of Heat 2. Solar panels used in households for heating water,
Radiation is the form of heat transfer that can occur are designed to maximize the absorption of heat
in the absence of a medium. Thus, it is the mode of from the sun. A black metal sheet is used to increase
heat transfer through vacuum. While heat radiations heat absorption.
can travel through vacuum, they can also travel 3. A thermometer called the black bulb thermometer
through media such as air, water, etc. All bodies uses the principle of heating by radiation to measure
give out energy that travels in the form of radiation the amount of radiation received by sources such
(much like light) through space. Energy from the as the sun.
sun reaches us through radiation. Bodies that absorb Preventing Loss of Heat
this radiation become hot. A thermos flask is a very good example of how
Radiation of Heat & Colour heat loss by all three modes of heat transfer,
The amount of heat energy that is absorbed by a conduction, convection, and radiation, is minimized.
body depends on its colour. Bodies that are black Let us see how this is done. Heat loss due to
absorb more of radiated heat than white bodies. conduction is minimized by using insulating materials
We feel more comfortable wearing white and light- (like plastics) for the outer casing and the cap of
coloured clothes in summer. This is because white the thermos flask. The inner jar is a double-walled
clothes absorb comparatively less amount of heat bottle made of glass or stainless steel. The space
than dark clothes, and therefore keep us relatively between the two walls is a vacuum, so that heat
cooler. The reverse applies in winter; we are more loss due to conduction is minimized. This also
comfortable in dark clothes. This is because we reduces heat loss due to convection since there are
need to absorb as much heat as possible from our no air molecules to carry-away the heat. Heat loss
surroundings to keep ourselves warm, and dark due to radiation is minimized by making the surface
clothes absorb more heat than light-coloured ones. of the jar highly reflective, so that heat radiations
The converse is also true. Black and dark bodies are reflected back into the jar..
also radiate more heat than light-coloured bodies.
Activity – Radiation of Heat
Aim: To show radiation of heat.
Materials needed: A source of heat, like a room
heater or an electric bulb, and adult supervision.
Method:
1. Switch on the room heater or the electric bulb.
2. Wait for a few minutes, and put your hand
close to it without touching.
www.betoppers.com
16. i breeze blows during the ii from the
Formative Worksheet land to the sea.
11. In solids, heat flows from a i temperature to a The information in which alternative completes the
ii temperature by the process of iii . given statement?
The information in which alternative completes the (A) i ii (B) i ii
given statement?
(A) Land day Land night
i ii iii
(C) i ii (D) i ii
higher lower convection
(B) Sea day Sea night
i ii iii
17. i is a good conductor of heat, but ii is a bad
lower higher conduction
conductor of heat.
(C) i ii iii The information in which alternative completes the
higher lower conduction given statement?
(A) i ii (B) i ii
(D) i ii iii
Air aluminium Aluminium air
lower higher convection
(C) i ii (D) i ii
12. Four rods made up of glass, plastic, aluminium, and
wood are covered with wax at one end. The other Air iron Iron aluminium
ends of these rods are inserted in a container
18. During the daytime, the air over the land becomes
containing hot water.
__i_ and rises up. The cold air from the __ii__
starts moving towards the __iii__to fill the vacuum
created. This movement of air is known as __iv__.
given statements?
(A) i ii iii iv
The wax on which rod will melt first?
(A) Glass (B) Plastic hotter sea land sea breeze
(C) Wooden (D) Aluminium (B) i ii iii iv
13. Four pins (I, II, III, and IV) are fixed to a metallic
rod with the help of wax. The rod is heated at one hotter land sea land breeze
end. (C) i ii iii iv
cooler sea land sea breeze
(D) i ii iii iv
cooler sea land land breeze
19. Four rods made of iron, wood, paper, and plastic
Which of the following pins would drop first? are connected by a straight metallic rod, as shown
(A) I (B) II (C) III (D) IV in the given figure. The rods are heated by a hot
14. Kitchen utensils are provided with a copper base filament placed near them. After sometime, it is
because observed that the temperature of the iron rod is more
(A) Copper base increases their durability than that of the other three rods.
(B) Copper base makes them attractive
(C) Copper is a good conductor of heat
(D) Copper is a bad conductor of heat
15. A litre of water at 50°C is mixed with another litre
of water at 70°C. What will be the temperature of
the mixture?
(A) 20°C (B) 120°C Heat transfer within the rods takes place by
(C) Between 50 °C and 70 °C (A) Conduction (B) Convection
(D) More than 70 °C, but less than 120 °C (C) Radiation (D) Induction
www.betoppers.com
Heat 117
20. When a layer of air receives enough heat from 10. When an ice cube is kept on the palm, it starts
Earth’s surface, it expands and becomes less dense. melting because
This layer is then pushed upward by buoyancy. The (A) Of the presence of sweat on the palm
cool and heavy air sinks under this layer. This cycle (B) Of the atmospheric and body pressure on the
repeats with the re-heating of the cool air. ice cube
The phenomenon described in the preamble is (C) The heat energy of the palm gets transferred
known as to the ice cube
(A) Radiation (B) Induction (D) The heat energy of the ice cube gets transferred
(C) Conduction (D) Convection to the palm
21. Heat transfer by the process of i requires 11. Which of the following substances is an insulator?
medium while no medium is required for the heat (A) Iron (B) Steel
transfer by the process of ii . (C) Plastic (D) Aluminium
The information in which alternative completes the 12. Which of the following statements is incorrect
given statement? regarding the process of conduction?
(A) i ii (A) There should be no medium.
(B) The objects should be solid in state.
radiation convection
(C) Two objects should be in contact with each
(B) i ii other.
convection conduction (D) The temperature of the objects should be
different.
(C) i ii 13. Which of the following examples is not an
conduct ion convection application of the process of convection?
(D) (A) Ventilation in houses
i ii
(B) Land breeze and sea breeze
convection radiation (C) Central heating of buildings
22. Convection is a process of heat transfer by the actual (D) Wooden handles of cooking utensils
movement of molecules. Convection can take place 14. Which colour would you prefer to wear in
only in I and II . Heat transfer by III can summers?
take place without any medium. (A) White (B) Purple (C) Black (D) Red
The given statements are correctly completed by 15. Which of the following methods of heat transfer
alternative does not involve the movement or vibration of
(A) I II III particles?
(A) Radiation (B) Circulation
solids liquids radiation (C) Convection (D) Conduction
(B) I II III 16. Ravi kept some water for boiling for making tea.
To mix sugar, he stirred it with a spoon. After some
solids gases conduction
time, he observed that the temperature of the other
(C) I II III end of the spoon had changed.
liquid gases radiation How did the temperature of the spoon change?
(A) It became hot by the process of conduction.
(D) I II III (B) It became cold by the process of conduction.
liquids solids conduct ion (C) It became hot by the process of convection.
(D) It became cold by the process of convection
C onceptive W orksheet 17. On a sunny afternoon, Ram has to go out. His
mother gives him umbrella to make him feel
9. Which of the following statements is incorrect? comfortable. Ram feels comfortable under the
(A) With heating, the temperature increases umbrella because
(B) With cooling, the temperature decreases (A) Material of umbrella reflects heat
(C) Temperature is the measure of degree of (B) Atmosphere under the umbrella absorbs heat
hotness of a body (C) Umbrella prevents the heat from reaching Ram
(D) Heat always flows from a low temperature to (D) Atmosphere under the umbrella slowly transmits
high temperature body heat to the body
www.betoppers.com
5. Some examples of transfer of heat are
Summative Worksheet I. Heat felt from a bonfire
1. Ramesh fills a black and a white-coloured container II. Shaking hands with someone
with an equal amount of water and leaves them in III. Heating a pot containing water
mid-day sun for about an hour. When he checks IV. An ice cube cooling down the hand of its holder
the temperature of water in both the containers using Which of the given examples are examples of heat
a thermometer, he finds that the water in the black- transfer by conduction?
coloured container is hotter. Which of the following (A) I and III (B) I and II
statements cannot be concluded from the given (C) II and IV (D) I, III, and IV
activity? 6. Which of the following instances involves heat
(A) Dark-coloured clothes are preferred during transfer by conduction?
summers. (A) Formation of land and sea breezes
(B) Light-coloured clothes should not be worn in (B) Heating a room using a heat convector
winters (C) Container with white surface getting cold in
(C) Dark-coloured clothes are bad reflectors. shade
(D) Light-coloured clothes are bad absorbers (D) Measuring the temperature of a sick person
2. Which of the following statements is not true? with a thermometer
(A) Loss and gain of heat by human body takes 7. The process of conduction
place by radiation. (A) Generally occurs in gases
(B) Heat is transferred from the sun to the Earth (B) Requires a medium for heat transfer
by radiation. (C) Is a measure of the hotness of solids
(C) Heat transfer by radiation requires a medium. (D) Occurs when water is heated in a beaker
(D) All hot bodies radiate heat. 8. A teacher asked four of his students to measure
3. Which table correctly matches the mode of transfer the temperature of tap water in a beaker. His
of heat in air and an iron nail? students Prateek, Qaif, Romila, and Suraj measured
(A) Object Mode of transfer of heat the temperature, as shown in the given figure.
Water Convection
Iron nail Conduction
(B) Object Mode of transfer of heat
Water Convection
Iron nail Convection
Who placed the thermometer correctly to obtain
(C) Object Mode of transfer of heat the result?
Water Conduction (A) Prateek (B) Qaif (C) Romila (D) Suraj
9. Four people, P, Q, R, and S, had gone for a checkup
Iron nail Conduction
to a medical camp. The doctors present there
(D) Object Mode of transfer of heat measured their body temperatures using four
Water Conduction different thermometers. The readings on the
thermometers are shown in the given figure.
Iron nail Convection
4. Which of the following statements regarding land
and sea breezes is correct?
(A) Land as well as sea breeze is caused by
convection.
(B) Land as well as sea breeze is formed by
conduction.
(C) Sea breeze is formed by radiation, while land
breeze is formed by convection.
(D) Land breeze is formed by radiation, while sea Whose temperature matches with the normal body
breeze is formed by conduction. temperature of a healthy human being?
(A) S (B) P (C) Q (D) R
www.betoppers.com
Heat 119
10. The given figure represents the thermometer with 14. When an ice cube is kept on the palm, it starts
which a doctor has just measured the temperature melting because
of a patient. (A) Of the presence of sweat on the palm
(B) Of the atmospheric and body pressure on the
ice cube
(C) The heat energy of the palm gets transferred
to the ice cube
(D) The heat energy of the ice cube gets
transferred to the palm
15. For an experiment, Mahima requires water at 80ºC.
Which type of thermometer can she use to measure
the temperature of water?
What is the temperature of the body of the patient? (A) Only clinical thermometer
(A) 39°C (B) 39°F (B) Only laboratory thermometer
(C) 39.6°F (D) 39.6°C (C) Both clinical and maximum-minimum
11. The device used for measuring the degree of hotness thermometer
of an object is called a (D) Both laboratory and maximum-minimum
(A) Telescope (B) Barometer thermometer
(C) Thermometer (D) Stethoscope
12. The temperatures of liquids I, II, III, and IV were H
OTS W orksheet
measured using a thermometer. The various readings 1. Fill in the blanks with the correct words.
that the thermometer displayed are shown in the a. The degree of hotness or coldness of a body
given figure. is called ___________.
b. Heat is a form of ____________.
c. Heat energy is measured in ___________.
2. Write true or false.
(A) Temperature is a form of energy.
(B) Heat energy flows from a hot body to a cold
body.
(C) Temperature is measured in joules.
(D) When heat energy flows into a body it warms
the body.
The decreasing order of the given liquids according 3. Which of these thermometers would you use to
to their hotness is measure body temperature?
(A) (I)> (II) > (III) > (IV) (A) Alcohol thermometer
(B) (II) > (I)> (III) > (IV) (B) Laboratory thermometer
(C) (IV) > (III) > (I)> (II) (C) Clinical thermometer
(D) (III)> (IV) > (II) > (I) (D) Any mercury thermometer
13. Ravi kept some water for boiling for making tea. 4. Heat energy will flow from our body to the
To mix sugar, he stirred it with a spoon. After some surroundings if
time, he observed that the temperature of the other (A) The surroundings are at a higher temperature
end of the spoon had changed. than our body.
How did the temperature of the spoon change? (B) The surroundings are at the same temperature
(A) It became hot by the process of conduction. as our body.
(B) It became cold by the process of conduction. (C) The surroundings are at a lower temperature
(C) It became hot by the process of convection. than our body.
(D) It became cold by the process of convection. (D) There is no relationship between heat flow and
temperature.
www.betoppers.com
5. Give one point of difference between the following The information in which alternative completes the
a) A Clinical Thermometer and a Mercury given statement?
Thermometer (A) i ii (B) i ii (C) i ii (D) i ii
b) Celsius scale and Fahrenheit scale X 50°C Y 40°C X 60°C Y 30°C
6. The given figures show the change in temperature 9. The body temperatures of four people W, X, Y, and
of ice when it is heated. Z were taken using four different thermometers
I, II, III,and IV respectively. The reading of each
thermometer is shown in the given figure.
Among the four people, the body temperature of i
is the highest and is equal to ii .
ice at –2°C water at 10°C

What is the change in temperature as ice converts
to water?
(A) 2°C (B) 5°C (C) 10°C (D) 12°C
7. Charles heats some water in a beaker and then
measures the temperature of water using a
thermometer. After this, he keeps the water away
from the burner for two hours and then again
measures the temperature of water. The information in which alternative completes the
given statement?
(A) i ii (B) i ii
W 39.4°C X 37.0°C
(C) i ii (D) i ii
Y 37.8°C Z 39°C
10. Define the following:

(a) Conduction (b) Convection (c) Radiation
80°C 30°C 11. Conduction, convection, and radiation are
What is the total decrease in the temperature of (A) Different modes of heat energy
water? (B) Different modes of heat transfer
(A) 30ºC (B) 50ºC (C) 60ºC (D) 80ºC (C) Different measures of temperature
8. Sujit took two beakers I and II containing equal (D) All of these
amounts of two different liquids X and Y
respectively. He heated both liquids for 30 seconds. 12. Convection does not occur in
He then kept both the beakers away from the heat (A) Vacuum (B) Liquids
source for 5 minutes. He then measured the (C) Gases (D) Air
temperature of X and Y as shown in the given figure. 13. In fluids, heat transfer takes place primarily due to
The temperature of liquid i is lower after the (A) Conduction (B) Convection
removal of the heat source, and the decrease in its (C) Radiation (D) None
temperature is ii . 14. Give one point of difference between the following.
a) Conduction of heat and Convection
b) Conductors and Insulators
15. Which of these is a good conductor of heat?
(A) Wood (B) Straw (C) Water (D) Copper
16. Which of these is a bad conductor of heat?
(A) Wool (B) Gold
(C) Copper (D) Stainless steel
After heating After removing the

heat source
www.betoppers.com
Heat 121
17. Name the mode of heat transfer in each of the 5. A steel cup at 400oC is dropped in a container of
following cases: water at 40oC, then
(a) In a vessel of boiling water. (A) Heat will flow from cup to water
(b) Heat energy reaching us from the sun. (B) Heat will not flow from cup to water or from
(c) A vessel kept on a hot stove becomes hot. water to cup
(d) Warm breeze from the land flows towards the (C) Heat flow from water to cup
sea. (D) The temperature of cup increases
(e) A spoon kept in a hot tea cup becomes warm. 6. Normal temperature of human body is
18. a) Name the mode of heat transfer from one body (A) 37oC (B) 98.4oF
to another where it is essential for the two (C) Both (D) None
bodies to be in contact. 7. Which of the following is NOT correct in ‘heat
b) Name the mode of heat transfer that can take transmission through conduction’ ?
place even in vacuum. (A) Heat flows only when one end of an object is
19. Give reasons. hot and other end is cold.
a) Woolen clothes are worn in winter. (B) When heat is flowing through two objects they
b) Light cotton clothes are worn in summer. must remain in contact with one another.
20. a) Why is mercury used in thermometers? Give (C) Once the two ends of the object through which
three reasons. heat is flowing attain the same temperature
b) List the special features of a mercury clinical conduction of heat stops.
thermometer. (D) In conduction, heat is transferred through the
21. Match the following. moving particles of medium from one place to
Column A Column B another.
(A) Insulator p. Unit of heat energy 8. Heat transmission through convection does not take
(B) Energy q. Good conductors place in
(C) Fahrenheit r. Rubber (A) Liquids (B) Gases
(D) Joule s. Thermometer (C) Solids (D) None
(E) Metals t. Heat 9. While sitting near a heater or a bonfire, you feel
warm. The heat from the heater reaches you by
IIT JEE Worksheet _____ process
I. Single Correct Answer Type (A) Conduction (B) Radiation
(C) Convection (D) All
1. Which body feels hot ?
10. Handles of electrical appliances and cooking utensils
(A) A body losing heat
are made from ?
(B) A body gaining heat
(A) Bakelite (B) Plastics
(C) Both
(C) Wood (D) All
(D) None
2. Under what condition the flow of heat is rapid. II. Multiple Correct Answer Type
(A) One of the two bodies is too hot 11. Choose the correct statements:
(B) One of the two bodies is too cold (A) S.I. unit of temperature is kelvin
(C) There is a big difference in the temperature (B) Temperature is a scalar quantity.
of two bodies
(C) S.I. unit of heat is joule(J).
(D) All
3. __ is the physical quantity which measures the (D) 1 cal = 4.2 J
amount of heat in a body. 12. Mercury is the commonly used thermometric liquid
(A) Temperature (B) Energy because
(C) Mass (D) None (A) It can be easily obtained in pure state
4. One litre of water at 30 o C is mixed with one (B) It does not stick to glass tube thermometer
litre of water at 60o C, the temperature of the (C) It has a very high density
mixture will be
(D) It has very low freezing point and a very high
(A) 90oC (B) > 60oC but < 90oC
o boiling point.
(C) 30 C (D) Between 30oC & 60oC
www.betoppers.com
13. Choose the correct option : 20. The scale on which ice point is taken as 273 K and
(A) Temperature is a scalar quantity steam point is taken as 373K.
(B) Heat energy is also called thermal energy (A) Celsius scale (B) Fahrenheit scale
(C) The device for measuring the temperature of (C) Kelvin scale (D) Reaumur scale
a substance is called a thermometer
IV. Integer Type
(D) Temperature of a body decides the direction
of heat flow from the body 21. 1 kilo calorie = _________ calories
14. Choose the correct option : 22. Ice point in Fahrenheit is ______°F
(A) Two bodies of same substance having different V. Matrix Matching
masses may have same temperature but
different amount of heat 23. A) Temperature (p) Energy
(B) Two bodies of same substance having different B) Heat (q) 0oC - 100oC
masses may have same amount of heat but C) Centigrade Scale (r) Force
different temperature (s) Measurement of
Energy
(C) Heat contents of a body do not decide the
direction of heat flow from the body 24. A) Silver, Copper, Lead, Iron (p) Solids
(D) The thermometer which has mercury as the B) Wood, Wool, Bakelite, (q) Fluids
thermometric liquid is called mercury Plastics
thermometer C) Convection (r) Conductors
(s) Insulators
III. Paragraph Type
Paragraph-I 25. A) Process due to (p) To measure
which a solid directly very low change
Temperature can be measured in °C and °F
into gaseous state
15 The boiling point of water is temperature
(A) 180°C (B) 12°C B) Alcohol thermometer (q) Sublimation
(C) 40°C (D) 100°C C) Liquid metal (r) To measure high
16. The melting point of ice is temperature
(A) 0°C (B) 273°C 26. A) Land breeze blows (p) Summer
(C) 40°C (D) 100°C during
17. Normal temperature of human body is B) Sea breeze blows during (q) Winter
C) Dark colour clothes are (r) day
(A) 98.4ºF (B) 120ºF
preferred during
(C) 80ºF (D) 37ºF (s) Night
Paragraph-II
For measuring temperature Celsius scale,
Fahrenheit scale , Kelvin scale and Reaumur scale 
may be used.
18. The scale on which ice point is taken as 0°C and
steam point is taken as 100°C is
(A) Celsius scale (B) Fahrenheit scale
(C) Kelvin scale (D) Reaumur scale
19. The scale on which ice point is taken as 32°F and
steam point is taken as 212°F.
(A) Celsius scale (B) Fahrenheit scale
(C) Kelvin scale (D) Reaumur scale
www.betoppers.com
IIT FOUNDATION
Class VII
PHYSICS
SOLUTIONS
© USN Edutech Private Limited
The moral rights of the author’s have been asserted.
This Workbook is for personal and non-commercial use only and must not be sold, lent, hired or given
to anyone else.
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or
transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise
without the prior written permission of USN Edutech Private Limited. Any breach will entail legal
action and prosecution without further notice.
Utmost care and attention to the details is taken while editing and printing this book. However, USN
Edutech Private Limited and the Publisher do not take any legal responsibility for any errors or
misrepresentations that might have crept in.
Published by : USN Eductech Private Limited

Hyderabad, India.
CONTENTS
1. Measurement .......... 123 - 132
2. Motion .......... 133 - 144
3. Light .......... 145 - 154
4. Electric Current & Its Effects .......... 155 - 164
5. Wind, Storm and Cyclones .......... 165 - 170
6. Sound .......... 171 - 178
7. Heat .......... 179 - 184

1. MEASUREMENT
SOLUTIONS
FORMATIVE WORKSHEET
KEY
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
C C A C A,B, B A B A B * A B,C B B
C,D
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
* * B D B C A * * C C D C A A
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
* * A B * * C A D A D * D C C
46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
D C C C B C B C * A B B D C A
61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75
B C A C B A * D A B * C D B C
76 77
D A
HINTS/ SOLUTIONSTO THE SELECTED QUESTIONS

8. 1 hectare = 104 cm2
10kg 10  1000 g
4.  3 9. 1 gcm–3 = 1000 kgm–3
m3 102 cm  1kgm–3 = 10–3 gcm–3
= 10 × 10–3 g cm–3  16 kgm–3 = 16 × 10–3 gcm–3
= 10–2 g cm–3 10. 1 nanogram = 10–9g
6. 100 quintal = ____ ng 1 milligram = 10–3 g
1 quitanl = 100kg 1nanogram 109 g
  3  106
 100 quintal = 100 × 100 kg 1milligram 10 g
= 107 g
–9
1 ng = 10 g  1 nanogram = 10–6 milligram (or) x = –6
11. 1 giga = 109
1quintal 107 g 1 micro = 10–6
  9
1ng 10 g 1 mega = 106
 1 quintal = 1016 ng. 1 pico = 10–12
7. 1 day = 24 hours  A  r; B  s; C  p; D  t
= 24 × 60 min 16. A  q; B  p; c  t
= 24 × 60 × 60s 17. (A) Derived unit  Newton
(B) Fundamental unit  Kilogram
1 (C) Derived quantity  Area
1second = days
24  60  60 (D) Fundamental quantity  Height and thickness
1
 days
86400
18. 1 km = 1000 m (iv) 1 decimetre = _________ centimetre

1 m = 100 cm 1 decimetre = 10–1 m
1 cm = 10 mm 1 centimetre = 10–2 m
 1km > 1m > 1cm > 1mm 1 decimetre 101
19. Number of turns (n) = 24 
Length of the coil (L) = 4.8cm 1 centimetre 102
 1 decimetre = 10 centimetre
L 4.8 25. 1 quintal = 100 kg
Diameter   cm
n 24 1 ton = 100 kg
= 0.2cm (or) 2mm
1Quintal 100
20. Distance = 3250 m  
1000 m = 1km 1ton 1000
 1 quintal = 10–1 ton
3250 = 0.1 ton
3250 m  km
1000 26. 1 metric tonne = 1000 kg
= 3.25 km 1 mg = 10–3 g
21. h = 1.65 m
1 metric tonne 1000  1000 g
1m = 100 cm  
= 1000 mm ( 1cm = 10 mm) 1 mg 103 g
 1.65 m = 1.65 × 1000 mm 1 metric tonne = 106 × 103 g
= 1650 mm = 109 g
22. Diameter of the ball = x2 – x1 27. 1 microsecond = 10–6 s
= 4.7 – 3.4 1 millisecond = 10–3 s
= 1.3 cm
1 micro second 106
23. (i) 1 cm = 10 mm  
(ii) 1 dm = 10–1 m 1 milli second 103
(iii) 1 kilometre = 1000 m  1 micro second = 10–3 milli second.
(iv) 1 m = 100 cm  x = –3
24. (i) 1 deca metre = _________ decimetre 28. 1 tonne = 1000 kg
1 decametre = 10m 1
1 decimetre = 10–1m 1kg  tonne
1000
10 = 10–3 tonne
 1 decametre  decimetre
29. 1 tonne = 1000 kg
101
= 100 decimetre  4.4 tonnes = 4.4 × 103 kg
(ii) 1 millimetre = ________ centimetre 30. 6 hours = 6 × 60 min
1mm = 10–3 m = 6 × 60 × 60 s
1 cm = 102 m = 21600 s
8 min = 8 × 60 s
1mm 103 = 480 s
 
1cm 102  6 hours + 8min = (21600 + 480)s
 1mm = 10–3 × 10–2 cm = 22080 sec
= 10–5 cm 31. 1 min = 60 s
(iii) 1 hectometre = ________ kilometre 1 day = 24 hours
1 hectometre = 100m 1 year = 365 days
1 kilometre = 1000m 1 century = 100 years
1 hectometre 100  The right match is ABCD / srqp.
  32. 1 hour = 60 min
1 kilometre 1000
1 day = 24 hours = 1440 min
 1 hectometre = 10–1km 1 year = 365 days = 8760 hours
= 0.1 km 1 century = 100 years = 3650 days
www.betoppers.com
Measurement Solutions 125
33. 1 decade = 10 years 38. Plank’s time (tp) = 5.32 × 10–44 s

 x = 10 1 century = 100 years
1 century = 100 years But 1 year = 365 × 86400 s
= 10 decades 1C 100  365  86400
 y = 10 
1t p 5.32  10 44
1 millenium = 10 centuries
 z = 10 1C 31.53  108
x:y:z=1:1:1  
t p 5.32  10 44
1 minute 60 s
34.  1 1C
60 s 60 s   5.9  1052
tp
60 minutes 60 minutes
 1
1 hour 60 minutes  1C  5.9  1052 tp
x  11  2 39. Time period = tAB + tBA + tAC + tCA
But tAB = tBA = tAC = tCA = 0.5 sec
1 decade 10 years
 1  Time period = 4 × 0.5 sec = 25sec
10 years 10 years 40. Time period is the time taken to complete 1 oscillation
10 decades 10 decades 1
 1  Time taken to complete oscillation
1 century 10 decades 2
y 1 1  2 Time period 2
   1s
x + y = 2 + 2 2 2
=4 41. Time period of a simple pendulum is independent of
35. Total amount = 6.023 × 1023 the mass of the bob of the pendulum.
No. of years left = 90 – 45 = 45 years  Time period = 5 seconds
Rate of donation = 5000 dollars / sec 42. Time period of a pendulum depends on the length
To find out the total amount he can donate in 45 of the pendulum.
years, we need to find the number of seconds in 45 Greater the length, Greater is the time period.
years As the length is increased, time period also
= 45 × 365 × 24 × 60 × 60 increases.
= 1419120000 s Increase in mass of the bob has no effect on the
time period of the pendulum.
 1.419 × 109 s
As he can donate 5000 dollars per second, the total 43. 1cm2 = ________ m2 .
amount he can donate in 45 years is: 1
5000 × 1.419 × 109 1 cm  m
100
= 7 × 1012
2
Hence, he cannot empty his health 45 years.  1
2 
1cm   m
36. Speed of rabbit = 1 m/s  100 
Speed of ant = 1mm/s = 10–3 m/s
Distance covered by ant = 1 m 1 2
 m
time taken = ? 104
distance 1m = 10–4 m2
t  3  103 s 44. 2
1 km = 100 hectares
speed 10 m/s
45. 1 km2 = (1000m)2 = 106 m2
37. 1 day = 24 hours 1 hectare = 100 Acres = 104 m2
1 year = 365 days So, both the given statements are correct.
 16 years = 16 × 365 days 46. 1m × 1m = 1m2 = 1 sq.m
= 5840 days 47. l = 20 m
But 1 day = 24 hours b = 12 m
 16 years = 5840 × 24 hours Area = lb = 20 × 12 = 240 m2
= 140160 hours
www.betoppers.com
48. l = 400 m
b = 100 m 54. Outer dimensions of rectangular box are 40 cm,
Area = _______ hectares 36 cm, 21 cm.
Area of the play ground = 400 × 100  thickness of the box = 0.5 cm
= 4 × 104 m2  The inner dimensions of the box are
4 2
But 10 m = 1 hectare (40 – 1)cm (36 – 1) cm (21 – 1)cm
 4 × 104 m2 = 4 hectares (subtract twice the thickness from the outer
49. l = 6 cm dimensions)
b = 5cm Hence the outer volume of the box = 40 × 36 × 21
Area = lb = 6 × 5 = 30 cm2 = 30240 cubic cm
50. (i) 1 hectare = 104 m2 The inner volume of the box = 39 × 35 × 20 =
 1m2 = 10–4 hectare 27300 cubic cm
 x = 10–4 Volume of the metal sheet = 30240 – 27300 =
(ii) 1 km2 = 100 hectare 2940 cubic cm
55. v = 5 × 4 × 3 = 60 cm3
1
 1 hectare  km 2 56. Volume of the stone = Final volume = Initial volume
100 = 125 – 75 = 50cm2
= 10–2 km2 57. New reading = 50 + 80 = 130 cm3
 y = 10–2 km2 58. 12 = 3 × 2 × h
(iii) 1km = 1000 m
= 1000 × 100 cm 12
h   2cm
= 1000 × 100 × 10 mm 6
 1km = 106 mm 59. V = 0.003 km × 0.03 m × 3 cm
(or) = 300 cm × 3 cm × 3cm
1 km2 = (106 mm)2 = 2700 cm3
= 1012 mm2 60. Initial volume = Final volume – Volume of stone
(or) = 9.3 – 5.8
= 3.5 ml
 1 
1mm2   12  km 2 61. 5cm3 = __________ mm3
 10  5cm3 = 5 × (10 mm)3
= 10–12 km2 = 5 × 1000 mm3
 z = 10–12 km2 62. Both the statements are correct.
51. Both the given statements are correct 63. Mass = 232 g
52. l = 20 cm Volume = 20 cm3
b = 18 cm mass
h = 5cm Density 
Since, we need volume in MKS system, we have volume
to express all the above units in MKS system. 232
  11.6g/cc
 l = 20 × 10–2 m = 2 × 10–1 m 20
b = 18 × 10–2 m 64. Mass = 4kg = 4000 g
h = 5 × 10–2 m [ Km = 10–2 m] Volume = 5 litre = 5000 ml
V = lbh = 5000 cc
= (2 × 10–1) (18 × 10–2) (5 × 10–2)
= (2) (18) (5) × 10–5 4000
d  0.8g/cc
= 180 × 10–5 5000
= 1.8 × 10–3 cubic metre. 65. Volume = 555 cm3
53. l = 30 m = 30 × 102 cm Density = 7.6 g/cm3
b = 28 m = 28 × 102 cm mass
h = 12 m = 12 × 102 cm Density 
V = lbh volume
= (30 × 102) (28 × 102) (12 × 102)  Mass = volume × density
= 30 × 28 × 12 × 106 = 10080 × 106 cm3 = 555 × 7.6 = 4218 g = 4.218 kg
www.betoppers.com
66. 500 kg/m3 = ________ g/cm3 77. r = 7cm
m = 490 g
1000 g
1kg/m3  3 d=?
10 cm 
2
m
d
100 g v

106 cm3 4
= 10–3 g/cm–3 v  πr 3
3
 500 kg/m3 = 500 × 10–3 gcm3
= 0.5 g/cm3 4 22
  7 7 7
67. 1kg / m = 10 g / cm3
3 –3 3 7
1000 4  22  49 3
68. Density   1g/cc  cm
1000 3
Density of the substance 490
69. RD  Density of water at 4 °C d
4  22  49
70. Relative density has no units. 3
1 kg/m3 = 10–3 g/cm3 (or) 490  3
1 g/cm3 = 1000 kg/m3 
4  22  49
Hence statement I is false and statement II is true.
71. a-4, 5; b-1; c-2; d-3 = 0.340 g/cm3
72. Density of a substance in SI system = 0.340 × 1000 kg/m3
= D relative density × density of water in SI system = 340 kg/m3
= k × 103 kg/m3
= 1000 k kg/m3
73. Volume of air = 3 × 4 × 5 m3 = 60 m3
Density of air = 1.3 kg/m3
Mass = Volume × density
= (60 × 1.3) kg
= 78 kg
74. l = 0.8m
A = 0.45m2
d = 7800 kg/m3
m=?
M=v×d
=A× l × d
= (0.45 × 0.8 × 7800)kg
= 2808 kg
234
75. d g/cm3
30
= 78 g/cm3 (or) 78 × 103 kg/m3
76. m = 2kg
v = 2 litre = 2000 ml
= 2000 cm3
= 2000 × (10–2m)3
= 2000 × 10–6 m3
= 2 × 10–3 m3
2
d 3
kg/m3 = 103 kg/m3
2  10
www.betoppers.com
CONCEPTIVE WORKSHEET
KEY
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
B C B C A A A B D D D D D B A
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
C C D A D C A C A D B B A A C
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
C A A * D D B * A D * A C B C
46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
A D A B C B A A A D B B A A A
61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75
C A A A A D D BD A D D A C C C
76 77 78
B B D
HINTS/ SOLUTIONSTO THE SELECTED QUESTIONS
20. 0.4 m2 = ___________ km2

15. 1 nano metre = 10–9 m 0.4m2 = 0.4 × (10–2 m)2
= 10–9 × 102 cm = 0.4 × 10–4 m2
= 10–7 cm = 4 × 10–3 m2
2 –2 2
18. 1cm = (10 m) = 4 × 10–3 × (10–3 km)2
= 10–4 m2 = 4 × 10–3 × 10–6 km2
= 10–4 (10–3 km)2 = 4 × 10–9 km2
= 10–4 × 10–6 km2
21. 1μg  106 g
= 10–10 km2
1km2 = 100 hectares 23. 4 km = 4 × 103 m
 10 km2 = 10–10 × 100 hectares
–10 24. 1 cm = 10mm
= 10–8 hectares  15 cm = 15 × 10mm
16. a = 51840 km/h2 = ___________ m/s2 = 150 mm
26. 1km = 1000 m
km 51840  103 m = 1000 × 102 cm
51840 
h2  3600s 
2
= 105 cm
27. 1mm < 1cm < 1m < 1km
51840  103 m 30. 1 km = 1000 m
 m/s 2
3600  3600 1μm  106 m
5184
 1km 103 m
36  36  
1μm 106 m
5184
  4m/s 2  1km  103  106 μm
1296
 109 μm
www.betoppers.com
34. (A) Water clock = Flow of water (q) HINTS/ SOLUTIONSTO THE SELECTED
(B) Sun dial = Sand (p) QUESTIONS
(C) Hour glass = shadow (r)
35. Light year is the distance travelled by light in one mass 232
1. d   11.6g/cc
year. volume 20
38. 1 oscillation = Time period = 2s
2. M =v×d
1
oscillation = 1 second = 555 × 7.6
2
= 4218 g
1
oscillation = 0.5 second = 4.218 kg
4
4 oscillation = 2 × 4 seconds 3. A = 500 × 120 m2
= 8 seconds
= 60000 m2
40. Time = 18 hour. 15 min *(24 hr. clock)
Time in 12 hour clock = 6 hectare
= (18 – 12) . 15 min 4. Weight of 1kg body = 1 kg wt
= 6.15 min PM
41. (i) century 1 tonne = 1000 kg
(ii) millenium  Weight of 1 tonne body = 1000 kg.wt
(iii) Christian Huygens
(iv) second 5. dcgs = 13.6g/cc
46. 1cm2 = _______mm dSI = 13.6 × 103 kg/m3
1cm2 = 1(10mm)2
= 1 × 102 mm2 density in SI system 8900
= 102 mm2 6. RD    8.9
1000 1000
76. We know
1g/cm3 = 1000 kg/m3 7. Seconds pendulum  T = 2 seconds
 1kg/m3 = 10–3 g/cm3 Time taken to complete 10 oscillation = 10T
 800 kg/m3 = 800 × 10–3 g/cm3
= 10 × 2 = 20 seconds
= 0.8 g/cm3
3
77. 20 cm = 54 g mass 100
8. d 
54 volume 2cm  4cm  5cm
1 cm3  g
20
= 2.7g 100
= g/cm3 = 2.5 g/cm3
40
m 232
78. d = =11.6g/cm3
v 20 9. m1 = 2130 kg
m2 = 16 tonnes
SUMM ATIVE WORKSHEET
To add, we need to express the quantities in same
KEY system of units.
 m1 + m2 = 2130 kg + 16000 kg
1 2 3 4 5
= 18130 kg
C B B D A
(or) = 2.13 tonne+ 16tonne = 18.13 tonnes
6 7 8 9 10
D D C C A 2
density of water
2
10. RD = 5 = = 0.4
density of water 5
www.betoppers.com
= 60 × 60 sec
HOTS WORKSHEET 1
 1second  hours
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 3600
* D B A D D C A 109
1 nano second  hours
3600
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
102 mm 102  106 km
A D C C D C B C   9
nano second 10 / 3600hours
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 = 102 × 103 × 3600 km/hours
A B B A C B A B = 3.6 × 108 km/hr
12. 1g cms = x kgms–1
–1
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
1gcm 1  103 kg  102 m
A B B B B C B B 
s s
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 = 10 kgms–1
–5
13. 1kgm/s2 = gm.mm/s2

D C C A A C C A
1kgm 1 103 gm  106 mm

HINTS/ SOLUTIONSTO THE SELECTED s2 s2
QUESTIONS
103 gm  mm
1. 6 
1μm  10 m s2
1pm = 10–12 m 14. Momentum = Force × time
1nm = 10–9 m  Unit of momentum
1q = 100 kg = Unit of force × Unit of time
6. 1cm2 = (10 mm)2 = Newton × second
= 102 mm2 = N-s
7. 1 kg/m3 = 10–3 g/cm3 15. 1g cm sec = _____ kgm2 sec–1
–2 –1
 10kg/m3 = 10 × 10–3 g/cm3 2

1g cm 2 1  10 kg  10 m 
3 2
= 10–2 g/cm3
8. 1 nano metre = 10–9 m 
sec sec
= 10–9 × 102 cm
= 10–7 cm kgm 2
–3
 103  104
9. 1 mg = 10 g sec
= 10–3 × 10–3 kg = 10 kgm sec–1
–7 2
= 10–6 kg 16. 1 decade = 10 years

10. 15 mm2 = 15 × (10–1 cm)2 1 millenium = 10 centuries
= 15 × 10–2 cm2 = 10 × 100 years
= 15 × 10–2 × (10–2m)2 = 100 decades ( 1 decade = 10 years)
= 15 × 10–2 × 10–4 m2 17. 1m3 = (102 cm)3
= 15 × 10–6 m2 = 106 m3
= 15 × 10–6 (10–3km)2 18. 1 litre = 1000 ml
= 15 × 10–6 × 10–6 = 15 × 10–12 km2 19. V=3×2×2
11. Velocity = 102 mm/nano second = 12 cm3
1km = 1000 m 20. V = 25 cm × 18 cm × 2 cm
= 1000 × 100 cm = 900 cm3
= 1000 × 100 × 10 mm 21. M = 50g
= 106 mm V = 20cm × 10cm × 0.5cm
 1mm = 10–6 km = 100cm3
1 nano second = 10–9 second
50
1 hour = 60 min d  0.5g / cc
100
www.betoppers.com
22. Density of given substance is constant at a given 32. 5ml = 5cc

temperature. = 5 × (10–2 m)3
23. Kilogram is represented as ‘kg’. = 5 × 10–6 m3
24. M = v × d 33. 1 litre = 10–3 m3
= 555 × 7.6  10,000 L = 104 × 10–3 m3
= 4218g = 4.128 kg = 10 m3
25. l = 4cm 34. v1 = 26 ml
v2 = 6cm3 = 6ml
 V = (4 × 4 × 4)m3
= 64 m3
Vf = v1 + v2 = 26 + 6 = 32
1 35. Me = 9.11 × 10–31 kg
m  kg
8 No. of electrons (n) = ?
m 1/ 8 Total mass = 1kg
d  Total mass = No. of electrons × mass of each
v 64 electron
1 1  1 = n × 9.1 × 10–31
  kg / m3
64  8 512 1031
n   1.1 1030
Density 2n SI 9.1
RD  36. Mass of kerosene = 270g – 200g = 70g
1000
 1g occupies = 1cm3 volume of kerosene
1 1 Volume of kerosene = 70cm3 = 70ml.
 
512 1000 37. Total mass of all pieces = 20 × 10 = 200g
= 1.953 × 10–3 × 10–3 i.e. 200g mass displaces 200ml water in the vessel
= 19.53 × 10–7 Now, the present level of water in vessel = 300ml
m 205.2  initial level of water in the vessel = 300 – 200 =
26. d  g / cc 100ml.
v 3  1.5  6
103 g g
205.2 38. 10 x  10 x  10 3  x = –3
  7.61g / cc 6
10 cm 3
cm 3
27
39. m1 = 0.3 kg = 300 g
Density in cgs system m2 = 0.3 mg = 0.3 × 10–3g = 3 × 10–4 g
RD 
1 = 0.0003g
= 7.61 m3 = 0.3 × 10–6 g = 3 × 10–7 g
27. r = 1.4 cm = 0.0000003g
l = 8 cm m4 = 3000 g
m = 369.6 g  m4 > m1 > m2 > m3
RD = ? 40. r = p/104q = 10–4 p/
q
22
V  r 2l   1.4  1.4  8cm3 r in S.I. system = 10–4 × kg/m3
7
1000g
m 369.6  7 r in C.G.S. system = 10–4 ×
d   7.51 10 6 cm3
v 22  1.4  1.4  8 = 10–7 g/cm3
29. 1 tonne = 1000 kg
 1kg = 10–3 tonne
30. 1m  106 m
= 10–6 × 102 cm
= 10–4 cm
31. 1gram = 10–3 kg
1g  106 g
1mg = 10–3 g
www.betoppers.com
IIT JEE WORKSHEET  T = R – 5 = 59 – 5 = 54 cm.

 55 = 54 + x
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8  x = 1 cm.
D C B A A B B C
25. Length of thread = 14 hs
n=2
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
B A A,B B,C A,B, A,B, A, C, A, C,
14
Circumference  7 hs
C C D D 2
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 26. LR = 240 cm.
B A C A B 4 9 1 LW = 40 cm.
LR = nLW
25 26 27 28 29 30
7 6 MT MT MT MT
L R 240
n  6
LW 40
HINTS/ SOLUTIONSTO THE SELECTED
QUESTIONS 27. The area of the path KLMN
17. Area of rectangle surface ABFE = 40 × 5 = 200 square metres
= 8 × 6 = 48 sq.cm The area of the path PQRS
18. Area of rectangle surface BCGF = 30 × 5 = 150 square metres
= 5 × 10 = 50 sq.cm The area of the path EFGH
19. Area of rectangle surface CDFG = 5 × 5 = 25 square metres
= x × z = xz sq.cm total area occupied by the
20. V= 2 m3 R.D = 0.52 Paths = (the area of the rectangle KLMN) + (The
Density of the body area of the rectangle of PQRS) – (The area of
= R.D × Density of water the square EFGH)
= 0.52 × 1000 kg/m3 because the square path EFGH is counted twice.
= 520 kgm3 So, the required area = 200 + 150 – 25
Mass of the body = Density × Volume = 325 square metres.
= 520 × 2 = 1040 kg The right match is:
21. Volume of iron cylinder =  r 2 l A – q, t; B – r; C – p; D – s
28. A – s; B – p,t; C – r; D – q
22 29. A – s; B – p,t; C – q; D – r
=  3  3  7  198 cc
7 30. A – r; B – q; C – p; D – r, t
m 396
Density =   2 g / cc
v 198
RD = Density of the substance in cgs
 
 RD = 2
23. LS = x
LL = 2x
Give LR = 18 x
= 9 × 2x
LR = 9(LL)
=9
24. R = T + 5 cm _______ (1)
M = R – cm _______ (2)
M = 0.55 _______ (3)
M = 55 cm.
M = T + x = ? _______ (4)
Substituting (3) in (2), we get
R=m+4
= 55 + 4 = 59 cm.
www.betoppers.com
2. MOTION
SOLUTIONS
FORMATIVE WORKSHEET
KEY
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
C, D D B A A A, B, C D C D C
11 to 23 are non objective questions.
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
B A C C C D A B B C
33 34 35
A C A
HINTS/ SOLUTIONS TO THE SELECTED QUESTIONS
11. 14. R 2m S
S A B
H 2 km 2m
4m 4m 4m 4m
(i) Distance covered = path covered by
Raju Q T U
P 6m 4m
= HS + SH = 2km +
(i) Distance covered = (2 + 4 + 6 + 4 + 2 +
2km
4 + 4 + 4)m
= 4km
= 30m
(ii) Displacement = Distance between
(ii) Displacement = AB
initial and final position
= AX + XR + RS + SB
As both the initial final positions are
= 2m + PQ + 2m + TU
same, the displacement is zero.
= 2m + 6m + 2m + 4m
12. Q
= 14m
15. P R
5m 5m
5m 5m
A 7m B
(i) Distance = length of the path AQB A B
5m Q 5m
2r D 22 1 Distance = (5 + 5 + 5 + 5)m
   7
2 2 7 2 = 20m
= 11cm Displacement = AB
(ii) Displacement = AB = 7cm = AQ + QB
13. B Q
= 5m + 5m
= 10m
16. Distance = 5km + 5km = 10km
4m Displacement = zero
( he returns back home)
17. Let the body starts from A and reach B
A P
4m covering half the path of the circle.
(i) Distance = Length of the path APQB
2r D
= AP + PQ + QB Distance covered  
= 4m + 4m + 4m = 12m 2 2
(ii) Displacement = AB Displacement = AB = D
= PQ = 4m
Distance D / 2  Distance covered = AB + BC + CD + DE + BE

   = 5m + 5m + 5m + 5m + 5m
Displacement D 2
= 25m
Ratio =  : 2 Displacement = AB
18. 10m = 5m
S R Given
Distance = x × displacement
5m
 25= 5x
P Q 25
10m x 5
5
Distance covered = (10 + 5 + 10)m
= 25m
21. Initial reading of the odometer = 36580 km
Displacement = PS + RQ
Final reading of the odometer = 36620 km
= 5m
Initial time = 9:00 A.M. Final time = 10:00 A.M.
 Distance + Displacement = 25m + 5m = 30m
A
Total distance travelled = 36620 - 36580 km
19. B
= 40 km
Total time taken = 10:00 A.M. - 9:00 A.M.
C D = 1.00 hr
Total distance covered
F E Speed = Total time taken
Let the length of each side be ‘x’ units.
 AB = BC = CD = DE = EF = x 40 km
= 1 hr = 40 km/hr
Distance covered = AB + BC + CD + DE + EF
=x+x+x+x+x Therefore, the speed of the car will be 40 km/hr.
= 5x 22. Speed of rickshaw = 3 m/sec.
Displacement = AF
Total time taken = 10 min = 600 sec.
According to pythagorous theorem.
AF 2 = AE2 + EF 2 We know that,
(or) The distance covered = Speed x Time
2
= 3 m/sec. x 600 sec.
AE   AD  DE   EF2 = 1800 m.
2 Therefore, the distance between his house and
 x  x  x2
post office will be 1800 m. or 1.8 km.
 4x 2  x 2 23. This simple problem can be solved by applying
the following formula to calculate speed,
 5x 2
Total distance travelled
Speed 
 5x Total time taken
Distance 5x 5 Speed of the car 
  
Displacement 5x 1 Distance between the house and the school
 Ratio  5 :1 Total time taken by the car to reach the school
20. C D
40km 40km
   80km / hour
30minutes  1 
 hour 
B E 2 
The correct answer is B.
A
www.betoppers.com
Motion Solutions 135
24. 28. If a body is stationary, then its position will not

change with time i.e., its position versus time
curve will run parallel to the time axis, as shown
by the graph in alternative D.
The correct answer is D.
29. The speed of an object is given as the distance
traveled by it per unit time. Since the boy is cycling
at a constant speed, he covers equal distances in
It can be observed from the given distance versus
equal intervals of time i.e., his distance versus
time graph that the car travels a distance of 25 m
time graph will be a straight line having a definite
(50 – 25) every 2 seconds. Since the distance
slope, as shown by the graph in alternative A.
traveled by the car per unit time is constant, it
The correct answer is A.
can be concluded that it is moving at a uniform
30. The speed of an object is given as the distance
speed.
traveled by it per unit time. It can be observed
from the given graph that the distance traveled
25. The speed of a body is given as the distance
by the car in going from point O to point C is 75
traveled by it per unit time.
km and the distance traveled by it in going from
Total distance traveled by Paula = 12 km + 6 km
point C to point D is 75 km.
+ 15 km = 33 km
The total time taken by it to travel from point O to
Time taken by Paula to cover this distance =
30 minutes + 15 minutes + 15 minutes = 60 minutes 180 minutes
point D is 180 minutes.  3hours
=1h 60
Hence, Paula’s speed can be determined as Hence, the speed of the car can be determined
Distance travelled 33km as
Speed    33km / h
Time taken 1h Distance travelled 75km  75km
Speed  
The correct answer is C. Time taken 3h
26. The speed of a body is given as the distance
150km
traveled by it per unit time.   50km / h
Distance traveled by the moon = 2 × r 3
Where, r = 385,000 km The correct answer is B.
Hence, the distance traveled by the moon = (2π 31. The speed of an object is given as the distance
× 385,000 km) = 770,000π km traveled by it per unit time. It can be observed
Time taken by the moon to complete one revolution from the given graph that the ball covers a distance
around Earth = 29 days of 40 meters in 25 seconds.
= (29 × 24 hours) = 696 hours Hence, its speed can be determined as
Hence, the moon’s speed can be determined as Distance travelled 40m
Speed    1.6m / s
Distance travelled 770,000 km Time taken 25s
Speed   
Time taken 696h The correct answer is B.
32. The speed of the car is the distance traveled by
1,106.3 km / h
the car per unit time. It can be observed from the
The correct answer is C. given graph that the car travels equal distances in
27. The speed of a body is given as the distance equal intervals of time. Hence, the speed of the
traveled by it per unit time. The distance traveled car is constant.
by the ant is equal to the book’s perimeter 33. During the first minute of the race, Jacob and
= 20 cm + 15 cm + 20 cm + 15 cm = 90 cm Ethan cover equal distances. Hence, their speeds
Time taken by the ant to travel 90 cm = 5 minutes are equal during the first minute. After two minutes
= (5 × 60) = 300 seconds from the start of the race, Jacob gets ahead of
Hence, the ant’s speed can be determined as Ethan, i.e., Jacob covers more distance in the
Distance travelled 90cm second minute than Ethan. Therefore, during the
Speed    0.3cm / s
Time taken 300s second minute, Jacob’s speed is more than that
The correct answer is C. of Ethan.
www.betoppers.com
34. In order to answer this question, the student must 7. Motion

be able to identify the position versus time 8. Yes. Motion of wheels of a moving car.
graphs representing various types of motion. In 9. Periodic
the wave motion, the position of the particle varies. 10. Periodic Motion
This is shown in the position versus time graph 17. Distance = Circumference of the circle
given in alternative C. The wave motion  2 r
comprises of consecutive crests (peaks) and
troughs (valleys). 22
 2
7
The correct answer is C. 7
35. The ant travels a distance of (6 cm – 0 cm =) 6 = 44cm
cm on the ruler. The time taken by the ant to travel 18. Distance covered = 5m + 5m + 5m + 5m + 5m
a distance of 6 cm is given by the difference + 5m
between the times on the two clocks, i.e., 10:22:41 = 30m
“ 10:22:35 = 6 seconds. Displacement = 0
Hence, the ant travels 6 cm in 6 seconds, i.e., the 19. Distance = Speed × time
(or)
6cm
speed of the ant is  1cm / s . distance
6s Speed 
The correct answer is A. time
CGS unit of speed cm / s
CONCEPTIVE WORKSHEET 20. SI unit of speed

m/s
KEY
cm s
 
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 s 100cm
A B B C C A D C B A
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 30 1

B B D A C C C C 100
HINTS/ SOLUTIONS TO THE SELECTED Total distance
25. Average speed 
QUESTIONS Total time
1. Vibratory Motion. Because strings does not Let ‘x’ be distance covered with 30m/s
move as a whole.  The distance covered with 20m/s is also x.
2.  Total distance = 2x
Let t1 and t2 be time taken to cover the
respective distances with speeds 30m/s and
20m/s.
Distance = speed × time (or) time
distance

speed
x
t1 
30
Linear and rotational. As ball rolling down it covers
x
some distance along with the rotation. t2 
3. In oscillatory motion body moves to-and-fro or 20
back-and-forth at regular intervals of time. Hence x x
all oscillatory motions are periodic in nature.  t1  t 2  
30 20
4. Motion, Rest
5. Movement of a toy car around a circular road. 2x  3x 5x
 
It covers a distance of circumference of circle 60 60
during its circular motion.
6. Rest
www.betoppers.com
Total distance 31. Distance covered (S) = 30 m

Average speed  Time (t) = 1.5 min = 90 s
Total time
S 30m
2x Therefore Speed    0.33ms1
 t 90s
5x / 60 32. Distance covered ‘S’ = 15 km
2x  60 Speed = 120 km/h

5x S 15km
= 24 m/s Time  t   
Speed 120km / h
28. Total distance covered = (20 + 25 + 45 )m = 1 1

 h   60  7.5min
90m 8 8
Total time taken = 3s 33. It means distance of 1 km travelled in 1 hour
Therefore, Average Speed i.e., its velocity = 1 km h–1
Total distance covered 90 1000 10 5
   30m / s  m/s   m/s
Total time taken 3 60  60 36 18
29. When the body covers distance in different in
different times by different velocity 5
1 kmph  m/s
Average speed is given by the velocity 18
2v1 v 2 Distance travelled
Averager Speed  v  v 34. Speed 
1 2
Time taken
v1 = 40 kmph = v2 = 60 kmph Distance = 1200 m
Time taken = 3 min and 20 sec
2v1 v 2 = 3 min + 20 sec
Average speed 
v1  v 2 = 3 x 60 sec + 20sec
( 1 min = 60 sec)
2  40  60 = 180 + 20 = 200 sec

40  60
1200
= 48 kmph Speed   6sec
30. Let’s consider one complete revolution 200
Distance covered by each hand same. 35. (i) 100 m (ii) 80 m
But the time taken to complete one revolution is (iii) 650 m (iv) No, these distances
different for each are not equal
ts = 60s (v) 60 m.
tm = 60 min = 3600 s 37.
th = 12 hrs = 12 × 60 × 60s
Total distance
Average speed 
total time
As the distance is same for all,
1
Average speed 
time
More is the time taken, less is its average
speed. (i) distance-time graph of a car moving with a constant
As hour’s hand taken more time, its average speed
speed B minimum.
Conversely, the average speed is more for the
end of a second’s hand.
www.betoppers.com
Time = ?
Distance
Time  speed
14488.92

161.8
= 89.54 hrs
89.54
(ii) distance -time graph of a car parked on a side road No. of days   3.73days
24
SUM MATIVE WORKSHEET 9.
30
HINTS/ SOLUTIONS TO THE SELECTED
24
QUESTIONS
20
1. (a) 10m/s = 100 cm/s
16
(b) 20m/s = 72 kmph
12
30
(c) 30m/s  km / s = 0.03 km/s 8
1000
4
(d) 40m/s = 2 × 72 kmph
= 144 kmph 0
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18
Note: 10m/s = 36 kmph
2. 10m/s = 36 kmph 2v1 v 2
So, their speeds are same. 10. Average speed  v  v
1 2
As the distance covered by them is same, they
take same time to reach the ending points 2  50  40

3. Speed = 310 kmph = _________ m/s 50  40
5 2  50  40
We know kmph  1m / s 
18 90
5 = 44.45 kmph
 310kmph  310  m/s
18 3
= 86.1 m/s 11. (i) Speed  m / s
5
4. Fastest one taken least time to complete the race. (ii) From 5 to 7 seconds it is at rest = 0m/s
 Sudha is the fastest and Rohit is the slowest. (iii) Distance covered from of to 9sec = 7 – 3 =
100 4m
Speed of Sudha   5m / s Time = 2sec.
20
4
100 Speed   2m / s
Speed of Rohit   3.57m / s 2
28
12.
5. Distance = 100 m
70
5
Speed = 90 kmph  90  m / s = 25 m/s 60
18
50
Distance 100
Time    4sec 40
time 25
30
6. C
7. C 20
8. Distance = 14488.82 km 10
Speed = 161.8 kmph
0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
www.betoppers.com
13. Here, it is given that,

The distance between two stations = 240 km Time HOTS WORKSHEET
taken to cover this distance = 4 hr. KEY
Distacne 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
We know that, Speed =
Time B A A C D C C B C D
240 km 11 12 13 14 15
= 60 km/hr..Therefore, speed of the train C A C C C
4 hr
HINTS/ SOLUTIONS TO THE SELECTED
will be 60 km/hr.
QUESTIONS
14. In this question, it is given that,
1. The total distance covered by Kurt is (50 m +
Initial reading of odometer = 57321.0 km
100 m + 50 m + 100 m =)
Final reading of odometer = 57336.0 km 300 m. He takes one minute to complete one
Initial time = 08:30 A.M. revolution around the park, i.e., a distance of 300
Final time = 08:50 A.M. m.
Now, Total distance covered = Final reading of Therefore, the distance covered by him in one
odometer - Initial reading of odometer. 300m
second is  5m , i.e., his speed is 5 m/s.
= 57336.0 60
km – 57321.0 km 2. This question requires the student to formulate a
= 15.0 km hypothesis based on cause and effect relationship.
Total time taken = Final time – Initial time In the given experiment, the lapse of time is the
= 08:50 AM - 08:30 AM cause and the increase in the distance of the car
= 20 min. from the wall is the effect. It can be observed
from the graph that the distance of the car from
Distance covered
We know that, speed = the wall is equal to the time lapsed. Hence, the
Time taken hypothesis can be formulated as
Distance of the car from the wall = Time
15km
= = 0.75 km/ 3. Speed is defined as distance traveled per unit time.
20min The ant covered each edge of the given structure
min in one second. In one ledge, the ant travels 6 cm
Speed in km/h = 0.75 × 60 (1 hr = 60 in one second. It is the maximum distance traveled
min) by the ant in one second. Hence, its speed was
= 45 km/hr. the maximum when it traveled the edge of length
Therefore, the distance moved by the car = 15km. 6 cm.
15. According to the question, 4. Time of travel, t = 5 h
Speed of the bicycle = 2 m/s Speed of the bus, v = 40 km/h
Total time taken = 15 min = 900 sec. We Speed is given by the relation,
know that, Distance  d 
Distance covered = Speed x Time Speed  v  
Time  t 
= 2 m/s × 900 sec.
 Distance covered, d = vt = 40 × 5 = 200 km
= 1800 m Distance covered = Final reading of the odometer
Therefore, the distance between Salma house and “ Initial reading of the odometer
the school is 1800 m or 1.8 km. Initial reading of the odometer = 42124 km
16. (ii) 25 km Final reading of the odometer = Initial reading
of the odometer + Distance covered
= 42124 + 200 =
42324 km
Therefore, the final reading of the odometer is
42324 km.
www.betoppers.com
5. The odometer reads the distance travelled by a

vehicle.
Speed of the scooter = 30 m/s
Time taken = 20 min = 20 × 60 = 1200 s
Distance travelled by the scooter = Speed
× Time
= 30 × Hence, car N will meet car M after travelling a
1200 = 36000 m = 36 km 1
Initial reading of the odometer = 14316.0 km distance of 1000  30v  m
Final reading of odometer = 14316.0 + 36 = 2
14352.0 km It takes 5 min i.e., 5 × 60 = 300 s to meet. The
Hence, the odometer shows a reading of 14352.0 distance travelled by car N in 300 s is 300v m.
km when the rider reaches his destination.
6. In a racing event, both participants have to run 1000v  30v
Therefore, 300v 
the same distance. Let this distance be d. 2
Time taken by Abbas = ta
Time taken by Zaheer = tz = 3ta 1000  30v
Speed is given by the relation:
  300v
2
Distance  1000 – 30v = 600v
Speed 
Time
 1000 = 630 v
d
Speed of Abbas, v a  t 1000
a v   1.59m / s
630
d
Speed of Zaheer, v z  3t Hence, both cars were moving with a speed of
a
1.59 m/s.
v a d 3t a 3 9. Speed is given by the relation
 ratio,   
vz t a d 1
Distance
Hence, va : vz = 3 : 1 Speed 
7. Average speed is given by the relation Time
Total distance travelled Let v be the speed of Raj and be the speed of
Average speed 
Total time taken Lokesh i.e.,
Distance covered on the bicycle = 700 m Raj runs for 10 minutes. Hence, the distance
Distance covered by walking = 300 m covered by Raj is given as
Hence, total distance = 700 + 300 = 1000 m
Total time taken in the journey = 12 min (given) Distance = Speed × Time = v × 10 = 10v
100 Lokesh has to cover a distance of 10v with speed.

 Average speed   83.33m / min Hence, the time required by Lokesh to cover the
12
distance is given as
8. Let the speed of both cars be v m/s.
In 30 s, car M covers (v × 30) = 30v m. 10. The distance – time graph represents the nature
Now, the distance between both cars is reduced of motion of a moving object. A distance”time
to (1000 – 30v) m. graph that is a straight line making an angle with
Since both cars were moving with the same speed, the time or distance-axis represents the motion
they will meet at mid point of distance of a body in uniform speed. It is given that initially,
(1000 – 30v) m. the car covered a distance (MN) in 3 min. This
motion can be represented graphically as shown
in the given graph.
www.betoppers.com
The car moves uniformly to reach the initial point
M in 2 minutes. Therefore, the car travelled a
distance MN in 2 min, i.e., between time 5 min
and 7 min (as shown in the given graph).
The distance – time graph is a straight line parallel

to the time-axis represents an object which is not
moving. It is given that at point N, the car remains
standing for 2 minutes, i.e., between time 3 min Hence, the motion of the given car can be
and 5 min. This motion can be represented as represented as shown in alternative D.
shown in the given graph. 11. The speed of a moving body is given by the ratio
of the distance travelled to the time taken, i.e.,
Distance
Speed 
Time
The following table shows the speed of the four
given cyclists.
Distance
Cyclist Distance (m) Time (min) Speed = (m/min)
Time
166
M 166 7  23.71
7
205
N 205 9  22.78
9
281
P 281 13  21.62
13
333
R 333 15  22.20
15
From the above table, it is clear that the speed of cyclist P is the minimum among the given cyclists. Hence,
cyclist P will take maximum time to cover any given distance.
12. Speed, distance, and time are related as
Distance
Speed 
Time
Distance covered by the train = Length of the tunnel + Length of the train = 11.43 + 0.57 = 12 km
Speed of the train = 60 km/h
12 1 60
Time taken by the train to cover 12 km will be  h  12 min
60 5 5
Hence, the clock will read (8:25 + 0:12) = 8:37 am when the train exits from the tunnel.
www.betoppers.com
13. A distance – time graph represents how fast a Given that,

body is moving. If the distance – time graph of a Speed of the car = 53 km/h
Distance covered by the car = 318 km
body is a straight line parallel to the time-axis, Let the time taken to cover 318 km be t.
then the speed of the body is zero, i.e., the body is
318
not moving at all. Statement I says that car I is 53 
t
parked or standing near a post office, i.e., car I is
not moving at all. Hence, its distance”time graph 318
t  6h
will be a straight line parallel to the time-axis (as 53
shown in the graph below). Hence, the car will cover the given distance in
6 h.
IITJEE WORKSHEET
KEY
1 2 3 4 5 6
C B A B A A
7 8 9 10 11 12
The distance – time graph of a body moving with D D B D C ABC
13 14 15 16
uniform speed is a straight line inclined at an angle
ABCD ABC ABD ABCD
with the time-axis. Car II is moving on a straight
road with a constant speed. Hence, its distance – HINTS/ SOLUTIONS TO THE SELECTED
time graph will be a straight line inclined at an QUESTIONS
angle with the time-axis (as shown in the graph 1. The speed of a person indicates how fast a person
below). can run. The greater the speed, the faster the
person can run and vice-versa. It is clear from
the given table that the speed of the four
participants is related as vR > vA > vP > vD..
Where,
vR = speed of Ranvir Chauhan = 6 m/s
vA = speed of Apurva Gupta = 4 m/s
vP = speed of Pavan Chauhan = 3 m/s
Distance vD = speed of Deepak Gupta = 2 m/s
14. Speed is given by the ratio . In this situation, Ranvir is the fastest. Hence, he
Time
Total distance covered by the plane = 2095 km will be the winner. Also, it is clear from the above
Total time of flight of the plane = 11:15 “ 8:50 = 2 data that Apurva is the second fastest among the
h and 25 min = 120 + 25 = 145 min. four participants. Hence, Apurva will be a runner
2095 up in the race. Hence, Apurva will touch the
Speed  km / min
145 finishing line just after the winner.
2095  1000 2. The boy is in motion for the first four seconds;
  240.80m / s
145  60 then he is at rest for the next six seconds, and is
Hence, the speed of the given airplane = 240.80
in motion for the last six seconds. Therefore, he
m/s
15. Speed, distance, and time are related by the is in motion for a total time of (4 s + 6 s =) 10 s.
formula: The correct answer is B.
Distance
Speed =
Time
www.betoppers.com
7. Distance covered by the car = Final reading of
3. The odometer is a device that measures and
the odometer – Initial reading of the odometer
shows the distance covered by a vehicle.
Final reading of the odometer = 1041 km
Distance covered = Final reading of the odometer Initial reading of the odometer = 1020 km
– Initial reading of the odometer Distance covered by the car = 1041 – 1020 = 21
Since there is no change in the odometer reading km = 21000 m
Speed of the car = 14 m/s
for a certain period of time, this indicates Distance = Speed × Time
Final reading of the odometer – initial reading of Distance 21000
Time    1500s
the odometer = zero Speed 14
 Distance covered = 0 Time taken by the car to reach school = 1500 s
 The car is at rest. The correct answer is D.
The correct answer is A. 8. Speed of the car, s = 100 km/h
4. Speedometer is a device that measures and reads Time taken by the car to reach the picnic spot, t =
2h
the average speed of moving objects. The speed Total distance covered by the car = Speed × Time
of the car is given by the formula, = 100 × 2 = 200 km
Total distance covered by the car = Final reading
Distance covered by the car
Speed  of the odometer – Initial reading of the odometer
Total time take Initial reading of the odometer = 1500 km
Where, Final reading of the odometer = Total distance
Distance covered by the car = 100 km covered by the car + Initial reading of the odometer
Total time taken = 5 h = 1500 + 200
100 = 1700 km
Speed   20km / h  Final reading of the odometer = 1700 km
5
Hence, actual speed of the car = 20 km/h 9. Let the distance between station and place B
However, the speedometer reads twice the actual be d.
speed. Thus, the speedometer will give a reading
It is given that place A is midway between the
of 40 km/h.
station and place B.
5. For Ajay, Therefore, distance between place A and the
Speed = 5 m/s
d
Distance = 100 m station =
2
Distance = Speed × Time
Distance covered by the express train = d
Distance 100 Distance covered by the passenger train =
Time    20s
Speed s The time taken by both the trains is the same i.e., t.
For Rahul, We know,
The time taken by Rahul is 5 s more than the time Distance
Speed 
taken by Ajay. Time
Time taken by Rahul = 20 + 5 = 25 s Distance d
Distance covered by Rahul = 100 m Speed of the express train, se =  
Time t
____________
Distance = Speed × Time (i)
Distance 100 Distance d
Speed    4m / s Speed of the passenger train, sp  
Speed 25 Time 2t
____________
(ii)
 The speed of Rahul is 4 m/s. d  2t
se : sp   2 :1
t d
The ratio of the speed of the express train to that
of the passenger train is 2: 1.
www.betoppers.com
10. It is given that Ram runs twice as fast as Shyam.

It means that the speed of Ram is twice that of
Shyam.
Let speed of Shyam = x
 Speed of Ram = 2x
Time for which Ram runs, t1 = 10 minutes = 10 ×
60 = 600 s
Time for which Shyam runs, t2 = 5 minutes = 5 ×
60 = 300 s
Distance covered by Ram, d1= Speed × Time =
2x × 600 … (i)
Distance covered by Shyam, d2 = Speed × Time
= x × 300 … (ii)
Ratio, d1: d2
d1 2x  600
  4 :1
d2 x  300
Therefore d1: d2 is 4: 1.
17. As the body comes to its initial position of start, its
displacement is zero and distance is equal to
circumference of the circle.
18. As the body comes to its initial position of start, its
displacement is zero.
19. The distance travelled is equal to the total path
covered by the body and is equal to 4 km.
20. Distance = AB + BC + CD = 4 + 3 + 2 = 9 km.
5
21. 36  m / s  10m / s
18
22. Zero
23. Distance = 3.6 km = 3600 m
Time = 1 hr = 3600 s
3600
Speed   1m / s
3600
24. A– t; B – r ; C – q ; D – p
 
www.betoppers.com
3. LIGHT
SOLUTIONS
a) We know, i = r
FORM ATIVE WORKSHEET  r = 30°
b) We know, d = 180 - 2i
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30  d = 180 – 60
B A B C * D A A D A  d = 120°
c) We know, g = 90 – i
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40  g = 90 – 30
B A C C D D B B D C  g = 60°
d) i + r + g = 30 + 30 + 60
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 = 120°
D B A A B B C C D C 4. Given,
Angle of deviation d = ?
51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
We know,
D B B A C C d = 180 – 2 i
 d = 180 – 2(90 – g)
HINTS / SOLUTIONS TO THE SELECTED  d = 180 – 180 + 2g
QUESTIONS  d = 2g
1. We know that, d = 180 - 2i How to get i?
or d = 180 – ( i + r ) ( i = r ) We know,
or d + i + r = 180° g = 90 – i
Therefore, sum of angle of incidence , angle of  i = (90 – g)
reflection and angle of deviation equals to 180° 5. dmax = ?
2. Given, We know,
Angle of incidence = i d = 180 – 2i
Angle of deviation d = ? dmax  (180 – 2i)max
Angle of reflection = r  Subtracting quantity should be minimum ?
Consider the straight line IOB I=0
We know,  dmax = 180 – 0 = 180°
6. Let us understand what a normal incidence is.
The ray is passing along the normal. Such an incident
ray passing through the normal is known as normal
incidence.
Note : For normal incidence, i = 0
Angle of reflection, r is 0.
Hence the angle between incident ray and reflected
ray is zero.
7. Let the angle of incidence be ‘x’
 i = x ________ (1)
Angle made in a straight line is 180°
Angle of deviation (d) = angle of reflection (r)
 i + r + d = 180°
 d = r _________ (2)
 i + i + d = 180° ( i = r)
From (1) and (2),
 d = 180 ? 2i i=r=d=x ( i = r)
3. Given, From the figure, i + r + d = 180°
Angle of incidence (i) = 30° ( AOC is a straight line and in a straight line the
Angle of reflection (r) = ? angle = 180°)
Angle of deviation (d) = ? x + x + x = 180°
Glancing angle of incidence (g) = ?
 3x = 180  x = 60°
i+r+g=?
8. Given, But, how to find ‘x’ ?

i + r = 90° From the figure, it is clear that the reflected ray
i=? makes 30° angle with the mirror and M1OM2 forms
We know, a triangle.
Angle of incidence i = angle of reflection r So, 30 + 120 + x = 180  x = 30°
i + r = 90° From the figure,
i + i = 90° It is clear that  = 90 – 30 = 60°
2i = 90° 11. Suppose OM1 is the horizontal plane mirror and
i = 45° OM2 the second mirror and OM2 the second mirror,
As i and r are same, then the angle between the mirrors is q.
 i = r = 45°
9. Angle between the mirrors  ABC = 60°
Let the ray be incident at D, middle of AB.
It reflects and strikes BC at E.
Angle of incidence on AB = 50°
We know,
Angle of reflection = angle of incidence
 Angle of reflection at AB = 50°
Glancing angle of incidence
g = 90 – i = 90 – 50 = 40° From the figure, ABM,  OBC  45
Glancing angle of reflection Since CD and OM1 are parallel, DCM 2  
= 90 – r = 90 – 50 = 40° According to the laws of reflection,
DCM 2  BCO  
Now, in  COB,
OCB  CBO  COB  180
1
   45    180    67
2
1
So, the angle between the plane mirrors  67
2
12. Yes, this is possible.
In triangle DBE.
B  E  D  180
 60  E  40  180
 E  80
On drawing a normal to BC at E.
Glancing angle of incidence at E = 80°
 Angle of incidence on BC = 90 – 80 = 10°
10.
When a convergent beam is incident on the plane

Incident angle for mirror M1, i1 = 60° mirror, the resulting beam is a convergent beam,
We know, according to the laws of reflection, which meets at a point ‘P’.
i=r A real image is formed at ‘P’.
Angle of reflection, r1 = 60°
www.betoppers.com
Light Solutions 147
13. A virtual image cannot be caught on a screen as 17. Let initial object distance = x
the reflected rays appear to meet. Photographing  Image distance = x
virtual image is possible and your image can be Initial distance between object and image = 2x
photographed. Displacement of mirror = 10 m away from the
14. Let an object be placed at ‘A’ at a distance of object
10 m from the plane mirror placed at M. New object distance = (10 + x) m
New image distance = (10 + x) m
Displacement of image = (Final distance between
object and image )
Displacement of image = (Final distance between
object and image )
– ( Initial distance between object and image)
Displacement of image = 2x + 20 – 2x
Its image is formed at the same distance, 10 m by = 20 m
the plane mirror at B. 18. We know that a virtual image cannot be caught on
Distance moved by the object (AA’) = 4 m a screen. But our eye lens forms a real image (here,
Distance moved by the image (BB’) = 4 m virtual image acting as virtual object) on the retina
Final distance between the image and the object of our eyes.
(A’B’) Let O, M and I be the initial positions of the object,
= A’O + OB’ the mirror and the image respectively. And the
= 6 + 6 = 12 m initial distance between object and mirror be ‘x’ m.
15. Initial object distance (OA) = Initial image distance
(OA’) = ‘x’ m
Object is moved through a distance of ‘y’m
The object and the mirror move away from each

other by 10m such that their new positions are O’
and M’ respectively and I’ is the final position of
the image.
 images moved by ‘y’ m Displacement of object (OO’) = 10 m
 New object distance (OB) = New image Displacement of mirror (MM’) = 10 m
distance (OB’) = (x – y) m  New object distance OM’ = O’ O + OM +
 Final distance between the image and object MM’ = 10 + x + 10 = (x + 20)m
(BB’) = (x – y) + (x – y)  New image distance M’ I’ = (x + 20)m
= 2 (x – y) m Displacement of image = II’ = ?
16. Let initial object distance = x Displacement of the image = II’ = MI’ – (MM’ +
 Image distance = x M’ I’) – MI ________ (1)
Initial distance between object and image Substituting the values of MM’, M’ I’ and MI from
= 2x =? the data in (1), we get
Distance travelled by object in 2 seconds Displacement of the image = II’ = (10 + x + 20) –
= 30× 2 = 60 m away from the mirror x = 30 m
Final object distance = (x + 60) m Therefore, the displacement of the image is equal
 Final image distance = (x + 60) m to 30 m.
Final distance between object and image Conclusion: If both mirror and object move away
= (2x + 120)m from each other by ‘x’ m, then the displacement of
2x = 200 – 120 the image is equal to ‘3x’ m.
2x = 80 19. Yes
Initial distance between object and image 20. Image distance = Object distance = 10 cm
= 2x = 80 m 21. Both Statements are true, Statement - II is not
correct explanation of Statement - I.
www.betoppers.com
22. When the object is placed beyond C, the image is 32. The image formed by the convex mirror is erect
formed between C and F in front of the mirror. and smaller in size than that of the object.
The image is Real, inverted and diminished. The actual area of the front view of the parallelogram
23. For an object placed at C for a concave mirror, the is shown in the following figure.
image is formed at C itself.
Therefore, the image distance is equal to the object
distance i.e., 20 cm.
24. For an object placed at C for a concave mirror, the
image is formed at C itself.
The nature of image is Real, inverted and of same Actual area = 8 × 4 = 32 cm2
size. Since the image formed in a convex mirror is smaller
than the object, the apparent area of the visible side
25. (A) Focal length of the spherical mirror
seen on the convex mirror must be less than 32
– distance between principal focus and pole (2)
cm2. Hence, the area of the image can be 21 cm2.
– half the radius of curvature (4) 33. A concave mirror can form real images of any size
(B) Radius of curvature is two times of with respect to the object size depending on the
– distance between principal focus and pole (2) object distance from the mirror. Thus, a concave
(C) Plane mirror – Virtual image (1) mirror can form both small and large real images.
(D) Concave mirror – Real image (3) Hence, the statement delivered by Aruna is
The right match is : A – 2, 4; B – 2; C – 1; D – 3
incorrect.
26. Whatever may be the position of object, a convex
mirror always forms a virtual, erect and diminished 34. The image formed by mirror III can be obtained on
image. a screen. Hence, mirror III can form a real image.
27. R = 2f This implies that mirror III is a concave mirror.
Both Statements are true, Statement - II is the Since only concave mirrors can form real and
correct explanation of Statement - I. inverted images of objects, mirror III can form
28. The image formed by a convex mirror is always inverted images.
diminished and erect. 35. Convex mirrors form only virtual images that are
Since the image formed by the last mirror is smaller than the object. Because of its shape, a
magnified, it is a concave mirror. Again, since the convex mirror can cover a large field of view in
images formed by the first three mirrors are front of it. Therefore, a small convex mirror can
inverted, they are all concave mirrors. form small and upright images of larger vehicles
Since the image formed by the fourth mirror is such as cars, trucks, etc. Because of this large field
diminished and erect, it is the only convex mirror of view and its ability to form small upright images,
placed in the mirror show. convex mirrors are used as rear view mirrors in
29. Concave mirror produces a magnified image of the vehicles.
object, when it is placed very close to this mirror. 36. Rearview mirrors of vehicles form small, erect, and
This property of concave mirror is used to make virtual images. This is a characteristic of images
shaving mirror, which allows the barber to have an formed by convex mirrors. Since Billu has prepared
enlarged view of the beard of his costumers, so a list of devices that involve the use of concave
that he can shave it comfortably. Therefore, the mirrors, it is the rearview mirror that is included
item bought by the man will be a concave mirror. wrongly in the given table.
30. As the outer surface is covered and is used for 37. The rear view mirror of a vehicle is simply a convex
reflection, it act as a convex mirror. mirror. A convex mirror forms virtual images smaller
So, it forms a virtual and diminished image. than the object. It is the property of a mirror that it
always forms laterally inverted images.
31. The image formed by a concave mirror may be
Therefore, all asymmetric letters in the English
inverted or erect, and magnified or diminished. The
alphabet get laterally inverted when viewed in a
nature of the image formed by a concave mirror
mirror.
depends on the distance between the object and
the mirror. In the given case, an inverted and a When the figure is viewed
magnified image of the boy is formed by the in a convex mirror, it appears as the
respective sides of the two mirrors that are stuck word (as shown in the given
together. Hence, both the mirrors are concave figure).
mirrors.
www.betoppers.com
Light Solutions 149
44. In the given activity, the candle is behind the

instrument and its image is also formed behind. The
image is erect, virtual in nature, and diminished in
size. Only a concave lens can form this type of
image of an object. Therefore, the optical instrument
used in the activity is a concave lens.
Hence, the figure actually inscribed on the vehicle 45. The fact that the lens was unable to burn the paper
is larger than what John saw in the car’s rear view indicates that the rays of the sun coming towards
mirror. The correct figure is shown in the paper were not being converged by the lens
alternative B only. i.e., the rays were diverged by the given lens.
38. A shaving mirror consists of a concave mirror Therefore, the lens used by Rajesh is a concave
because it forms an enlarged and erect image of lens.
the object, when the object is placed close to it. The image formed by a concave lens is always erect
Therefore, an enlarged and erect image of the face and smaller in size than the object. Therefore, the
can be seen which helps in having a closer look of appearance of the spectacles through the lens is
the face for a better shave. erect and small.
39. Street lamps are used to light a large open area. 46. It is the convex lens that is used as magnifying glass
Hence, the light emitted from these lamps must for reading small text. The reason behind this is
spread over a large area. This job is successfully that it forms an enlarged, erect, and virtual image
done by convex mirrors because they diverge the of the text.
parallel light rays coming from the light source. 47. The image formed by a concave lens cannot be
Hence, convex mirrors are used as reflectors in obtained on a screen. Hence, it is a virtual image.
street lamps. Virtual images are erect or upright. Concave lenses
40. Dentists are required to see the enlarged and upright form only diminished images. Hence, whenever an
images of teeth and throats to view their minute object is seen through a concave lens, the image of
details. Since a concave mirror can form magnified the object is virtual, upright, and small in size.
and erect images, it is used by the dentists to examine48. Convex lens is thicker in the middle than the edges,
a patient. The correct answer is C. as shown in the given figure.
41. Surveillance mirrors in libraries and supermarkets
or safety mirrors in shops and stores must have a
large field of view so that they can form images of
a larger area. Hence, the image formed by such a
All the incoming parallel rays bend inwards and meet
mirror must be erect and diminished. Also, the erect
at a point after passing through a convex lens, as
images are always virtual in nature. Since a convex
shown in the following figure.
mirror always forms virtual, erect, and diminished
images, they are used as surveillance mirrors in
libraries.
42. It is the convex lens that is used as magnifying glass
for reading small text. The reason behind this is Hence, convex lens is also called the convergent
that it forms an erect and virtual image of the text. lens.
43. A convex lens acts as a magnifying glass. This is 49. In the given figure, a parallel beam of sunlight
because a convex lens forms virtual magnified converges to a point after passing through the
image of an object on the same side of the object glass G. Hence, G is a converging lens or a convex
as represented in the given figure. lens. It is the property of a convex lens to focus all
parallel incident rays to a point on its focus.
50. An image smaller than the object can be formed by
concave lens, convex lens, convex mirrors, or
concave mirrors. But inverted and real images are
formed only by convex lens and concave mirrors.
Hence, convex lens and concave mirrors can form
A magnifying glass is used to see the magnified diminished and inverted images.
image of an object.
www.betoppers.com
51. An image that is smaller than the object is produced

by either a convex or concave lens or mirror. But a CONCEPTIVE WORKSHEET
real image can only be produced by either a concave
mirror or convex lens. Hence, either a concave 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
mirror or convex lens can produce an image that is B B B D A A A ABC A
real and smaller than the image of an object.
52. The light coming from the sun is white light. When 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
it is passes through a glass prism, it splits into seven B D B C B A A C B C
colors as a result of the refraction of white light on
the prism’s surface. Hence, it can be concluded 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
that white light is made up of seven colors. A A D ABC AB C B C ABC D
53. When white light falls on a prism, it splits into seven
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
colours. The colours are red, orange, yellow, green,
blue, indigo, and violet (from top to bottom). The A C B C A C A D C C
sequence of the colours as they appear on the screen
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
is shown in the given figure:
C C B A C C D C A C
51
C
HINTS / SOLUTIONS TO THE SELECTED

It can be observed that the top two colours on the
QUESTIONS
screen are red and orange, whereas the three bottom
2. A – 1; B – 3; C – 2; D – 4
colours are blue, indigo, and violet.
3. When the rays of light, diverging from a point, after
When these five colours are removed from the
reflection or refraction, appear to diverge from
screen, only yellow and green are visible. This is
another point, then the image so formed is called
also shown in the given figure.
virtual image.
54. There are seven colours present in a rainbow. From

top to bottom, the order of the colours is red, orange,
yellow, green, blue, indigo, and violet. Therefore,
the third colour from top is yellow and the third colour
from bottom is blue. 4. When the rays of light, diverging from a point, after
55. The spinner has all the constituent colors of white reflection or refraction actually converge at some
light painted on it. While the spinner is rotating, all other point then that point is real image of the
the colors combine and give a white appearance. It object.
is for this reason that the spinner appears white.
56. The seven constituent colours of white light are red,
orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and violet. These
colours can be seen in a rainbow in that order from
top to bottom. Black is not present in a rainbow. A
rainbow is shown in the given figure.
18. The image formed by a plane mirror is of the same

size and upright. However, the right appears left
www.betoppers.com
Light Solutions 151
and the left appears right in the mirror. Hence, the traffic. Since concave mirrors cannot provide large
word printed on the T-shirt will appear in the mirror field of view, these cannot be used as side-view
as given in alternative C. mirror in cars.
19. In a plane mirror, image distance is always equal to
object distance. The mirror is moved away from HOTS WORKSHEET
Pravjot at a rate of 1 m/s. This means that the 1. 40 cm 2. 45 cm
distance between Pravjot and the mirror is 3. (a) 60 m/s (b) 80 m/s (c) 40 m/s
increased by 1 m in each second. Thus, the image 4. 600 5. 90 cm 6. 500
distance is also increased by 1 m in each second. 7. The angle that the ray makes after each reflection
Hence, the distance between Pravjot and his image is clearly labelled in the adjacent figure . It is clear
increases by 2 m in each second i.e., the image that the final ray makes an angle of 600 with the
recedes from Pravjot at a rate equal to 2 m/s. horizontal, or in other words it emerges parallel to
20. We know that image distance from a plane mirror Mirror 1.
is equal to object distance. The distance of Babblee
M2
from the mirror is half the distance between Babblee
600
30
and her image, i.e.,
0
30
0
Hence, the distance of Pappu from the mirror is 2
× 50 = 100 cm, and the distance between Bunty
600
and the mirror is 2 × 100 = 200 cm = 2 m. 600 600
If the mirror is moved 1 m back from its original
1 M
position, then the distance of Bunty from the mirror 8. The first image at M1 is formed at a distance of 4
will be 2 + 1 = 3 m. Hence, the distance between cm behind it.
Bunty and his image will be two times, i.e., 2 × 3 = The first image at M2 is 6 cm behind it. The second
6 m. image at M 2 is at a distance of
30. The side-view mirror of a car must have a large 4+10=14 cm behind. M2.
field of view so that the driver can view large traffic Therefore, the distance between the first image at
behind him. Since convex mirrors provide a large M 1 and second image at M 2 is
field of view, these are used as side-view mirror in 4+14+10=28 cm.
cars. 9. The speed of image =
31. The size of the images formed by a convex mirror
is smaller than that of the object size. The images Distance travelled by image
can never be larger than the object. Hence, a convex Time
mirror always forms diminished images. Let us consider that the mirror has moved for 1
32. The dentist’s mirror is basically a concave mirror. second.
A concave mirror produces a large image of an  The distance travelled by mirror = 20 cm/s
object. This mirror helps in determining the position Let the initial distance between object and mirror
and size of cavity present in teeth. Hence, it is used be x.
in the dentist’s mirror. From the figure, it is clear that
33. The nature of work of cosmetologists is such that OM = x  MI = x
they have to view the large image of a small face Let M’ be the final position of the mirror.
area by holding a mirror close to the face. A  New object distance = OM’ =( x + 20) cm
concave mirror produces a large image of an object.  New image distance = M’I’ = ( x + 20) cm
Hence, cosmetologists use concave mirrors for their The distance moved by the image II’
work. = MI’ – MI = 20 + x 20 – x = 40 cm
34. Convex mirrors are used as side view mirrors in
cars and scooters because they can form images 40
 Speed of image =  40 cm / s
of objects spread over a large area. Therefore, 1
these help the drivers to see the traffic behind them. 10. 45° each
35. The side-view mirror of a car must have a large 11. Suppose OM1 is the horizontal plane mirror and
field of view so that the driver can view the large
www.betoppers.com
OM2 the second mirror. Let the angle between Light ray travels along the path PQRS, such that
the mirrors be  RS is the reflected ray of second mirror.
According to the laws of reflection,

The angle of incidence on first mirror be  .
ABM1  OBC1  45
Again, since CD and OM 1 ar e parallel, BQR  90  
DCM 2  
( It is the glancing angle)
According to the laws of reflection,
Given, CRS  30
DCM 2  BCO  
Now, in COB .  BRQ  30 (g i  g r )
OCB  CBO  COB  180
In QBR,(90           10
or  + 45° +  = 180°
1
  = 67 IIT JEE WORKSHEET
2
12. Let PO and OQ be the two plane mirrors inclined 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
at an angle 
A light ray AB is incident on PO at B. BC is its B A C B B B D C B B
reflected ray incident on OQ at C, such that CD is 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
the final reflection.
Given, AB||CD,  =? AB AC BC
B D A B B CD CD
CD D D
21 22 23 24 25
AB CD D B D

QUESTIONS
1. Here, the student is required to investigate the
phenomena of absorption, reflection, refraction, and
transmission of light. A mirror reflects light that is
Let x be the angle between BC and the mirror OQ. incident on it. As a result, a virtual image is formed
ACQ  x (Glancing Angles are equal) As AB on the other side of the mirror. Hence, mirrors cast
and CD are parallel to each other, images because they reflect light.
ABC  CDB  180 CDB 180  2 2. The image formed by a plane mirror is such that its
From the figure, x + x + (180 –2  ) = 180°. size is always equal to the object size. Plane mirrors
never produce magnified or diminished images.
x
In BOC,(90  )      180    90 3. A ray of light incident on the surface of a mirror
gets reflected. This leads to the formation of an
Therefore, the angle between two mirrors is 90°.
image, as shown in the following figure.
13. AB and BC are two mirrors and the angle between
them is 70°.
www.betoppers.com
Light Solutions 153
5. The distance of the image from the plane mirror is

same as the distance between the plane mirror and
the object. This distance is independent of the height
of the object, that is, even if we increase the height
of the objects, the distance between the mirror and
the object will remain the same.
In the given case, the initial distance between the
pencil and the plane mirror is 10 cm. When this
A plane glass slab is a transparent material and pencil is replaced by another pencil of length twice
refracts light. A light ray incident on the surface of the previous one, the distance between its image
a plane glass slab gets displaced, as shown in the and the mirror remain unaffected. Therefore, the
following figure. Therefore, it cannot form an image. distance between the image of the new pencil and
the mirror is 10 cm.
6. The image formed by a plane mirror is erect,
laterally inverted, and of the same size as that of
the object. On the other hand, the image formed by
a convex mirror is erect and diminished.
In the given case, the image is of the same size as
the object. Therefore, the mirror used in the given
case is a plane mirror.
Hence, a mirror can form images because it reflects
The image formed by a plane mirror is such that its
light while a plane glass slab cannot do so because
distance from the mirror is same as the distance
it refracts light.
between the plane mirror and the object. Hence,
4. In case of reflection in a plane mirror, the image the mirror is placed in the middle of the candle and
distance from the mirror surface always remains its image. Therefore, the plane mirror is placed 15
the same as the object distance from the mirror cm away from the given candle.
surface. It is given that the distance between the
7. A convex mirror always produces virtual images
pencil and its image is 40 cm. Hence, the pencil is
smaller than the size of the object.
40
placed at a distance of  20 cm from the mirror.. 8. In the given activity, the candle is placed in front of
2 the instrument and its image is formed on the
Now, the pencil is moved 5 cm towards the mirror. instrument. The image is erect, virtual in nature,
Hence, the new object distance will be 20 – 5 = 15 and enlarged in size. Only a concave mirror can
cm. The new image distance from the mirror will form this type of image of an object when the object
be equal to the object distance that is 15 cm (as is placed very near to it. Therefore, the optical
shown in the given figure). instrument used in the activity is a concave mirror.
9. The side view mirror of a car is a convex mirror. It
forms erect and virtual images of distant objects.
10. The images formed by the described mirrors are
small and cover a large area. The field of view of
the described mirrors is large. Only convex mirrors
have a large field of view that produces small
images.
11. The rear-view mirror of an automobile is a convex
mirror. The convex mirror enables the driver to see
a wider area behind the vehicle.
www.betoppers.com
12. Street lamps are used to light a large open area.

Hence, the light emitted from these lamps must
spread over a large area. This job is successfully
done by convex mirrors because they diverge the
parallel light rays coming from the light source.
Hence, convex mirrors are used as reflectors in
street lamps.
13. The side-view mirror of a car must have a large
field of view so that the driver can view the large
traffic. Since concave mirrors cannot provide large
field of view, these cannot be used as side-view
mirror in cars.
14. It is the convex lens that is used as magnifying glass
for reading small text. The reason behind this is
that it forms an erect and virtual image of the text.
15. The fact that the lens was unable to burn the paper
indicates that the rays of the sun coming towards
the paper were not being converged by the lens
i.e., the rays were diverged by the given lens.
Therefore, the lens used by Rajesh is a concave
lens.
The image formed by a concave lens is always
erect and smaller in size than the object. Therefore,
the appearance of the spectacles through the lens
is erect and small.
26. 20
27. 10
28. 7
29. A-r; B-t; C-p; D-q; E-s
30. A-p; B-pr; C-qst; D-qst; E-pr

www.betoppers.com
4. ELECTRIC CURRENT & ITS EFFECTS
SOLUTIONS
5. Current, I = 0.5 A
FORMATIVE WORKSHEET Time, t = 10 min = 600 s
Charge, Q = It = 0.5 A × 600 s
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 = 300 C.
6. Here, I = 0.2 A, t = 1 h = 3600 s
D C C A B C C A
Charge, q = I × t = 0.2 × 3600 = 720 C.
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 7. Here, I = 1 A, t = 1 s
Total charge, q = I × t = 1 × 1 = 1 C
D B B A B C B C B C
Charge on one electron, e = 1.6 × 10–19 C
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 70 71 72 Number of electrons
C C C B A C A D C B Total charge 1C
 
73 74 75 76 77 78 Charge on one electron 1.6  1019 C
* A A AC B A = 6.25 × 1018
8. Here, n = 1020, e = 1.6 × 10–19 C, t = 0.1 s
HINTS / SOLUTIONS TO THE SELECTED Total charge, Q = ne = 1020 × 1.6 × 10–19 = 16 C
QUESTIONS Q 16
1. Number of electrons, n = 107 Current, I    160A
t 0.1
Current, I = ? 9. i = 10 mA = 10 ×10–3A
We know that, t = 10 min = 10 × 60 sec.
Q _________ Q = it
I= (1) = 10 × 10–3 × 10 × 60
t
17 =6C
Charge of 10 electrons
10. Q = 100 C
= 107 × Charge of 1 electron t = 4 sec
= 107 × 1.6 × 10–19 C Q 4
Substituting the above value in (1), we get i  = 0.04 A
t 100
107 × 1.6 × 10-19 11. Number of electrons acquired,
 1.6  1012 A
1 q 1
2. Charge on one electron (e) = 1.6 × 10–19 C n   6.25  1018 , i.e., it has
Let the number of electrons be n. e 1.6  1019
Current, I = 4 A acquired 6.25 ×1018 additional electrons.
We know that, 12. q = n e = 106 ( –1.6 × 10–19) C = –1.6 × 10–13 C.
Q ne 13. Formula : Q = It  1800 = 2 × t or,,
I= =
t t 1800
t= = 900 sec = 15 min
It 4 1 2
n   2.5  1019
e 1.6  1019 14. Q = I × t = 1.6 × 1 = 1.6 Col.
3. (a) Here, Q = 3.2 × 10–7 C, e = 1.6 × 10–19 C Each electron carries a charge of q = 1.6 × 10–19
Number of electron transferred, Col.
Hence the number of electrons flowing through the
Q 3.2  107
n   2  1012 1.6
e 1.6  1019 bulb is n 19
 1019
1.6  10
(b) Yes, there is a transfer of mass from wool to
15. a) Q = I × t = 1.5 × 60 = 90 coulomb
polythene.
b) W = VQ = 100 × 90 = 9000 joule.
4. Here, n = 1022, e = 1.6 × 10–19 C
 Q = ne = 1022 × 1.6 × 10–19 = 1.6 × 103 C q 4  107
16. n   2.5  1012
As the comb has excess of electrons, so e 1.6  10 19
Charge on comb = -1.6 x 103 C.

q 28. An electric motor converts electrical energy into

17. No. of electrons transferred, n  Mass mechanical energy.
e A generator converts mechanical energy into
q
  electrical energy.
transferred = me × n = me ×   A telescope is used for viewing objects situated at
e
large distances.
work 5 A door bell converts electrical energy into sound
18. e.m.f. of cell =   0.5V
ch arg e 10 energy.
29. A metallic material must be used as a core in an
w 100 electromagnet. Hence, iron can be used to make
19. Potential    20 volt.
q 5 the rod of an electromagnet.
30. Electromagnet can be formed by putting a magnetic
20. WAB = q (VB – VA)
material inside an electric coil. As long as the current
WAB 2 1 flows through the coil the core magnetic material
 (VA – VB) = –   1  10 V .
q 20 behaves as an electromagnet.
31. The working of the hair dryer is based on heating
w 10 effect of electric current. When electric current is
21. V    2V
q 5 passed through the hair dryer that has a coil of wire
called the element, the element becomes red hot
22. Energy = work done = charge × potential = 1 eV and gives out heat. Hence, the element of the hair
joule. dryer works on the principle of heating effect of
23. In order to answer this question correctly, the student electric current.
needs to classify materials as electrical insulators 32. A simple electromagnet can be constructed by
and conductors. The iron bar will be converted to winding a current carrying coil over a core. Hence,
an electromagnet if the solenoid is made up of an the coil in the electric generator constructed by
electrical conductor. Plastic is an electrical insulator. Tempenny is an electromagnet.
Therefore, electricity will not pass through the 33. The current flowing through a coil produces a
solenoid made of plastic. Hence, if a plastic wire is magnetic field which attracts the iron rod downward.
used to make the solenoid, the iron bar will not be 34. A simple electromagnet is constructed by winding
converted into an electromagnet. a current carrying coil of wire over an iron rod.
24. This question is successfully answered by the student Therefore, in the electromagnetic train signal shown
who knows that a light bulb emits light as a result of in the figure, part A represents an electromagnet.
the heating up of the filament. This happens because 35. The strength of an electromagnet is increased by
of the conversion of electrical energy into heat increasing the number of turns in it. This implies
energy and light energy. that the latch will work more effectively with the
Hence, a light bulb emits light because of high increase in the strength of the electromagnet as it
temperature. will pull the latch with greater force.
25. A generator is used for converting mechanical 36. An electromagnet is a type of temporary magnet in
energy into electrical energy. which magnetic field is induced by a flow of electric
An electric motor is used for converting electrical current. This magnetic field helps the electromagnet
energy into mechanical energy. in attracting magnetic substances such as paper
An electromagnet is used for generating a magnetic clips.
field. 37. When an electric current passes through a
A magnetic compass is used for detecting magnetic conducting wire, it becomes hot. The phenomenon
fields. of heating of the wire in response to electric current
26. A current carrying wire produces a magnetic field is called the heating effect of electric current. An
around it. Hence, only a compass, which can be electric iron works on this principle. It is the element
used to detect magnetic fields, when brought near of an electric iron that becomes hot when electricity
the wire, will show a deflection. is supplied to it.
27. A current carrying wire produces a magnetic field
around it.
www.betoppers.com
Electric Current & Its Effects Solutions 157
38. When current is passed through the coil, a magnetic 44. An electric fuse works on the principle of heating
field is produced by the electric current that effect of current. When a current exceeds the rating
magnetizes the iron hammer. The magnetized of the fuse element, it melts and breaks the circuit,
hammer is attracted toward the gong, which is stopping the flow of current. When 4 A current flows
usually made up of steel. Hence, the magnetized through the given fuse and circuit, the fuse will melt
hammer strikes the gong to produce sound energy and break because the amount of current is more
in the doorbell. than the fuse rating.
39. A magnetic compass contains a magnetized needle 45. An electric fuse consists of a wire of low melting
that is free to align itself with Earth’s magnetic field. point (called the filament). It works on the heating
A magnetic compass will show a deflection when effect of current. When excess current flows
brought near an electromagnet. through the filament, a large amount of heat is
40. Every magnet, whether temporary or permanent, produced. As a result, the filament melts and breaks
has two poles called North Pole and South Pole. the circuit, stopping the flow of current in the circuit.
41. There are two ways of producing a magnetic field. This protects electrical appliances from damage
A magnetic field is produced by magnetic dipoles caused by an excessive amount of current in the
that are present in permanent magnets. It is also circuit. Hence, electric fuses are safety devices.
produced by moving charges or flowing electric
current. Hence, when current is passed through a 46. The heating effect of current states that a wire
wire wound around an iron rod, it magnetizes the becomes hot when current is allowed to pass
iron rod by aligning the magnetic poles inside the through it. When the amount of current flowing
iron rod, producing a magnetic field around it. through a wire is enough to produce a large quantity
42. An electric iron is a heating device. It produces of heat, the wire can even melt and break. This
heat when electricity is allowed to pass through its principle is involved in the working of an electric
element. The element of an electric iron is a coil of fuse. It consists of a wire of low melting point. The
wire. The coil becomes hot when current flows wire, called filament, melts and breaks in response
through it. The element of the given iron is labelled to a large amount of current that produces heat in
as III (as shown in the given figure). the wire.
47. Motor is an electric device, which works on
electricity. It converts electrical energy into
mechanical energy. It is not a heating device.
Therefore, it does not work on the principle of
heating effect of current. Hence, Raju should
remove motor from the list of electric devices that
The given table explains the labelled parts with their work on the principle of heating effect of current.
respective names. 48. Here, I = 3 A, R = 80
Label Part
I Terminals By Ohm’s law, V = IR = 8 × 3 = 24
II Insulating body 49. Here, V = 1.4 V, I = 0.35
III Element
IV Handle V 1.4
R  4
43. A heater is a heating device that works on the I 0.35
principle of heating effect of current. It consists of
50. (a) For electric bulb:
a heating filament and a coil of wire. The melting
point of the wire is very high. When current is V = 220, R = 1200 
allowed to pass through this coil, it produces a large
From Ohm’s law,
amount of heat. The high melting point of the heater
filament ensures that the filament does not melt on V 220V
I= = = 0.18A
excessive heating produced by the heating effect R 1200Ω
of current.
www.betoppers.com
(b) For electric heater coil. 60. In order to answer this question, the student must
V = 220 V, R  100 be able to identify whether a material is a good or
From Ohm’s law, bad conductor of electricity. To light up the bulb,
points P and Q must be connected by an electrically
V 220V conducting material. Iron is a good electrical
I= = = 2.2 A
R 100Ω conductor. Hence, the bulb will light up when points
Clearly, the heater coil draw much more current P and Q are connected with a plate made of iron.
than the electric bulb. 61. In order to answer this question, the student must
51. When potential difference, V = 60V, be able to classify materials as electrical conductors
Current (I) = 4 A and insulators. Copper is a good conductor of
electricity. Therefore, when points P and Q are
By Ohm’s law,
connected with a copper rod, a short circuit will
V 60V occur in the battery and current will not pass
Resistance, R = = = 15Ω through the bulb. Hence, the bulb will not light up.
I 4A
When the potential difference is increased to 120 62. Plastic is an electrical insulator. Hence, plastic
V, the current drawn by the heater will be cannot be used to make electrical wires.
63. Overhead electric lines transfer a high voltage of
V 120V electricity and ceramics is an insulator of electricity.
I   8A
R 15 Therefore, ceramic pulleys are used to prevent
52. i = 10 mA = 10 ×10–3A electric wires from touching the poles.
t = 10 min = 10 × 60 sec. 64. Graphite is an allotrope of carbon and is a good
Q = it conductor of electricity. Hence, it cannot be used
= 10 × 10–3 × 10 × 60 an electrical insulator.
=6C
65. Wood is a very good electrical insulator. Therefore,
53. Q = 100 C
t = 4 sec the possibility of receiving an electric shock while
Q 4 working on an electric line is minimized by standing
i  = 0.04 A on a wooden plank.
t 100
54. t=? 66. This simple problem can be solved by analyzing
Q = 10 C the given circuit. The complete circuit should consist
i=2A of a bulb, a switch, and an energy source, such as
Q = it a battery. The given circuit does not contain any
= 10 × 2 = 20 C battery or energy source. Hence, the bulb will not
55. Electric current can pass through iron. Hence, Iron
glow on closing the switch.
is a good conductor of electricity.
67. The bulb will glow, when the constructed circuit is
56. The handle of an electrical repairing tool should be
closed. Using the given four wires, bulb, switch,
made of an electrical insulator. Tin is a good
and battery, a closed circuit can be constructed as,
conductor of electricity, i.e., electric current can
pass through it. Hence, tin cannot be used to cover
the handles of electrical repairing tools.
57. Wood is a bad conductor of electricity. The circuit
will not become complete on inserting wood in the
gap. Hence, the bulb will not light up.
58. Insulators are those materials that do not conduct
electricity. Plastics cannot conduct electricity.
Hence, plastic cup is an insulator. 68. By reversing the terminals of the battery in the
59. In order to answer this question correctly, the given circuit, the direction of the current flowing
student must be able to classify materials as through the circuit will reverse. The functioning
electrical insulators and conductors. Electric wires of the bulb does not depend on the direction of
are coated with plastic because plastic is a good current flowing through it. Hence, there will be
electrical insulating material. This minimizes the no effect on the operation of the bulb. The bulb
unavoidable contact of the wire with other parts of will remain glowing as before.
the circuit or living tissues.
www.betoppers.com
69. If bulb 1 gets fused, then the equivalent circuit 18. Moving electric charges produce a magnetic field
can be represented asi.e., the circuit breaks. around themselves. The flow of current in the wire
Since the circuit of bulb 2 becomes incomplete, it loop is caused by moving electrons. This means that
will stop glowing. when current flows through the wire loop, a
magnetic field is produced around the wire. Hence,
the pin gets attracted toward the loop because of
magnetic force.
19. In an electric bell, electricity is used to produce
sound energy. Therefore, in an electric bell, electrical
73. a  2; b – 3; c  5; d – 1 energy is converted into sound energy.
20. The core of an electromagnet should be made up
CONCEPTIVE WORKSHEET of a ferromagnetic substance. Hence, Stella should
use iron as the core of the electromagnet.
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
21. An electric bell uses a magnet that can be turned
D B B B B C D C C B on and off.
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 22. Electromagnets are temporary magnets. When
electric current flows through an electromagnet, it
B D C C A B A C D A
gets magnetized. The magnetic field of an
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 electromagnet can be switched on and off according
A A C A B C A D D B to convenience.
23. An ideal fuse element should melt when a large
46 47 48 49 50 51 52
amount of current flows through it. Although its
A ABD B D C 3V A working is based on the phenomenon of the heating
effect of current, for the fuse element to work
HINTS / SOLUTIONS TO THE SELECTED effectively, it must have a low melting point so that
QUESTIONS it melts when the amount of current crosses the
1. Coulomb prescribed upper limit.
2. Giving electrons to it
24. An electric bell consists of a conducting coil inside
3. Electric current
which an iron rod is placed. When current flows
4. Ampere
through the coil, the iron rod converts into an
5. 1 C/s
electromagnet. Hence, statement II is correct.
6. Potential difference
7. Potential The phenomenon of converting a magnetic material
8. Zero potential into an electromagnet in response to the current is
9. Charge of an electron called the magnetic effect of current. Thus, an
10. 6.25 × 10 19 electric bell involves the magnetic effect of current.
11. Potential difference Hence, statement I is also correct.
12. Volt 25. The given phenomenon is based on the magnetic
13. QV effect of current. If the switch of the circuit is
14. Voltameter closed, then the current starts flowing through the
15. Ammeter wounded wire. Hence, the iron rod inside the coil
16. The iron nail will act as a core and since iron is a becomes an electromagnet. This magnet attracts
magnetic material, it will be transformed into an the nearby iron filings. An electromagnet remains a
electromagnet. magnet as long as the current flows through it. If
17. This question requires the student to know that a the current in the coil is ceased, then the iron bar
magnetic field is produced around moving charges. looses its magnetism and becomes a simple iron
The needle of a magnetic compass is deflected only bar. At this point, the iron bar releases the attached
by the presence of a magnetic field. Hence, a current iron filings.
carrying wire produces a magnetic field around itself.
www.betoppers.com
26. The working of an electric bell is based on the 30. An electromagnet is a temporary magnet that uses
magnetic effect of current. When the switch is electric current to generate a magnetic field around
closed, current flows through the wound coil. An it. The electromagnet behaves like a magnet when
iron bar (placed inside the coil) becomes an electric current flows through it. It is by virtue of
electromagnet. This electromagnet pulls a nearby this property that electromagnets attract magnetic
iron hammer. As a result, the hammer moves and particles such as iron, cobalt, and nickel toward
strikes the gong that produces a sound. Hence, it is themselves. Hence, broken cars, which are made
the hammer that moves when the switch of the bell up of magnetic materials, can be picked up using
is closed. cranes that have electromagnets attached to their
27. An electric bell works on the principle of magnetic lower ends.
effect of current. When current is allowed to flow 33. On closing switch I, the given electrical circuit will
through the coil of wire, an iron bar placed inside not be complete. Hence, on closing switch I,the
the coil becomes an electromagnet. The given table bulb will not glow.
lists the names of the labelled parts of a bell. 34. Electric current can pass through iron. Hence, Iron
Label Part is a good conductor of electricity.
35. The electrical circuit constructed by Robert will
I Gong
be complete when the positive terminal of the
II Hammer battery is connected to the point P. Hence, the
III Metal strip bulb will glow when the positive terminal of the
IV Coil of wire battery is connected to the point P.
36. The circuit shown in alternative A will be complete
Since the coil of wire is labelled IV, it is the part when the switch is closed. As a result, the bulb
which gets converted into an electromagnet. will glow. However, the circuit will not be complete
28. A door bell works on the principle of the magnetic when the switch is open. As a result, the bulb will
effect of current. A door bell is a device that not glow. Therefore, the bulb can be operated by
produces sound. It consists of an iron piece placed the switch in the circuit.
inside a current-carrying coil of wire. When a current 37. Andrew should connect the bulb and the fan such
is passed through this coil, the iron piece becomes that the voltage across the fan and the bulb is the
an electromagnet. The electromagnet attracts an same. Hence, Andrew should connect the bulb as
iron strip. As a result, a hammer (attached to the shown in alternative A.
iron strip) is pulled towards the gong. This strike 38. Alex should add the switch in such a way that
produces sound. The working principle of a door only bulbs N and P are controlled by it, i.e., the
bell is illustrated in the given figure. circuits of bulbs N and P should be incomplete
when the switch is open and complete when the
switch is closed. Hence, Alex should add the
switch at point III.
39. If a switch is placed at point I, then it will operate
only bulb M. Bulb N will not be affected by the
switch.
40. The simple circuit containing all the components
and the fan between the two bulbs is shown in the
29. A coil of wire behaves as a bar magnet when a circuit diagram given in alternative B.
current flows through it. The coil behaves as a bar 41. The simple circuit containing all the components
magnet. The coil is called solenoid, which acts as and the switch between the two bulbs is shown in
an electromagnet. The coil behaves as a magnet as the circuit diagram given in alternative C.
long as the current flows through it. When the 42. The student should insert an object that can allow
current stops flowing, the coil looses its magnetic electricity to pass through it. A nail is made of
property and becomes a simple coil. This effect is iron. Since iron allows electricity to pass through
called the magnetic effect of current. it, nail is a good conductor of electricity. In order
to complete the circuit, the student should connect
the open ends of the wires with a nail of sufficient
length.
www.betoppers.com
43. Although the lead of a pencil is encased within a 10. i - b, ii - a, iii - c

wooden frame, it allows electric current to pass 11. i - b, ii - a, iii - c
through. Since the given pencil is sharpened from 12.
both ends, it can conduct electricity. Component of Symbol
44. The bulb can glow only when two terminals of an electrical circuit
electric cell are connected to two terminals of a
Connecting wires
bulb respectively. In such arrangements, a circuit
is termed as closed circuit. An electric device such Switch in the ‘OFF’
as a bulb works in a closed circuit only. It can be position
observed that the terminals of the cell and the bulb
Bulb
are correctly connected in
arrangements Iand IVonly. Hence, cir cuit
arrangements Iand IV are correct and the bulb Cell
will glow.
45. The pictorial representation of the electric cell Switch in the ‘ON’
is represented in the given figure. position
Battery
13. In the given circuit, one terminal of the bulb is

It can be observed that an electric cell has two connected with one terminal of the cell while their
terminals called positive terminal (+) and other terminals are connected to a safety pin.
negative terminal (–). The metal cap attached to However, the safety pin is not connected with one
one end of the cell is its positive terminal. of the drawing pins. Thus, the circuit is not complete.
46. The path along which electric current flow is Hence, safety pin represents a switch in ‘OFF’
called an electric circuit. position. The circuit diagram of the given figure is
47. Non metals like glass, plastic, wood, paper, cloth shown in the following figure.
and rubber are the non-conductors of electricity.
48. Both the statements are true.
49. In series, total emf = sum of the individual emfs
= 2 + 2.5 + 4 = 8.5 V
50. In parallel, emf always remains constant.
51. In series, total emf = sum of the individual emfs
= 1 + 1 + 1 = 3v
14. To make a battery, the negative terminal of one
52. Electric cell
cell must be connected to the positive terminal of
the next cell. The wire indicates the manner in which
SUMMATIVE WORKSHEET
the given cells should be connected with each other,
1. Electric current from cell flows from positive ter- as shown in the following figure.
minal to negative terminal outside the cell
through circuit.
2. Electric bulb.
3. No. pure water is an insulator, but salty water is
a conductor of electricity. 15. The bulb in the circuit is not glowing because the
4. Electric current flows in one direction only. two cells are not connected properly.
5. Metal cap. To make the bulb glow, the negative terminal of
6. Cells are not placed properly. Positive terminal one cell should be connected to the positive terminal
of one cell is to be connected to negative of the other cell, as shown in the given figure.
terminal of another cell.
7. A device that is used to break an electric circuit
is called Switch.
8. An electric cell has two terminals.
9. Unit of electric current is Ampere.
www.betoppers.com
16. The two effects of electric current are When current passes through this coil, it behaves
as an electromagnet.
(i) Heating effect of electric current
(ii) Magnetic effect of electric current
17. When a current is switched on through a wire, the
wire starts behaving as a magnet. Hence, when a
compass needle is placed near the given current
carrying wire, it gets influenced by the magnetic
effect of electric current and gets deflected from
its North-South position.
18. No.
The given circuit does not have any current source.
21. No.
In the absence of current, the wire does not behave
as a magnet and hence, the compass needle will Electromagnets can only attract magnetic materials.
not show any deflection. Plastic bag is a non-magnetic material and will not
19. (a) Longer line in the symbol for cell be attracted by an electromagnet. Hence, an
representsits__positive__terminal. electromagnet cannot be used for separating plastic
(b) The combination of two or more cells is called bags from a garbage heap.
a __battery__. 22. No.
To make a battery, the negative terminal of one The electrician cannot be allowed to replace the
fuse in the house by a piece of wire. This is because
cell is connected to the positive terminal of the next
every wire cannot be used as a fuse filament. A
cell and so on. fuse filament must have a low melting point such
(c) When current is switched ‘on’ in a room heater, that it could melt and break in response of large
it __produces heat__. amount of current. Most of the wires have high
Working of a room heater is based on the melting points.
phenomenon of heating effect of electric current. 23. One of the reasons may be that the rubber band
(d) The safety device based on the heating effect used in the cell holder may not be tight enough to
of electric current is called a __fuse__. keep the two cells in contact with each other. If
Fuse is a safety device, which limits current in the cells are not in proper contact with each other,
circuit and breaks the circuit if the current exceeds then the circuit will not be complete and current
its maximum limit.
will not flow through the circuit. Hence, the bulb
20. (a) False
will not glow.
To make a battery of two cells, the negative
The other reason may be that the two cells are not
terminal of one cell must be connected to the positive connected properly. The negative terminal of one
terminal of the other cell. cell must be connected to the positive terminal of
(b) True the other cell.
The wire of the fuse is made of special material 24. (i) No.
which has a low melting point. When large current When the switch is in ‘OFF’ position, the current
passes through a fuse, it melts quickly and breaks does not flow through the circuit. Hence, none of
the circuit. the bulbs will glow.
(c) False (ii) Bulbs will glow simultaneously.
Working of an electromagnet is based on the When the switch is moved to the ‘ON’ position,
magnetic effect of electric current. An then all the bulbs will glow at once. This is because
electromagnet behaves as a magnet when current they all are connected to the same battery and
passes through it. Hence, it will attract a piece of switch.
iron.
(d) True
An electric bell has a piece of iron wound by a coil.
www.betoppers.com
6. The bulb of the circuit that is closed will glow.

HOTS WORKSHEET One terminal of the cell of the circuit, which
consists of bulb 2, is connected to one terminal of
KEY the bulb and the other terminal of the cell is
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 connected to a safety pin. The circuit is complete
B D D B A B A C C D because safety pin is made up of iron which is a
11 12 13 14 15 good conductor of electricity. Therefore, bulb 2
will glow.
C A A B C
7. The bulb through which current will flow will glow.
HINTS/ SOLUTIONS TO THE SELECTED Current flows only through a complete circuit. In
the circuit constructed by Raju, bulb 1 and bulb 2
QUESTIONS
are connected in open circuit because the wire is
1. In an electric torch, electric cells are the source
cut in this sub-circuit. Hence, no current will flow
of current. Without electric cells, it is impossible
through bulb 1 and bulb 2. The current will flow
to construct a torch.
only through bulbs 3, 4, and 5.
2. In an electric torch, current is produced by the
8. The direction of current that externally flows
battery. Current passes into the bulb filament
through a closed circuit is from the positive to the
through the switch. Hence, current flows through
negative terminal of the cell. Since the current is
switch, battery, and the bulb filament forming a
flowing from terminal M to terminal N of cell I,
circuit. Current does not pass through the reflector
terminal M must be a positive terminal.
because it is not a part of the circuit.
Again, it is clear from the second circuit that the
3. The bulb glows when current flows through it.
current is flowing externally from terminal S to
On closing the switch, the circuit gets completed.
terminal T of cell II. Hence, terminal T must be a
Hence, current flows from the cell through the
negative terminal. The following table shows the
bulb.
nature of the terminals of the given cells.
4. Current flows through the circuit only when the
circuit is complete. A circuit that has no break is Terminal Nature
called a closed or a complete circuit. In the circuit M Positive
that consists of bell 2, the two terminals of the
N Negative
electric cell are connected to one terminal of the
bulb and one terminal of bell 2 respectively. Also, S Positive
the bulb and the bell are connected to each other T Negative
and the switch is closed. Hence, the bulb will glow
and bell 2 will ring and produce a sound. Hence, terminals M and T are positive and
negative respectively .
9. Current flows in a closed circuit externally from
the positive to the negative terminal of the cell.
Hence, current will flow in the given circuit, along
the direction as shown in the following figure.
5. A nail is made of iron, which is a good conductor

of electricity. It allows the current to flow through
it. If the free ends of the circuit are connected It is clear from the circuit diagram that the
with the iron nail, then the circuit becomes directions of current in the wire segments RV,
complete. A current starts to flow in the bulb, and VT, ST, and RS
hence, it starts glowing. Hence, Suraj should use are respectively..
the nail to connect the free ends.
www.betoppers.com
10. A bulb glows only if current flows through its This arrangement is shown in the given diagram
filament. It is possible only if its two terminals are labelled as T only. Hence, electricity would flow
connected respectively with two terminals of the through the filament of the bulb in arrangement T
cell. An electric cell produces electricity through only and, hence, the bulb would glow.
its two terminals only. Hence, if the free ends of
the circuit are respectively connected to the IITJEE WORKSHEET
terminals IV and I of the cell, then the bulb would
glow. This is shown in the following figure.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
B A A A A A A A A A
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
B A B C D A B B B BC
21 22
AB AB
C C
11. Reflector (curved metallic surface that surrounds
the bulb) is a device that is used in a simple torch HINTS/ SOLUTIONS TO THE SELECTED
to focus the emitted light in a particular direction. QUESTIONS
It is not a part of its circuit and, hence, it does not
complete the electric circuit of the torch. 23. i = 10 A, t = 10 × 60 sec.
Q=?
12. Bulb of the given circuit will glow if a conducting Q = it = 10 × 10× 60
object is inserted between ends M and N. Key = 600 C
and nail are made of iron which is a conducting 24. Q = 100 C, t = 4 sec
material. Hence, the bulb will glow if Raj would
insert key and nail respectively. Q 100
i   25 A .
t 4
13. Bulb will glow only when the circuit is closed. This
25. Q = 10 C, i = 2A
is possible only when a conducting object is
t=?
inserted in between the gaps of the given circuit.
Q = it
Since a key is made of iron that allows electricity
to flow through it, it is a conducting object. Hence, Q 10
(or) t    5sec
key can be inserted tightly in the gap to make the i 2
bulb glow. 26. i = 5A, t = 5 min = 5 × 60 =300 sec
14. Torch is a simple electric device that gives off Q = it
light. It consists of a bulb that emits light by drawing = 5× 300
electric energy from the electric cells that are = 1500 C
enclosed in a cylindrical metallic case. Hence, the 27. Q = 60C, t = 4 sec,i = ?
electricity required for the operation of the torch Q
is provided by the electric cells. i
t
15. A bulb glows only if the current flows through its 60
filament. It is possible only if its two terminals are   15A
4
respectively connected to the two terminals of the
28. Not relevant
cell. Electricity is provided to an electric bulb
29. A  Q; B  P; C  R
through both its terminals only as shown in the
following figure. 30. A  s; B  r; C  p; D  t
31. A  q; B  r; C  p
32. A  r ; B p ; C q
33. A– S, B – R, C– Q, D – P
34. A– R, B – P, C– Q, D – S

www.betoppers.com
5. WIND, STORM AND CYCLONES
SOLUTIONS
10. Anemometer
FORMATIVE WORKSHEET
11. True
12. False
KEY
13. True
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 14. False
C A B A B C D A 15. The moving air is called wind.
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 16. Leaves, banners and flags flutter due to the
C B A C B B D D pressure exerted bv the air.
17. The air moves from the region where the air
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
pressure is high to those regions where the air
A A C B D B ABD C pressure is low.
18. The main cause of wind movements on the earth
is the difference in temperature.
19. On heating the air expands and becomes lighter.
20. Reducing of air pressure.
KEY 21. The word monsoon is derived from the Arabic word
mausam which means season.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
22. The winds from the oceans that carry water and
B D C A B A AB C bring rain is called monsoon.
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 23. Thunderstorms develop in hot, humid, tropical areas
like India very frequently.
D A A C A C D B
24. The swift movement of falling water droplets along
17 18 19 20 21 22 with the rising air create lightning and sound. Such
C C B D B D situation is called thunderstorm.
25. It is a very low pressure system with very high
speed wind revolving around it.
26. Cyclones are also called:
SUMM ATIVE WORKSHEET
(i) Hurricane
HINTS/ ANSWERS TO THE SELECTED (ii) Typhoon
QUESTIONS 27. Wind speed, wind direction, temperature and
1. moving humidity contribute to the development cyclones.
2. uneven 28. The centre of a cyclone in a calm area is called
3. warm, cooler the eye of the storm.
4. high, low 29. Moving air is called wind. Air moves from high
5. pressure pressure region to the low pressure region. It is
caused due to the difference in air pressure
6. water from oceans/rivers
between the two places. Due to the heat of the
7. expands, contracts sun air becomes warm, producing a low pressure.
8. hurricane, typhoon So, the warm air rises up and the cool air from the
9. mausam surrounding moves towards the area.
30. Winds blowing at a speed of 120 km per hour or 34. Thunderstorms develop in hot, humid tropical areas
above are known as cyclone. A cyclone is known very frequently. The rising temperature
by different names in different parts of the world. produces strong upward rising winds. These winds
It is called ‘hurricane’ in the American continent. carry water droplets upward. At a certain height
It is called typhoon in Japan, China and Philippines. these tiny water droplets freeze and fall down again.
In Australia, it is called Willy-Willies. Because of their swift movement, the water
Formation of cyclone: The formation of cyclone and ice particles rub against each other and build
is a very complex process. Due to heat of the up a negative electric charge in the cloud.
atmosphere water gets evaporated and changes to The electric charge is then released by the clouds
water vapour. When water vapour changes back by the stroke of lightning and thunder is
to water due to condensation, the heat is released
produced.
to atmosphere and warms the air around. Then
the hot air rises up causing a drop in pressure. More 35. The precautions in thunderstorms are as below.
air from surrounding regions not only rushes in but 1. It is well advised not to take shelter under an
also starts spiraling. This cycle is repeated. This isolated tree, because an isolated tree is
chain of events ends with the formation of a very prone to lightning. While in a forest, it is advised
low-pressure system with very high speed winds to take shelter under a small tree
evolving around it. This weather condition called a 2. Do not lie on ground.
cyclone. Factors like wind speed, wind direction
3. Do not take shelter under an umbrella with a
temperature and humidity contribute to the
metallic rod, as pointed metallic materials
development of cyclone.
are prone to lightning.
31 The different reasons for wind currents are :
i) Uneven heating between the equator and the 4. Do not sit near a window. Open garages, storage
poles due to shape of earth and its inclination. sheds, metal sheds are not safe places to take
ii) Uneven heating of land and water. shelter.
32. The seasonal winds bring rain between June and 5. If one is in water, he should get out and go inside
September in India and South Asia are known as a building.
Monsoon winds. 6. A bus or car is a safe place to take shelter.
There are two types of monsoon winds. They are 36. A tornado is a dark funnel shaped cloud that reaches
1. Summer Monsoon winds ( Sea breeze) from the sky to the ground. The neck of the funnel
2. Winter Monsoon wind ( Land breeze) sucks up anything which comes in its way. The
Summer Monsoon Winds: tornadoes may form within cyclone. The wind in a
In summer near the equator, the land become warm violent tornado can circle around at a speed of 300
and the temperature of the land increases. T h e km per hour.
air above the land becomes warm and rises up.
37. The centre of a cyclone is a calm area. It is called
This causes the air from the ocean blow
the eye of the storm. The diameter of the eye varies
towards the land. These are known as Summer
from 10 to 30 km. It is a region free of clouds and
Monsoon Winds.
has light winds.
Winter Monsoon Winds:
In winter, the direction of the wind flow gets 38. The steps taken by government for cyclone warning
reversed. It blows from the land to the oceans. are as under.
These are known as Winter Monsoon Winds. 1. With the help of Satellite Weather
33. Advantages Observation Radars, the formation of
1. It provides water for agriculture. cyclone, its direction and intensity is detected
2. It recharges the underground water sources. by the meteorological department.
3. It helps in recharging the rivers, ponds etc. 2. The news of the formation of cyclone , its
Disadvantages direction and intensity etc is immediately
1. Excessive rain causes water from the river flow telecasted and broadcasted at least 48 hours
out of their bank causing flood. before the arrival of the cyclone.
3. Cyclone warning is telecasted and
broadcasted every hour or half hour.
www.betoppers.com
Wind Storm and Cyclones Solutions 167
39. 1. We should not ignore the warning issued by 44. Holes are made in hanging banners and hoarders
the meteorological department through to allow air to pass through them as a result of
television, radio or news papers. which there will be less pressure of air on the
2. We should make necessary arrangement to banners or hoarders. Unless it is done, these may
shift the essential household goods, domestic be uprooted or distorted due to the pressure of the
animals and vehicles etc to safer places. air.
45. 1. I will help my neighbours in case cyclone
3. Avoid driving on roads through standing water.
approaches my village/town by the following
4. Keep ready the phone numbers of all ways.
emergency services like police, fie brigade 2. I will help my neighbours in shifting their
and medical centers. household articles, domestic animals etc to a
40. The precautions in a cyclone hit area are as under. safe place.
1. Do not drink water that could be 3. I will provide phone numbers of all
contaminated. Always store drinking water emergency services like police, fie brigade
for emergency. and medical centers.
2. Do not touch wet switches and fallen power 4. I will give them safety advice like avoiding
lines. driving on roads through standing water, not
touching wet switches etc.
3. Do not go out just for the sake of fun.
46. A good planning in advance will minimize the
4. Do not pressurize the rescue force by making damages to be caused by a cyclone. Hence, the
undue demands. following planning is required.
5. Cooperate and help your neighbours and 1. The cyclone warning issued by the
friends. meteorological department through television,
41. Method 1 : We can find the wind direction using radio or news papers must not be ignored
a Wind Vane or Weather Vane or W e a t h e r and followed carefully.
Cock. It consists of a a flat metallic sheet generally 2. The household articles, domestic animals,
cut into shape of a cock or ar row which is vehicle etc should be shifted to safe places.
mounted on disk and free to move around a axial 3. The telephone numbers of essential services
shaft and point in the direction of wind . They are like police, fire brigade and medical centers
typically used as an architectural ornament to the etc should be kept ready to meet the
highest point of a building. emergency situation.
Method 2 : We can find the direction of light wind 47. We know that increased wind speed is
using smoke from aggarbatties. The direction accompanied by a reduced air pressure. When we
of smoke will indicate the wind direction. blow air between the two balloons the pressure
between them is reduced. The pressure outside the
42. Two experiences that made us think that air exerts
balloon would then push them towards each other.
pressure are:
48. When we heat the air then it expands and occupies
1. Whiling cycling against the direction of the large space. We know that when same thing
wind, it is difficult to ride. It shows that the occupies more space, it becomes lighter. The warm
air exerts pressure. air is therefore lighter than the air. It is because hot
2. While rowing a sailboat in the direction of air goes up.
the wind, it is always easier to row and while 49. The regions close to equator get maximum heat
rowing a sailboat against the direction of the from the sun. This makes the air warm rises up
wind, it is very difficult to row. It also shows and the air from the regions in the 0-30 degrees
that the air exerts pressure. latitude belt on either side of the equator moves in.
43. No, I would not like to buy a house having windows These winds blow from the north and the south
but no ventilators. Warm air rises up and cool air towards the equators. At the poles the air is colder
comes downward. So, to make a stream of cool than at latitudes about 60 degree. The warm air at
and fresh air to continuously flow to the house these latitudes rises up and the cold wind from the
through the windows, there must be some poles rushes in. In this way, wind circulation is set
ventilators in the upper part of the wall. up from poles to the warmer latitudes.
www.betoppers.com
50. The device which is used to measure wind speed 5. Cyclones are accompanied with strong winds and
is called anemometer. Since wind speed plays an heavy rain. Thus, one should move to a shelter during
important role in the formation of storms an a cyclone for safety.
anemometer becomes useful to predict the cyclones The correct answer is B.
or storms in cyclone prone areas.
6. During thunderstorms people should take shelter
inside closed places such as a bus.
The correct answer is C.
7. A music system is an object that will not be useful
to Mutum while taking shelter from a thunderstorm.
8. A tornado is accompanied by very high speed
winds. Thus, an underground basement with no
windows is a safe place during a tornado. It remains
unaffected by the high speed winds that accompany
HOTS WORKSHEET a tornado.
KEY 9. During a cyclone, people should cooperate and help
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 neighbours and friends get out to safer places.
A C D D B C D D The correct answer is C.
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 10. A thunderstorm is a weather phenomenon that is
C C A B D C D A generated when the air mass becomes unstable .
Hot and humid air moves upward. This upward
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
rising wind contains water droplets. When the air
C A B C A B D B
reaches higher up in the atmosphere, these water
25 droplets start condensing and form clouds. This
C transformation is accompanied by the release of
heat that the air carries with it. When these clouds
HINTS/ ANSWERS TO THE SELECTED becomes so heavy that they are unable to hold the
QUESTIONS water, this water begins to fall down as water
droplets along with the cold air.This continuous
1. Seeds are dispersed by wind, water, and animals
movement of falling water (cold air) and rising hot
to different locations. Seeds dispersed by wind
air creates a thunderstorm as shown in the following
depend on the speed of the wind to travel long
figure.
distances. Hence, the relationship between
wind speed and distance travelled by seeds is direct.
With the increase in the wind speed, the distance
covered by seeds also increases.
2. During a cyclone, people should cooperate and help
neighbours and friends get out to safer places.
3. During thunderstorms people should take shelter
inside closed places such as a house or a closed
vehicle. Sanjay is safe from the thunderstorm
because he is sitting inside a car that is safe from
the lightning that frequently occurs during
thunderstorms.
4. When a tornado strikes, people should bend down The correct answer is C.
on their knees and protect their head with their
hands.
www.betoppers.com
Wind Storm and Cyclones Solutions 169
11. The centre of a cyclone is known as the eye of the 18. When air is heated up, it spreads and occupies a
cyclone. It is a low-pressure area and is relatively larger space. Hence, hot air becomes lighter than
calm. Therefore, region P in the given figure is a the cold air. When the air inside the balloon is heated
low-pressure area. up, the air becomes lighter due to expansion. This
High-speed winds flow in the outer section of a lighter air moves up, thereby lifting the balloon.
cyclone. Therefore, region Q in the given figure is The correct answer is A.
the region that experiences high-speed winds. 19. High speed wind is always accompanied with low
The correct answer is A. pressure. When a high speed wind blows over the
12. Cyclones are formed in regions in which air clothes, it creates a low pressure area over the
pressure is dropping. Pressure drops because of clothes. As a result of this, air pressure below the
the release of heat as a result of the condensation clothes become relatively higher than the air
of water vapour. pressure above it. Hence, air from below the clothes
The correct answer is B. rushes upward with high speed. This rush of air
13. Thunderstorms occur as a result of the interaction forces the clothes to move toward the low pressure
of ascending hot air and descending cold air. This area, thereby, causing the clothes to lift in the air.
is correctly depicted by the figure in alternative D. The correct answer is B.
The correct answer is D 20. In summers, the land warms up faster and remains
14. Cyclones are formed in hot and humid regions in at a relatively higher temperature than the oceans.
which the air pressure is dropping. A drop in air This high temperature causes the air over the land
pressure occurs because of the intense heating of to rise up. In order to fill the vacant space, cold air
the air above that region owing to the high from the ocean moves toward the land. This results
temperature in the region.This hot and humid air in the blowing of sea breeze during the summers.
rises up and creates a low pressure zone. Cold air Such winds are known as monsoon winds in India.
starts moving toward this low pressure zone from Since these winds contain high amounts of water
all the directions. As a result, this low pressure zone vapour, most of the rainfall received by most parts
turns into the centre of a storm. The air revolves of India is during the summers.
around this centre at very high speeds, thereby The correct answer is C.
forming a cyclone. 21. In summers, the land heats up faster and maintains
The correct answer is C. a relatively higher temperature than the oceans.
15. The centre of a cyclone is a calm area. Its pressure This high temperature causes the air over the land
is low in comparison to the outside pressure of the to rise up. In order to fill the vacant space, cold air
cyclone. It is called the eye of a cyclone. Its from the oceans moves toward the land. This results
diameter may vary from 10 km to 30 km depending in the blowing of a sea breeze during the summers.
upon the size of the cyclone. These are known as the monsoon winds. Since
The correct answer is D. these winds contain large quantities of water vapour
16. The Western coastline of India is less prone to that cause rainfall, the rainfall received by most
cyclones than the Eastern coastline both in terms parts of India is during the summer months, brought
of frequency and intensity. about as a result of these winds.
The correct answer is A. The correct answer is A.
17. Air in the tyres of all vehicles is filled at a pressure 22. When the winds move from a high pressure region
higher than the normal atmospheric pressure. When to a low pressure region in the Northern
tyres of buses and trucks burst, the high pressure hemisphere, owing to the rotation of the Earth, the
air inside the tyre suddenly comes into contact with direction of these winds is rightward. Similarly when
the relatively low pressure region in the atmosphere the winds blow from a high pressure region to a
outside. Hence, the air escapes at a very high speed low pressure region in the Southern hemisphere,
from the high pressure region toward the low its direction is deflected toward the left.
pressure region. This sudden interaction of the two Thus, rotation of the Earth is responsible for the
different pressure regions causes the loud sound relatively curved trajectory of the winds.
that is heard when a tyre bursts. The correct answer is B.
www.betoppers.com
23. During winters, land cools down much faster than the sea because land loses the heat much quickly than
water. Thus, the hot air above the surface of the sea rises up. In order to fill this vacant space, cold air from
the land moves toward the sea. This results in the blowing of land breeze during winters.
24. During day time when the temperature above the land is higher than that above the sea, the air above the land
rises because hot air is relatively lighter than cold air. As a result, cold air from the sea blows toward the land
to occupy the empty space. This blowing of wind from sea to land is called sea breeze. Sea breeze blows only
during daytime.
25. The density of air is inversely proportional to the temperature. In the given figure, the air of balloon A has the
lowest density, so it has the highest temperature, which means
density of air in balloon A < density of air in balloon C < density of air in balloon B.
So, the correct relation among their temperatures are TA >TC > TB.
The correct option is C.
IIT JEE WORKSHEET
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
D A B B C B D B
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
C C ABCD ABC AB ABC ABC ABCD
17 18 19 20 21
A B B 2 1
22.
Column A Column B
(i) Wind carrying water (iii) Monsoon
(ii) Moving air (iv) Wind
(iii) Measures the speed of wind (v) Anemometer
(iv) Dark funnel shaped clouds (ii) Tornado
(i) Thunderstorms
(v) Develops in India very frequently

www.betoppers.com
6. SOUND
SOLUTIONS
FORMATIVE WORKSHEET
KEY
Q.No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Key C B B D D C A D A B D C A B B
Q.No 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
Key A D C B D C A
HINTS / SOLUTIONS TO THE SELECTED arranged in the descending order of their

QUESTIONS magnitudes, the speed of sound in the three different
1. In order to answer this question correctly, the media is vs > vl > vg.
student needs to identify different forms of energy. 8. Sound travels through material media only. Solids,
A door bell is a device that produces sound. Hence, liquids, and gases are all material media. Therefore,
it emits sound energy to alert people. sound cannot pass through a box devoid of any
2. Sound is caused by vibration. Since object II is material medium inside. Hence, the sound produced
vibrating, it can be concluded that object II is by an alarm clock cannot be heard if it is kept in a
producing sound. box that is devoid of any material medium inside.
3. A jaltarang is a musical instrument made of a 9. An ear-horn is used to enhance the hearing ability
combination of water-filled bowls or glasses. In of a person with weak hearing power. This device
each bowl, water is filled up to different levels. amplifies the incoming sound in order to increase
When the bowls are gently struck in succession by its loudness, thereby enabling the person to hear
a stick, the air column of each bowl vibrates to the sound.
produce different frequency sounds. The combined 10. The vibration coming from a sound-producing object
effect is a pleasant sound. Hence, the air column passes through the ear canal (I) to the eardrum
is the vibrating part of the jaltarang. (III). In response to the vibration, the eardrum
4. Vibr ating objects pr oduce sound. When a starts vibrating. The eardrum transfers its vibration
stretched metal wire is plucked, it starts vibrating. to the three tiny bones (II). These bones vibrate in
This, in turn, produces a sound. accordance with the vibration of the eardrum.
5. The vocal cord vibrates when the lungs force air These vibrations are received by a coil-shaped tube
out through it. This results in the vibration of the known as the cochlea (IV). The cochlea contains
vocal cord, thereby causing sound to be produced. sound-sensitive nerve cells that pass the sense of
The vocal cord can loosen or tighten itself in order vibration to the brain.
to control the quality of the voice produced. Hence, 11. The to and fro or back and forth motion of a
the quality of a sound depends on the thickness or membrane is called its vibration.
thinness and tightness or looseness of the vocal 12. The first peak of the wave travels a distance of 3
cord. meters in 5 seconds. Hence, the speed of the wave
6. When the human lungs force air out through the 3m 3
vocal cord, it starts vibrating. Hence, a sound is is  m/s .
5s 5
produced.
A total of 15 peaks are produced in 5 seconds.
7. The speed of a wave is directly proportional to the
Ther efore, the frequency of the wave
density of a particular medium. The speed at which
sound travels in liquids is lower than the speed at 15 peaks
is  3Hz .
which it travels in solids. However, the speed at 5 seconds
which sound travels in liquids is higher than the The speed, wavelength, and frequency of a wave
speed at which it travels in gases. Hence, when are related as,
Speed 18. Humans can hear sounds of frequency lying

Wavelength  between 20 Hz to 20 kHz. This is called the ‘audible
Frequency
range’ for humans. The sound produced by an
Ther efore, wavelength ultrasonic whistle lies outside the audible range.
3 Humans cannot hear ultrasonic sounds. Since the
3 1 sound produced by an ultrasonic whistle is greater
5   0.20m  20cm t h a n
3 5 3 5
20 kHz, the sound produced by the given whistle
13. The tuning fork completes a total of 256 vibrations
may have a frequency range of 20 kHz to 25 kHz.
in one second. Therefore, the frequency of
19. The audible range for human ears is 20 Hz – 20000
vibrations of the fork is 256 Hz. It completes one
Hz. Therefore, the upper limit of the human audible
1 range is 20000 Hz or 2 × 10 4 Hz. Hence, the
complete vibration in = 0.004 seconds.
256 respective values of a and b are 2 and 4.
14. The time period of a pendulum is given by the time 20. The pitch of the sound is determined by the
taken by it to make one complete oscillation. It is frequency, not by the amplitude. Hence,
given by the inverse of the frequency of the statement I is not correct.
pendulum. The normal human audibility range is 20 Hz to
20,000 Hz. Therefore statement II is correct.
1 Sound requires a material medium to travel. Hence,
Time period  Frequency
sound can travel through water. Therefore,
Frequency is given as: statement III is also correct.
21. Mouth organ is a musical instrument that is used to
Number oscillations
Frequency  produce melodious sound. The produced sound is
Time taken not harmful to the human ear.
Time taken 22. Trees and plants, planted along the roadside and in
 Time period  and around residential colonies, cut down the traffic
Number of oscillations
noise reaching the residents. This helps in reducing
It is given that:
noise pollution.
Time taken = 2 s
Number of oscillations = 100
2 1
 Time period    0.02s KEY
100 50
15. The first wave travels a distance of 100 m in 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
seconds. Hence, the speed of the wave is
B C C D D B D A D B
100
 50m / s . The number of waves created per 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
2
second is the frequency of the wave. Therefore, C D C D A B C A D B
20 HINTS / SOLUTIONS TO THE SELECTED
the frequency of the wave is  10Hz .
2 QUESTIONS
Hence, the distance between two consecutive
1. Sound is generated by an object that produces
waves, i.e., wavelength
sound. Sound is produced on beating a drum.
Speed of the wave 50 The correct answer is B.
   5m
Frequency of the wave 10 2. When one person speaks he/she releases sound
16. The amplitude of a sound wave is given by the waves. These waves are detected by the ear of
maximum displacement of its vibration from the the second person. Hence, when two people talk
mean position. with each other, energy is transferred through sound
17. The intensity of sound wave is defined as the waves.
amount of energy transported through a medium The correct answer is C.
per unit time. It is measured in decibels.
www.betoppers.com
Sound Solutions 173
3. The vibrating ruler produces a sound. 10. The eardrum is a thin membrane present in the ear
The correct answer is C. which vibrates in response to a sound. The amount
4. When the drum-head is struck, it starts vibrating of vibration of the eardrum depends on the loudness
up and down so that it produces sound. The sand of the sound. If the loudness of a sound increases,
particles on the head of the drum also start vibrating then the amplitude of the vibration of the eardrum
because of the vibration of the drum-head. Hence, also increases. Excessive sound forces the eardrum
the striking of the drum will cause the sand particles to vibrate with large amplitude. As a result, it may
to move up and down on the drum-head. get damaged.
The correct answer is D. The correct answer is B.
5. When a stretched membrane is beaten, it starts 11. The loudness of a sound depends on its amplitude.
moving to and fro. The membrane is said to be in Larger the amplitude, louder will be the sound and
vibration. Since vibration produces sound, a vice-versa. Amplitude of a wave is the height of
stretched membrane, when beaten, produces the crest and trough of the wave. It can be observed
sound. This principle is used to make musical that the height of the crest and trough is the
devices which consist of stretched membranes, for maximum of a wave represented in alternative C.
example, a drum. When the head of a drum is Hence, the loudest sound is represented by wave
beaten, it starts vibrating, thereby producing sound. given in alternative C.
The correct answer is D. The correct answer is C.
6. Only vibrations can produce sound. No parts vibrate 12. Hertz (Hz) is the unit of frequency. Frequency is
when the lungs expand to fill air inside itself. Hence, defined as the number of oscillations or vibrations in
the expansion of lungs is not related to the per unit time. Hence, the number of to and fro
production of sound. motions of a membrane in per unit time is measured
The correct answer is B. in hertz.
7. To answer this question correctly, the student needs The correct answer is D.
to know that sound waves travel at different speeds 13. The student is asked to calculate the ringing
through different mediums. Sound waves can travel frequency of the bell, which is given as
through any medium except vacuum. Therefore,
Numbers of rings
Daniel hears two sounds of the tuning fork (one Frequency 
that travels through the wall and the other that Time interval
travels through air). Sound waves travel faster Julie heard the bell ring 24 times in one minute (60
through solids, than through air Hence, Daniel hears s)
the two sounds of the tuning fork at an interval. 24
The correct answer is D.  The ringing frequency of the bell   0.4Hz
60
8. This simple problem can be solved by the student
who knows that sound travels faster through water,
14. The frequency of vibrations of a membrane is given
than through air. Hence, the second boat will
by the number of oscillations in one second. It is
receive the sound signal sent through water earlier,
given as:
than the sound signal sent through air.
The correct answer is A. Numbers of oscillations
Frequency 
9. Sound waves require a particle medium to travel Time taken
through it. Vacuum is a medium that does not It is given that:
contain any particles. Hence, sound waves cannot Number of oscillations = 20
travel through vacuum. Time taken = 2 s
20
Why alternatives A, B and C are wrong:  Frequency   10Hz
Wood, glass, and gasoline are particle media. 2
Hence, sound waves can travel through these The frequency of a sound determines whether the
materials. sound is audible or not. The audible frequency range
for human ears is 20 Hz “ 20000 Hz. A sound having
a frequency of 10 Hz cannot be heard by humans
because it is out of the audible range.
www.betoppers.com
15. Sound is produced because of the vibrations of a

body, called sound source. The amplitude of the SUMM ATIVE WORKSHEET
sound is determined by the amplitude of the
vibrations. The larger the amplitude of the 1. Sound can travel through solids, liquids, and gases.
vibrations, the louder is the sound. Hence, the Sound requires a medium to travel through. Solid,
loudness of a sound is governed by the amplitude liquid and gas provide the medium for sound.
of the vibrations. Hence, sound can travel through solids, liquids and
The correct answer is A. gases.
16. The frequency of a wave is measured by the number 2. The voice of an adult man is of lower pitch in
of peaks or troughs produced in a second. comparison to the voices of a baby boy, a baby girl
Therefore, the frequency of the produced wave is and a woman. Since frequency of a sound is directly
Number of peaks 30 peaks proportional to its pitch, man’s voice is of minimum
 = 6 peaks/second frequency in comparison to a boy, a girl, or a
Time 5 seconds
woman’s voice.
= 6 Hz
3. (a) True
Sound requires a medium to travel through. Since
17. Frequency is given by the number of oscillations of
vacuum is devoid of any medium, sound cannot
a vibrating pendulum in one second. It is given as:
travel through it.
Total number of oscillations (b) False
Frequency 
Total time taken The number of oscillations per second of a vibrating
It is given that the frequency of the pendulum is 25 object is known as its frequency. Time period is
Hz and the number of oscillations is 100. the time required to complete one oscillation.
Total time (c) False
Number of oscillations 100 Loudness of a sound is proportional to the square
required  Frequency
  4s of the amplitude of its vibration. When the amplitude
25
of vibration of a sound is large, the sound is very
Hence, the given pendulum will take four seconds loud. The sound is feeble for small amplitude.
to make 100 oscillations. (d) True
The correct answer is C. Humans cannot hear sounds of all frequencies.
18. Humans can hear sounds whose frequency falls in
Humans can hear a sound whose frequency falls
the audible range. The range of audible frequencies
in the range of 20 Hz”20,000 Hz. The sound having
for human ears is 20 Hz to 20000 Hz. Sounds of
frequency out of this range is inaudible to humans.
frequency less than 20 Hz or greater than 20000
(e) False
Hz is not heard by humans. A sound of frequency
18 Hz does not lie in the audible range. Hence, this The pitch of a sound is proportional to its frequency.
sound is not heard by humans. As the frequency of vibration increases, the pitch
The correct answer is A. of the sound also increases and vice-versa. A sound
19.d A leaf-blowing machine is a device that is used to is said to be high pitched if its frequency of vibration
clean pavements covered with leaves. The sound is high, and is low pitched for a small frequency of
produced by it may be harmful to the human ear. vibration.
Hence, a leaf-blowing machine can produce high (f) False
noise. Unwanted or unpleasant sounds are known as
The correct answer is D. noise. Sounds that are melodious and pleasing to
20. Sound pollution affects the ears directly and can ear are known as music.
result in loss of hearing. Indirectly, it can also affect (g) True
the function of the brain. This can lead to high blood Unwanted or unpleasant sounds are known as
pressure (hypertension), anxiety, and sleeping noise. If one is subjected to loud unpleasant sound
disorder. However, it is unlikely for breathing continuously for a long time, then it may cause
problem to occur as a result of noise pollution. temporary hearing impairment.
www.betoppers.com
Sound Solutions 175
4. (a) Time taken by an object to complete one 8. The sound that is pleasing to the ear is called music.
oscillation is called __time period__. For example, the sound produced by violins, pianos,
(b) Loudness is determined by flutes, pungs, etc.
the __amplitude__ of vibration. The sound that is unpleasing to the ear is called
(c) The unit of frequency is __hertz (Hz) __. noise.
(d) Unwanted sound is called __noise__. Some examples of noise are as follows:
(e) Shrillness of a sound is determined by (i) Sound produced by horns of buses and trucks
the __frequency__ of vibration. (ii) Sound of electrical generators
(Shrillness is also called pitch of the sound. Pitch (iii) Sound of a gun shot
is directly proportional to the frequency of vibration. (iv) Sound produced by jackhammers
Hence, shrillness is determined by the frequency Yes. Music can become noise when played at high
of vibration.) volumes.
5. Frequency of oscillations is defined as the number 9. Some sources of noise pollution are as follows:
of oscillations of a vibrating body per second. It is (i) Televisions and transistors running at high
given by volumes
F r e q u e n c y (ii) Loudspeakers and crackers
Number of oscillations 40 (iii) Horns of buses, cars and trucks
   10Hz (iv) Home appliances such as mixer, desert cooler,
Total time 4
etc.
The time required to complete one oscillation is
10. Noise pollution can lead to a number of health-
known as time period. It is given by the inverse of
related problems. Some of them are as follows:
the frequency.
(i) Hearing loss
T i m e
(ii) Insomnia; inability to sleep
1 1 (iii) Hypertension
period  Frequency of oscillation  10  0.1s (iv) Severe headache
(v) Stress
6. The time required to complete one oscillation is
11. There will be more noise in the house which is along
known as time period. It is given by the inverse of the roadside. This is because noise produced by
the frequency. transportation vehicles may cause trouble to the
1 residents. The intensity of noise decreases with
Time period  Frequency of oscillation the distance between the source and the listener.
Hence, it is better to take the house that is three
Frequency of oscillations = 500 Hz lanes away from the roadside.
1 12. Larynx is a part of the throat. It is responsible for
Time period   0.002s production of sound. A sketch of a human larynx is
500 shown in the following figure.
7. (a) Dholak is a musical instrument. It consists of
a stretched membrane called its head. When the
head is beaten gently, the stretched membrane sets
into vibration. Since sound is produced when an
object vibrates, the dholak produces a sound.
(b) Sitar is a musical instrument. It consists of
stretched strings. When a string is plucked, it sets
into vibration. Since sound is produced when an
object vibrates, the sitar produces a sound.
(c) Fluteis a hollow pipe. When air is blown over Larynx moves when we swallow something. Inside
its mouth, the air inside the pipe is set into vibration. the larynx, there are two vocal cords. There is a
As a result, a pleasant sound is produced. small gap between them. This small gap allows air
to pass through. When we speak, air is forced into
this small gap by the lungs. This prompts vocal cords
www.betoppers.com
to vibrate. Since vibrating objects produce sound, 6. Sound is produced by to-and-fro motion. Heat
sound is produced due to the vibration of vocal cannot bring about to-and-fro motion in a string.
cords. Hence, sound cannot be produced by heating.
13. The speed of sound is less than the speed of light. 7. Ear-horn is used by hearing impaired persons who
Hence, light reaches us before the sound during a have weak hearing power. This device amplifies
lightning, which is accompanied by thundering. the incoming sound to enhance the amplitude and
hence, enhance the loudness of the sound.
HOTS WORKSHEET Therefore, a hearing impaired person can detect
and hear the normal sound by using this aid.
KEY 8. Jackhammer’s headphone is a device that a
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 person who works with jackhammer wears
because it is a noise-canceling device. Noise
C B D D B D D C A A produced by jackhammer is very loud and if
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 exposed to a relatively long time, then it may affect
the listening ability of the working person.
C B C B D A D A D A The Jackhammer ’s Headphones absorb and
21 22 23 cancel or minimize this noise.
9. Human ear can detect sounds whose frequencies
B C D
lie in between 20 Hz to 20 kHz. This is called the
audible range of frequency. The frequency of sound
that is outside this range is termed as inaudible
QUESTIONS
sound. Inaudible sounds cannot be heard by
1. The eardrum, labelled as III in the given figure, humans. Since ultrasonic equipment emits sound
consists of a stretched membrane. When sound of frequency greater than 20 kHz, which lies outside
falls on it, it vibrates and passes the signals to the the audible range, the emitted sound is inaudible.
inner ear. 10. A jackhammer produces excessive noise that could
2. Sound is produced and carried by the vibration of a damage the hearing perception of the person who
medium or matter molecules. In vacuum, no continuously works with it. To prevent any damage
vibration of medium is possible. Therefore, sound to the hearing, the person wears a hearing
cannot travel through vacuum. Vacuum is created protection that is designed to protect ears from the
inside the box. Therefore, the vibration of the clock excessive noise of jackhammers. It is evident from
cannot be carried by any medium to the walls of the given information that a jackhammer produces
the box. Hence, no sound is heard outside the box. noise. Hence, ‘protection with jackhammers’
protects ear from noise.
3. Wind pipe blows wind into the slit present in the 11. The frequency of sound produced by women or
larynx. This action produces sound. Wind pipe does girls is very high, that is, women can produce high
not modify the quality of sound produced by larynx. pitched sounds. High frequency sound can be easily
4. The eardrum does not reproduce sound. It vibrates transmitted and clearly heard over a distance
to the tune of the incoming sound and sends these through telephone cable. Hence, women are
signals to the inner ear from where the signals go recruited as telephone operators because they can
to the brain. Hence, the statement in alternative D is produce high pitched sound.
incorrect. 12. The rate of vibration of eardrum depends on the
air vibration and on its elasticity. A thin membrane
5. It is the stretched membrane of the tabla that
vibrates properly when it is stretched tightly. It will
produces sound. Other parts such as the wooden
not vibrate properly if its elasticity is loosened.
shell and the stretched strings of a tablaenhance
13. Sound requires a material medium to travel through.
quality of the sound produced. The ring encircling
Since vacuum is devoid of any material medium,
the membrane acts as the frame to hold the
sound cannot travel in it. On closing the switch, the
stretched membrane. Therefore, the sound is
rod breaks and separates from point O within the
produced by the stretched membrane of a tabla.
vacuum sphere. At this point, as Suraj will tap the
rod, sound will reach to one of the broken ends.
www.betoppers.com
Sound Solutions 177
It cannot reach to the other broken end because

sound cannot travel through vacuum. Therefore,
tapping sound will not reach the other end of the
rod. Hence, Pankaj will unable to hear the tapping
after closing the switch.
14. Sound requires a material medium to travel through.
Since vacuum is devoid of any material medium,
sound cannot travel in it. In the given case, the
hollow glass partition behaves like a vacuum after When its strings are plucked, it produces a pleasant
air is evacuated from it. Therefore, the alarm sound sound. The qualities of sound vary with tension and
will not reach the respective boundaries of the length of the strings. Veena uses the principle of
partition. Hence, both X and Y will be unable to production of sound when a stretched string is
hear any sound. plucked.
15. Sound requires a material medium to travel through. The correct answer is B.
Since vacuum is devoid of any material medium, 22. Excessive and unwanted noise in the surrounding
sound cannot travel in it. Hence, after evacuating air attributes to noise pollution. Some of the
the chamber, no sound can be heard from the drum. problems caused by noise pollution are listed below.
16. Sound is the result of vibration of a membrane. It i. Hearing impairment
can propagate in a medium only. Dolphins and ii. Anxiety
whales are the species that reside underwater. iii. High blood pressure
They make sound that propagates in water by iv. Sleep disorder
vibrating its molecules. The vibration of water It is evident from the list that noise may cause
molecules is received by the other dolphin. Hence, hearing impairment.
communication underwater is possible because 23. Roadside noise pollution is primarily created by
sound can travel in water. vehicles’ engines and horns. Making road smooth
17. Microphone is a device that converts sound into may result in the reduction of air pollution. This
electrical signal like the human ear converts sound preventive measure cannot be attributed to the
into electrical impulse. In a microphone, diaphragm reduction of roadside noise pollution.
plays the role of an eardrum. It vibrates in Some of the preventive measures to reduce the
responseto sound and converts the incoming sound roadside noise pollution are listed below.
into electrical signal. i. Plantation of trees along the roads and around
18. The space that is devoid of any medium is called residential buildings helps in reducing noise.
as vacuum. In outer space, there is no medium ii. Installing silencers in the vehicles also helps
particle. Since sound cannot travel along vacuum, in reducing noise.
it is not possible for the astronauts to communicate iii. Regular servicing of vehicle engines is a must
using direct sound. in order to reduce road side noise pollution.
19. Sound requires a medium to travel. Therefore,
sound can travel through water. This property of IIT JEE WORKSHEET
sound is used in the detection of objects that are KEY
situated below the water surface. The sound
produced by SONAR can penetrate and pass 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
through water. A C C B D A A A
20. Sound requires a medium to travel. In deep space,
there is no medium present in which sound could 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
travel through. Since radio waves can travel in B A AC ABC BD ABCD AB B
vacuum, astronauts use walkie-talkie, which itself
uses radio waves, to communicate with each 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
other.The correct answer is A. A C A B 1 1 2
21. Veena is a musical instrument that consists of a
number of strings that are stretched along its length,
as shown in the following figure.
www.betoppers.com

QUESTIONS
16. v = 344 m/s,
f = 32Hz,  = ?
We know, v = f 
v
 λ =
f
344
= = 10.75 m
32
17. v = 330 m/s
 = 2.2 cm = 0.022m
f=?
We know, v = f 
v 330
 f= = Hz = 15,000 Hz
λ 0.022
18. = ?
f = 109Hz
v = 3 × 108 m/s
We know, v = f 
v 3×108
 λ= = m = 3 × 10–1m = 30 cm.
f 109
19. f = 256 Hz
v = 340 m/s
=?
Speed, v = f 
v 340
 = = = 1.33m
f 256
20. In 2 seconds, the number of waves produced =
256
 In 1 second the number of waves produced
265
= = 128
2
Therefore Frequency of the tuning fork = 128 Hz.
24. A-q; B-r; C-s
25. A-q; B-r; C-s; D-t
26. A-q; B-r; C-p
27. A-t; B-r; C-s; D-p
28. A-q; B-s; C-p; D-r
29. A-s; B-p; C-q; D-r
30. A-q; B-p; C-r

www.betoppers.com
7. HEAT
SOLUTIONS
3. Heat flows from hotter object to colder object.

FORMATIVE WORKSHEET Therefore, in this case, heat will flow from the solid
substance to water. As a result, the temperature of
Q.no 1 2 3 4 5 water will increase. However, the temperature of
Key B C D D C water cannot become more than 90°C. Therefore,
Q.no 6 11 12 13 14 the temperature of water will be in the range of
Key C C D A C 60°C to 90°C.The correct answer is D.
Q.no 15 16 17 18 19 4. When the hot water starts cooling, it loses heat to
the atmosphere as heat flows from the hotter body
Key C B B A A
to the colder body. Thus, with increase in the time,
Q.no 20 21 22 the temperature of water decreases. The correct
Key D D C answer is D.
5. Substances that allow heat to pass through them
HINTS/SOLUTIONS TO THE SELECTED easily are called conductors. Metals such as copper
QUESTIONS and aluminium are good conductors of heat. They
allow heat to pass through them easily. The correct
answer is C.
6. Dark-coloured clothes such as a black shirt absorb
1. There are two types of thermometer. most of the heat that is incident on them. Thus, dark-
1. Clinical thermometer coloured clothes should be worn in winters. On the
other hand, light-coloured clothes reflect most of
2. Laboratory thermometer the heat that falls on them. Thus, light-coloured
The thermometer that is used to check the clothes should be worn in summers.
temperature of a human is called clinical The range of laboratory thermometers is generally
thermometer. The temperature range that can be from –10°C to 110°C. They are used to measure
measured using a clinical thermometer is 35°C to the temperature of any object other than the human
42°C. This is because the temperature of a human body. On the other hand, the range of a clinical
rarely goes below 35°C or above 42°C. thermometer is from 35°C to 42°C. It is used to
measure the temperature of human body.
7. We know that C = 5/9 (F – 32)
= 5/9 (86 – 32) = 5/9 × 54 = 30
Therefore, 86 °F = 30 °C
8. We know that F = (C × 9/5) + 32
We are given that C = 45,
A laboratory thermometer is used to measure Fahrenheit = (45 × 9/5) + 32 °F = (81+ 32) °F
temperature of different objects. The range of = 113 °F
temperature that a laboratory thermometer can 9. We know that F = (C × 9/5) + 32
measure is generally from –10°C to 110°C. a) C = 35
Fahrenheit = (35 × 9/5) + 32 °F
= (63+ 32) °F = 95 °F
b) C = 15
Fahrenheit = (15 × 9/5) + 32 °F
= (27+ 32) °F = 59 °F
10. We know that C = 5/9 (F – 32)
The correct answer is B. a) F = 95 °F
C = 5/9 (95 – 32) = 5/9 × 63 = 35 °C
2. Heat flows from a body at higher temperature to a body
b) F = 41°F
at lower temperature. Hence, heat will flow from the ball
C = 5/9 (41 – 32) = 5/9 × 9 = 5°C
to the water. The correct answer is C.
11. Conduction is a process in which heat is transferred 20. During convection, the hot air near the surface of
from the hotter end to the colder end. In solids, heat Earth moves up, while the cool and denser air moves
is generally transferred by the process of toward the surface of Earth.
conduction. The correct answer is D.
The correct answer is C. 21. A medium is required for the heat transfer by the
12. Aluminium, being a metal, is a good conductor of process of convection. The process of transferring
heat. Heat is transferred from a hotter end to a heat through a fluid (liquid or gas) is called
colder end of an object by the process of conduction. convection. On the other hand, no medium is required
Therefore, wax starts melting first as a result of for heat transfer by the process of radiation. For
conduction. example, the earth receives heat energy from the
The correct answer is D. sun by the process of radiation.
13. On heating, the wax melts. Heat is transferred from The correct answer is D.
the hotter end to the colder end of an object by the 22. Convection is the transfer of heat energy by the
process of conduction. Thus, heat is transferred from actual movement of molecules. Since molecules are
the end nearest to the flame to the other end. Thus, tightly packed in solids and cannot move from their
pin I which is nearest to the flame will drop first. positions, heat transfer by convection cannot take
The correct answer is A. place in solids. Thus, heat transfer by convection
14. Copper is a good conductor of heat. Hence, kitchen can take place only in liquids and gases.
utensils are provided with a copper base. Heat transfer by radiation involves energy transfer
The correct answer is C. by electromagnetic radiation. Electromagnetic
15. Heat flows from a body at a higher temperature to radiations do not require any medium to travel.
a body at a lower temperature. Therefore, heat Therefore, heat transfer by radiation can take place
flows from water at 70 °C to water at 50 °C. Hence, without any medium. Hence, the given statements
the temperature of the mixture will be in between are correctly completed by row C.
50 °C and 70 °C. The correct answer is C.
16. In coastal areas, people experience an interesting CONCEPTIVE WORKSHEET
phenomenon because of the process of convection.
During night time, water cools down more slowly Q.no 1 2 3 4 5
than land. Hence, cool air from the land moves Key B D A C C
towards the sea. This phenomenon is called land
Q.no 6 7 8 9 10
breeze.
Key B C B D C
Thus, land breeze is the cool air that blows from
Q.no 11 12 13 14 15
the land to the sea during night time.
The correct answer is B. Key C A D A A
17. Metals such as aluminium allow heat to pass through Q.no 16 17
them. Hence, aluminium is a good conductor of Key A C
heat. On the other hand, air is a poor conductor of HINTS/SOLUTIONS TO THE SELECTED
heat. QUESTIONS
18. During the daytime, the land gets heated more 1. Clinical thermometers are used to measure the
quickly than the water. The air present over the temperature of the human body. The temperature
land becomes hot and rises up. The air over the sea of the human body rarely goes below 35°C or above
being cooler takes its place. Thus, the warm air 42°C. Hence, clinical thermometers have a
from the land moves towards the sea to complete temperature range of 35°C to 42°C.
the cycle. This cycle is known as the sea breeze. The correct answer is B.
The correct answer is A. 2. The units used to measure temperature are
19. Here, the student needs to classify various ways of Fahrenheit, Celsius, and Kelvin. Pascal is a unit of
heat transfer. Conduction is a process of transfer pressure.
of heat within a material itself or between materials The correct answer is D.
in contact with each other. Hence, heat transfer
within the rods takes place by conduction.
www.betoppers.com
Heat Solutions 181
3. If the bigger marks read one degree and there are 12. The process of heat transfer from the hotter end of
ten small divisions, then one small division will read an object to a colder end is called conduction. In
1 solids, heat is generally transferred by the process
 0.1C . of conduction. Therefore, it requires a medium.
10
The correct answer is A. The correct answer is A.
4. Fahrenheit scale (°F) measurement of temperature 13. Wooden handles of cooking utensils is an application
was used earlier. The temperature range of a clinical of the principle of conduction of heat. Wood is a
thermometer is 35°C – 42°C, which is equivalent poor conductor of heat. Hence, cooking utensils are
to 94°F – 108°F range on the Fahrenheit scale. provided with wooden handles.
5. The human body temperature may vary depending The correct answer is D.
on various factors. However, the average human 14. Light colours absorb less radiation than dark colours.
body temperature is 37°C. Thus, it makes us feel more comfortable during
The correct answer is C. summers.
6. A clinical thermometer is used to measure the
temperature of the human body. Since the average
body temperature is 37°C, the temperature of the 15. Radiation is the phenomena by which
human body does not go above 42°C or below 35°C. electromagnetic rays travel without any medium.
Hence, a clinical thermometer has a temperature These rays heat the surface without actually heating
range of 35 – 42°C. the medium.
The correct answer is B. The correct answer is A.
7. Before a thermometer is used, it should be ensured
that the mercury level is below 35ºC. A clinical 16. On dipping the spoon in the hot tea, one end of spoon
thermometer is designed to measure the temperature is exposed to hot tea while the other end is in contact
of a human body. The average body temperature is with comparatively less hot surroundings. Also,
around 37ºC. Thus, clinical thermometer has a range transfer of heat takes place from high temperature
of 35ºC to 42ºC. to low temperature. Metals are good conductors of
The correct answer is C. heat. In solids, transfer of heat takes place through
8. Laboratory thermometers are used for accurately conduction. Thus, the temperature of spoon
measuring the temperature in a variety of mediums. increases by the process of conduction.
The range of laboratory thermometers is –10ºC to The correct answer is A.
110ºC.
Clinical thermometer is used for measuring the 17. The light of the sun contains heat. During summers,
temperature of human body only. A maximum- this heat is very intense and a person who is exposed
minimum thermometer is used to measure the to direct sunlight feels very hot. An umbrella
maximum and minimum temperatures of a day. prevents this heat from reaching to the person
The correct answer is B. directly. Hence, the person under the umbrella feels
9. Heat flows from a body at higher temperature to a comfortable.
body at lower temperature. The correct answer is C.
10. Heat energy always flows from a body at higher SUMM ATIVE WORKSHEET
temperature to a body at lower temperature. Hence,
the ice cube starts melting because the heat energy Q.no 1 2 3 4 5
of the palm gets transferred to the ice cube. The Key A C A A C
transfer of this heat causes the ice cube to melt on Q.no 6 7 8 9 10
the palm. Key C D B C D
The correct answer is C. 11 12 13 14 15
Q.no
11. The materials which do not allow heat to pass
Key C B A C B
through them are called insulators or poor
conductors of heat. Plastic does not allow heat to
pass through it. Therefore, it is an insulator of heat.
www.betoppers.com
HINTS/SOLUTIONS TO THE SELECTED be transferred to the ice cube and this would result
QUESTIONS in the melting of the ice and the cooling of the hand
of the holder. Hence, examples II and IV represent
1. It can be observed from the given activity that dark heat transfer by conduction.
colours absorb more heat than light colours. This The correct answer is C.
suggests that dark-coloured clothes should be 6. A thermometer has a bulb containing mercury.
avoided in summers when the temperature is very When this bulb is brought in contact with a
high. substance, transfer of heat take place from the
The correct answer is A. substance to the bulb and then to the mercury.
2. Heat transfer by radiation does not require any Mercury expands as it absorbs heat. Hence, the
medium. For example, no medium is present level of mercury in the thermometer rises. This is
between the Earth and the sun, but heat is an example of heat transfer by conduction.
transferred from the sun to the Earth. This transfer The correct answer is D.
of heat takes place by radiation. 7. The process of conduction, which occurs in solids,
The correct answer is C. involves heat transfer from the hotter end to the
3. Heat transfer in an iron nail takes place by cooler end. The transfer of heat by this process
conduction. If an iron nail is heated at one end, then always requires a medium. Thus, conduction is not
heat is transferred from the hotter end to cooler possible in vacuum.
end of the iron nail by the process of conduction. The correct answer is B.
Water is a bad conductor of heat. Heat transfer in 8. While measuring the temperature of an object, the
water takes place by the process of convection. thermometer should not be tilted. It should be upright
When water near the heat source becomes hot, hot and surrounded from all the sides by the substance
water rises and cold water from the side moves whose temperature is to be measured. The bulb of
down towards the source of heat. This process the thermometer should not touch the surface of
continues till all the water gets heated and this the container in which the substance is present. Thus,
process is called convection. among the given students, only Suraj has noted the
The correct answer is A. temperature in the correct manner.
4. In coastal regions, land breeze is formed during The correct answer is D.
nighttime when the land becomes cooler than the 9. The normal body temperature of a human being is
sea. The hot air present above the sea rises up and 37°C. The figure of the thermometer that was used
the cooler air above the land moves to take its place. for measuring the body temperature of Q shows
Hence, a heat transfer takes place and the cooler the mercury thread at 37°C. Thus, the temperature
land becomes warm at night. of Q is equal to that of the temperature of a normal
human being.
10. Human temperature is measured by clinical
thermometers on the Celsius scale, which is
indicated by °C. As shown in the figure, the mercury
During the day, the land gets heated faster than thread is three divisions above the bigger mark
water. As a result, the air above the land become showing 39°C. Since the larger divisions represent
hot and rises. The relatively cooler air from sea one degree and there are five smaller divisions
moves toward the land to takes its place. The warm between two larger divisions, one small division
air also moves toward the sea. Hence, the heat is 1
transferred due to the movement of air form land reads  0.2C . Hence, three small divisions will
5
to sea and vice-versa. read 0.6°C. Therefore, the temperature of the
The correct answer is A. patient is 39.6°C.
5. During conduction, heat is transferred by the direct The correct answer is D.
contact between the two substances. While shaking 11. The degree of hotness of an object is measured by
hands, heat from the warmer hand is passed on to its temperature. The device used for measuring the
the cooler one. Similarly, the hand of the ice cube temperature of an object is called a thermometer.
holder will be relatively warmer. Hence, heat will 12. Temperature is the measure of the hotness of a
www.betoppers.com
Heat Solutions 183
substance. Higher the temperature of a substance, Thermometer

hotter the substance is. On this basis, the decreasing The thermometer used to measure our body
order of the given liquids according to their hotness temperature is called a clinical thermometer.
is Mercury thermometers are used to measure
(II) > (I)> (III) > (IV) any temperature.
The correct answer is B. b) Celsius scale and Fahrenheit scale
13. On dipping the spoon in the hot tea, one end of spoon Celsius scale is indicated by °C. On this scale
is exposed to hot tea while the other end is in contact the melting point of ice is taken as 0 °C and
with comparatively less hot surroundings. Also, the boiling point of water as 100 °C.
transfer of heat takes place from high temperature Fahrenheit scale is indicated by °F. On this
to low temperature. Metals are good conductors of scale, 32 °F is taken as the melting point of ice
heat. In solids, transfer of heat takes place through and 212 °F as the boiling point of water.
conduction. Thus, the temperature of spoon 6. The temperature of ice before heating = –2°C
increases by the process of conduction. The temperature of water = 10°C
The correct answer is A. Therefore, the net change in temperature
14. Heat energy always flows from a body at higher = 10°C – (–2°C) = 12°C
temperature to a body at lower temperature. Hence, The correct answer is D.
the ice cube starts melting because the heat energy 7. From the given figures:
of the palm gets transferred to the ice cube. The Temperature of water after heating = 80ºC
transfer of this heat causes the ice cube to melt on After two hours, the temperature of water = 30ºC
the palm. Hence, the total decrease in the temperature of
The correct answer is C. water is 80ºC – 30ºC = 50ºC.
15. Laboratory thermometers are used for accurately The correct answer is B.
measuring the temperature in a variety of mediums. 8. Temperature is the measure of hotness of
The range of laboratory thermometers is –10ºC to substances. The higher the temperature, the hotter
110ºC. will be the substance.The temperatures of X and Y
Clinical thermometer is used for measuring the after removing the heat source are 40°C and 60°C
temperature of human body only. A maximum- respectively. Hence, liquid X is at a lower
minimum thermometer is used to measure the temperature after the removal of the heat source.
maximum and minimum temperatures of a day. The decrease in the temperature of liquid X = 90°C
The correct answer is B. – 40°C = 50°C. The correct answer is A.
9. In the given thermometers, one bigger division
HOTS WORKSHEET represents 1°C and one smaller division represent
0.2°C. Mercury thread in thermometer I is two
1. a. Temperature divisions above the 39°C mark. Thus, the
b. Energy temperature is 39.4°C.
c. Joule The correct answer is A.
2. (A) False. It s the measurement of hotness or 10. a) Conduction
coldness of a body. Conduction of heat energy can occur within a
(B) True. body or between two bodies when they are in
(C) False. Temperature is measured in Celsius or contact with each other.
Fahrenheit Scale. b) Convection
(D) True. This method by which heat is transferred by
3. Clinical Thermometer. the mass movement of the liquid or gas itself
The correct answer is (C) is called convection.
4. Heat always flows from a body at higher c) Radiation
temperature to lower temperature. Radiation is the form of heat transfer that can
Heat energy will flow from our body to the occur in the absence of a medium.
surroundings if the surroundings are at a lower 11. Conduction, convection, and radiation are different
temperature than our body. modes of heat transfer.
The correct answer is (C) The correct answer is (B)
5. a) A Clinical Thermometer and a Mercury
www.betoppers.com
12. Convection does not occur in Vacuum. i)There is a little arrow (at 98.4 or 98.6 °F)
The correct answer is (A) showing the nor mal body temperature.
13. In fluids, heat transfer takes place primarily due to ii) There is a constriction or ‘kink’ in the tube
convection. near the bulb. This kink has been made to
ensure that the mercury in the thermometer
The correct answer is (B)
does not contract (and flow back into the bulb)
14. a) Conduction of heat and Convection before the temperature has been read.
Conduction of heat energy can occur within a 21. A  r ; B  t; C  s ; D  p ; E  q
body or between two bodies when they are in
contact with each other.
IIT JEE WORKSHEET
The method by which heat is transferred by
the mass movement of the liquid or gas itself 1. A body gaining heat feels hot.
is called convection. 2. D
b) Conductors and Insulators 3. Temperature is the physical quantity which
The substances that conduct heat easily are measures the amount of heat in a body.
called conductors. For example, metals are The correct answer is (A)
good conductors of heat. 4. One litre of water at 30o C is mixed with one
Substances such as wood, straw, clay, rubber, litre of water at 60o C, the temperature of the
glass, and Bakelite (a kind of plastic) do not mixture will be between 30oC & 60oC.
conduct heat very well and are called The correct answer is (D)
insulators. 5. A steel cup at 400oC is dropped in a container of
15. As Copper is a metal, it is a good conductor of heat. water at 40o C, then heat will flow from cup to
water. The correct answer is (A)
The correct answer is (D)
6. Normal temperature of human body is 37oC or
16. Wool is the bad conductor of heat.
98.4oF. The correct answer is (C)
The correct answer is (A) 7. (D)
17. a) Convection b) Radiation 8. (C)
c) Conduction d) Convection 9. (B)
e) Conduction 10. (D)
18. a) Conduction b) Radiation 11. A, B, C, D
19. a) We wear woolen clothes in winter because 12. A, B, C, D
wool is a bad conductor of heat. Thus, it helps 13. A, B, C, D
in retaining body warmth. 14. A, D
b) This is because white clothes absorb 15 (D)
comparatively less amount of heat than dark 16. (A)
clothes, and therefore keep us relatively cooler. 17. (A)
20. a) Reasons for use of Mercury in thermometers. 18. (A)
i) Mercury remains in the liquid state for a wide 19. (B)
range of temperature. 20. (C)
21. 1 kilo calorie = 1000 calories
ii) It melts at – 38.87 °C and boils only at 356.58
°C. 22. Ice point in Fahrenheit is 32°F
23. A –(s); B – (p); C – (q)
iii) It is relatively easy to see because of its silvery
grey colour. 24. A –(p),(r); B – (s); C – (q)
25. A –(q); B – (p); C – (r)
iv) It does not stick to glass.
26. A –(s); B – (r); C – (q)
v) It has a fairly uniform rate of expansion for a
wide range of temperatures. 
b) Special features of Mercury Clinical
Thermometer
www.betoppers.com

IIT Foundation Class 7 Physics

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

IIT Foundation Class 7 Physics

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

IIT FOUNDATION

The moral rights of the author’s have been asserted.

Published by : USN Eductech Private Limited

The important features of this books are:

• Objective Type with Single Answer Correct • Non-Objective Type

Wish you all the best!!!

4. Electric Current & Its Effects .......... 57 - 80

5. Wind, Storm and Cyclones .......... 81 - 94

6. Sound .......... 95 - 108

7. Heat .......... 109 - 122

8. Key and Answers .......... 123 - 184

• Physical Quantity • Measurement of Time

Rules for writing symbols of Units Positive Prefix or Symbol

8. 1 hectare = _______________. 16. Match the following

12. The symbol for unit of force in M.K.S. I. Least Count

The diameter of spherical object = x2 – x1

27. Arrange the following lengths in their increasing

iii) Hour Glass

47. How many small squares are there in 1sq.cm ?

Conceptive Worksheet Relation between 1 m3 and 1cm3

Conceptive Worksheet 12. Measurement of Density

64. 5 litre of alcohol has a mass of 4 kg, then the density

Formative Worksheet 13. Relative Density

Summative Worksheet HOTS Worksheet

12. If 1 g cms–1 = x Newton - second, then the number

32. A syringe has a capacity of 5 ml. Its capacity in cm3

1. Introduction 3. Types of Motion

Examples: Note:In circular motion, the position of a body

5. Distance & Displacement

12. Find the distance and displacement if the body

6. Distance and Time Graphs

28. Which position versus time graph represents a

Distance (in km)

Time (in sec)

(D) (C) 100 km/h (D) 125 km/h

What is the speed of the ball?

Which table correctly describes the relationship

between the speeds of Ethan and Jacob during first

(A) During the Speed of Ethan

During the Speed of Ethan >

(B) Speed of Jacob

During the Speed of Ethan =

(D) During the Speed of Ethan <

27. Speedometer of a car measures ?

25. A bus travels a certain distance with a speed 30 800

ms-1 and returns with a speed 20ms-1 700

shown by fig ,then the dispalcement is (r is radius) 300

r 36. Show the shape of the distance-time graph for the

Distance (in m)

d) 40 m/s r) 0.03 km/s

Distance (in mm)

of snail. Identify it. 1 

100  (A) A (B) B (C) C (D) D

80  8. A delivery by Brett Lee from Australia was bowled

12. Plot a distance-time graph for the given data and

13. The distance between two stations is 240 km. A

The given table shows the distance

Which cyclist will take the maximum time to

5. Two athletes, Ajay and Rahul, are participating in

(D) i ii 17. If a body completes one complete revolution in a

1. Light reflect the light incident on them which on entering

Virtual image Real image

Lateral Inversion: The phenomenon clue to which

III. Paragraph Type